JP7788161B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and slot machine gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a lottery is held to determine whether a jackpot will be awarded based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting slot, and a display device displays a changing pattern that freezes in place depending on the result of the lottery. If the lottery results in a jackpot, the display device displays a frozen jackpot pattern, creating a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, many gaming machines have been proposed that display changing symbols on a display device and statically display the symbols in a manner that corresponds to the lottery results, while also implementing effects that indicate the player's hope for a win (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-220861 A

However, there is room for further improvement in this type of presentation. Therefore, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that incorporates innovative presentation techniques to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game.

Means 1: Acquisition means for acquiring start information when a start condition is met;
a determination means for determining whether to grant a benefit based on start information for which a start condition is satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
a pattern changing means for changing a pattern when the determination means makes a determination;
a storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of start information in which the start condition is not satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
a pre-determination means for determining whether the determination means will determine to grant a benefit based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied, before the determination by the determination means is made;
a performance control means capable of controlling the performance based on the start information;
A performance display device on which the performance is displayed;
An operation means operable by a player,
The effects include a first special effect,
In the first special effect, the display inside the special area, which is a part of the display area of the effect display device, is displayed in a first special display mode, and the display mode of the display inside the special area is changed from the first special display mode to a second special display mode, but even if the display mode changes from the first special display mode to the second special display mode, the expectation of the awarding of the special benefit does not change,
In the first special performance, the first special display mode is changed to the second special display mode, and after changing to the second special display mode, it is possible to change to the first special display mode,
In the first special effect, the operation of the operation means is valid,
In a situation where the first special effect is being performed, a second special effect different from the first special effect can be performed, and the second special effect can be performed based on the establishment of the start condition when the predetermined number of start information items are not stored in the storage means,
In a situation where the first special effect is being performed, even if the start condition is established when the predetermined number of start information items are not stored in the storage means, the probability that the second special effect based on the establishment of the start condition will not be performed is higher in the case of a pattern variation that awards the benefit than in the case of a pattern variation that does not award the benefit,
The second special effect is a cyclic display in which the outline line of the special display body changes within a predetermined time period on the effect display device, and can be displayed even when the decorative pattern does not form a reach state,
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, an immediate effect different from the second special effect can be executed,
Furthermore, when the start condition is established in a pattern variation in which the first special effect is executed but the benefit is not granted, the second special effect and the instant effect can be started simultaneously based on the establishment of the start condition,
Furthermore, when the first special effect is executed and the start condition is established in the pattern variation in which the benefit is granted, the second special effect can be started based on the establishment of the start condition, but the immediate effect is not performed,
Furthermore, if the symbol change occurring at the timing when the start condition is established is a symbol change that grants the benefit, the immediate effect will not be started based on the establishment of the start condition.
A gaming machine characterized by:

This invention provides a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a front view showing an example of a schematic appearance of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. Figure 3(a) is a flowchart showing the control processing procedure performed by the main control MPU of the main control board when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, and Figure 3(b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control performed periodically by the main control MPU of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol process processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for first special symbol process processing. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for control performed by a peripheral control MPU mounted on a peripheral control board when power is turned on to a pachinko machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance when an effective operation period for an attack performance occurs (a period during which a specified operation on a specified operation unit is detected, or which ends when a specified time has passed since the start of the period), and an operation to launch an attack is performed during the effective operation period. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance when an effective operation period for an attack performance occurs (a period during which a specified operation on a specified operation unit is detected, or which ends when a specified time has passed since the start of the period), and an operation to launch an attack is performed during the effective operation period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect when the operating unit is not operated. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect in which operation of the operation section has already begun at the start of the effective operation period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect in which operation of the operation section has already begun at the start of the effective operation period. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance in which the rotation operation unit 302 is operated before the effective operation period in another example of the second performance pattern of the attack performance. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing other configuration examples of the pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a cancelable attack effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a cancelable attack effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a strong boss is encountered in a search quest presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a strong boss is encountered in a search quest presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a character discovers a weak boss that is a rare animal in a search quest presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a search quest presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which two selected characters are unable to find a rare animal in a search quest presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a search quest presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a search quest presentation. This is another example of exploration quest presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the final battle reach of Daruma-san ga Koronda. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the final battle reach of Daruma-san ga Koronda. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance game where Daruma-san falls down. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a relay race presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing other examples of relay station effects and section breakthrough effects included in relay race effects. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of a fluctuation pattern table. A figure showing an example of a timing chart for the reach selection preview performance. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach selection preview effect. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach selection preview effect. An explanatory diagram showing another example of a reach selection preview performance. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a star change effect executed during a reach selection preview effect. A figure showing an example of a timing chart for the reach promotion preview performance. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach promotion preview effect. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach promotion preview effect. A figure showing an example of a timing chart of a reach execution notice performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach execution notice presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach execution notice presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach execution notice presentation. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which no weapon is selected in the reach execution preview presentation. A figure showing an example of the data configuration of a character equipment allocation table used in the reach execution preview performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a couple presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of a pattern allocation table for determining the effect pattern of the smart ball croon effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a smart ball croon effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a smart ball croon effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance in which a ball rotates on a crane in a smart ball crane performance.

[1. Example of a Pachinko Machine Configuration]
1 is a front view showing an example of the outline of the exterior of a pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a game board 5 that is visible to the player and has a game area 5a into which the player can shoot game balls and into which the game balls can flow down.

The gaming area 5a includes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. When a gaming ball enters the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number of gaming balls (e.g., five) are paid out. When a gaming ball enters the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number of gaming balls (e.g., four) are paid out and a first special lottery is conducted. The first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are collectively referred to as the starting openings.

When a gaming ball passes through gate section 2003, a regular lottery is held. If a winning ticket is awarded in the regular lottery, an opening/closing member (not shown) provided on second starting opening 2004 opens for a predetermined time. A gaming ball can enter second starting opening 2004 only when the opening/closing member is open. When a gaming ball enters second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, one) are paid out, and a second special lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special lottery, is held. The first special lottery and second special lottery are collectively referred to as special lotteries.

Within the play area 5a, multiple obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front. When the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the speed at which the game ball flows down is reduced and various movements are imparted to the game ball, allowing players to enjoy watching its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails, the play area 5a also has windmills (not shown) at appropriate positions that rotate when the game ball comes into contact with them.

If a jackpot is won in the first or second special lottery, the game transitions to the jackpot gaming state, and the large prize opening 2005 opens. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 15) are paid out. In the jackpot gaming state, the large prize opening 2005 repeatedly opens and closes. In addition, the gaming area 5a is arranged to surround an area where gaming balls do not flow down, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is arranged in this area where gaming balls do not flow down.

The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a pressing operation unit 303 and a rotation operation unit 302, which are each effect operation units that can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 is an operation unit that can be pressed by the player. The rotation operation unit 302 is an annular operation unit that is arranged around the lower side of the pressing operation unit 303 and can be rotated by the player. The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotatable in one direction (for example, only clockwise) or in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). The rotation operation unit 302 also has a detection unit that can detect operation by the player.

The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a handle unit 500 that can be operated by a player to shoot game balls stored in an upper tray (not shown) into the game area 5a. The handle unit 500 includes a handle lever, a handle touch sensor, and a shot stop button. When the handle touch sensor detects contact with the player's palm, fingers, etc. and the handle rotates more than a predetermined amount, the game ball is shot out; the more the handle is rotated, the more powerfully the game ball is shot out. Furthermore, even if the handle touch sensor detects contact and the handle has rotated more than the predetermined amount, the game ball will not be shot out if the shot stop button is operated.

Although not visible in Figure 1, an outlet that runs from front to back is formed at the lowest point within the play area 5a (behind the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302). Game balls that flow down to the bottom end of the play area 5a are guided to the outlet and passed through the outlet to be discharged to the rear of the play board 5.

Figure 2 is a block diagram outlining the control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 63 attached to the main frame, with each board performing its own control function. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during gameplay based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 63 is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of game balls, etc., and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of game balls by rotating the handle.

The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a main control MPU, a microprocessor that incorporates ROM for storing various processing programs and commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches, a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also incorporates a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 receives detection signals via the main control I/O port from the first start gate sensor 3052, which detects game balls received at the first start gate 2002; the gate sensor 2801, which detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003; the second start gate sensor 2401, which detects game balls received at the second start gate 2004; the general prize gate sensor 3051, which detects game balls received at the general prize gate 2001; the special prize gate sensor 2402, which detects game balls received at the special prize gate 2005; the outlet sensor 3053, which detects game balls received at the outlet; and the magnetic sensor 2404, which detects unauthorized magnetism within the play area 5a.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs control signals from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting drive signals to the second starting port solenoid 2415 and the attacca solenoid 2418, etc., and also outputs drive signals from the main control I/O port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal hold indicator, first special pattern indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special hold number indicator, round indicator, etc. of the function display unit 1400.

The main control MPU transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 63, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 63. Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 63, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The payout control board 63, which controls the payout of game balls, is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b that controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed using the ball feed solenoid 145, an error LED indicator (not shown) that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error reset switch (not shown) for resetting errors displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch that, during maintenance, ejects game balls from the ball tank (not shown), tank rail (not shown), ball guidance unit (not shown), and payout device (not shown) to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starts the ball removal operation.

The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing on the dispensing control board 63, is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device, and a dispensing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various game-related information (game information) and various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 serially via the payout control I/O port, and also receives the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port.It also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, and the payout detection sensor 591.

Detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit and the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port. Furthermore, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal to drive the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O to the payout motor 584, outputs a signal to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port to the error LED indicator, serially transmits commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls actually paid out to an external terminal via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by keeping track of the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information for the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. There are two types of errors: strong errors, which are signaled by stopping play, and weak errors, which are signaled while play continues. An error detected by the launched ball sensor (not shown) that detects game ball B shot into the play area 5a and an error detected by an illegal magnet within the play area 5a are examples of strong errors. Examples of weak errors include a full tank error (an error indicating that the false cover unit (not shown) is full of game balls B stored therein, based on a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor (not shown) provided in the false cover unit (not shown), which receives game balls that have missed into the game area 5a and discharges them into a lower tray (not shown)), a ball out error (an error indicating that there are no game balls B in the payout device (not shown), based on a detection signal from a ball out detection sensor 574 attached to the payout device), and a counting switch error (an error indicating a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 591, which is attached to the payout passage (not shown) in the payout device and detects game balls B).

The launch control unit 633b controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery using the ball delivery solenoid 145. The launch control unit 633b controls the launch solenoid 542 and the ball delivery solenoid 145 so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute.

In the handle unit 500, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle, and the shot stop button sensor 194, which detects whether the player wishes to forcibly stop the shooting of the game ball, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects the rotation position of the handle. The strength with which the game ball is shot toward the play area 5a is electrically adjusted according to the detected rotation position.

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

The peripheral control unit 1511, which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a sound source IC that produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by this sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the decorative board 184, based on these various commands, in order to output lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs, etc., provided on the game board 5, door frame, etc., decorative board 184, and transmits drive data from the serial I/O port for the game board decorative drive board to the drive motors that operate various performance units. It transmits door-side drive light-emitting data, which is composed of door-side light-emitting data for sending signals to a motor or drive solenoid, door-side drive light-emitting data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs etc. mounted on the decorative board 184 of the door frame etc., from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, transmits control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512, and also outputs control signals (sound commands) to the sound source IC for extracting sound information from the sound ROM.

In addition, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 and the rotation detection sensor 347 of the rotation operation unit 302 are input to the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and controls the playback of music, sound effects, and other sounds that match various performances from speakers 354 installed on the door frame, main body frame, etc.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU uses both the built-in WDT and the external WDT to diagnose whether its own system is running out of control.

The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data for the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

Next, we will explain an example of the control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU). Figure 3(a) is a flowchart showing the procedure for the control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in Figure 3(a), the main control board 1310 in this embodiment first initializes the data stored in various registers and the RAM built into the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as the main control built-in RAM) in step S1, provided that the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 has been operated. The RAM clear switch is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Furthermore, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to operation before a predetermined period (e.g., one second) has elapsed since power was turned on, and if the main control MPU determines that a clear signal has been input when power is turned on, it executes the initialization process (step S1) to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to save information indicating the progress of play (for example, various flags, etc.) in the main control's built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the information saved in the main control's built-in RAM in the backup process is referenced without executing the initialization process (step S1), and a recovery process is executed to restore the state according to that information. Furthermore, if the RAM clear switch is operated when power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, an initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process, and the pachinko machine 1 is set to its initial state. Furthermore, if the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to a non-time-shortened state.

Next, in step S2, a random number, which is a number that is updated within a predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, the main control board 1310 in this embodiment is equipped with a random number counter that stores random numbers such as special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used in the lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol stops, a variable random number used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required to control the variable display of the special symbol, a reach random number used in the lottery process for determining whether or not to make a reach (execute a performance) as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special symbol, a pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number) used in the lottery process for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that a jackpot has occurred based on the special random number, and a random number (normal random number) used in the lottery process for determining whether or not to win, which triggers the opening of the second starting port 2004.

In this example, the reach random number is configured to be the same for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol; that is, the reach random number is obtained from the same counter that updates the reach random number whether the start win is at the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004. However, the execution rate of the reach effect may be varied by obtaining the reach random number from a counter with a different range of random numbers that updates the reach random number, or the execution rate of the reach effect may be varied by providing a reach determination table that is compared with the obtained reach random number; a first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second reach determination table that corresponds to the second special symbol and has a determination value different from that of the first reach determination table.

In the processing of step S2, only the random numbers that are not related to winning or losing (variable random numbers) are updated, and the random number counter is operated in such a way that it counts. After the processing of steps S1 and S2 is performed in this manner, only the processing of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

Figure 3(b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control, which is periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figure 3(b), this interrupt control first involves a register save process in step S11. Next, in step S12, detection signals are input from various sensors, including the gate sensor 2801, the first start gate sensor 3052, the second start gate sensor 2401, the first count sensor that detects a game ball B received in the special prize gate 2005, the general prize gate sensor 3001, and various magnetic sensors. Next, in step S13, a random number update process is performed to update the value of the random number counter that generates the random numbers. Note that in step S13, the random numbers (special random numbers, general random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special and general symbols is stopped are updated, and the random number counter is operated.

After the random number has been updated in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes special symbol process processing in step S14, which includes lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This special symbol process processing will be described later, but essentially, the relevant processing is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flags (first special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag) that indicate the progress of the game and are stored in the main control built-in RAM.

Next, in step S15, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes normal symbol process processing, which includes lottery processing related to the winning or losing of the winning combination that triggers the opening of the second starting slot 2004. Note that in this normal symbol process processing, the appropriate processing is also selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag, which indicates the progress of the game.

Furthermore, once the special symbol process processing (step S14) and normal symbol process processing (step S15) have been performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs step S16, which transmits the commands set in a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM during the special symbol process processing to the peripheral control board 1510, etc. Next, in step S17, it transmits the commands set in a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM during the normal symbol process processing to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510, etc.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs information output processing in step S18, outputting data such as winning information to be supplied to the hall management computer, for example.

Next, in step S19, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes prize ball processing to output a payout control command to the payout control board 63 so that prize balls corresponding to the signals are paid out to the player when the detection signals of the first start opening sensor 3052, the second start opening sensor 2401, the first count sensor, the second count sensor, the general winning opening sensor 3051, etc. are in the ON state. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 63 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, which pays out prize balls to the player. In this example, when game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 and the first start opening sensor 3052 turns on, "3 balls" are paid out to the player; when game ball B enters the second start opening 2004 and the second start opening sensor 2401 turns on, "1 ball" is paid out; when game ball B enters the special prize opening 2005 and the first count sensor turns on, "15 balls" are paid out; and when game ball B enters the general prize opening 2001 and the general prize opening sensor 3051 turns on, "8 balls" are paid out to the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process in step S20 to check whether the number of reserved memories has increased or decreased. Then, in step S21, it executes a test terminal process, which outputs a test signal so that the control status of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed externally. After that, it controls the drive of the actuators that operate continuously (step S22), restores the contents of the registers (step S23), and ends this control when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24).

In this embodiment, the game control process is initiated every 4 ms through the above control. Note that, although this embodiment executes the game control process through timer-based interrupt processing, the interrupt processing may, for example, simply set a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred. In this case, however, the game control process will be executed during the main processing.

Figure 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14). Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in Figure 4, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes the start-up winning determination process (S31).

An example of the start winning determination process will be explained below. When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, it obtains from the random number counter a first special random number for determining the result of the first special lottery, a reach random number for determining whether a reach will be executed, a first pattern random number, and a variable random number for determining the variable pattern. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the number of reserved first special random numbers stored in the main control's built-in RAM, with a predetermined number (e.g., four) as the upper limit (in other words, if the number of reserved numbers has already reached the upper limit, the update process will not be performed).

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may execute a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the acquired first special random number, reach random number, first pattern random number, and variable random number, whether the display result of the first special pattern variable display is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game effect to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning.

This pre-determination process compares the acquired first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, and variable random number with a pre-determination table (not shown) to determine in advance pre-determination information indicating whether a jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot if a jackpot will occur, and if not, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the type of game effect to be executed, etc. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sends a command that associates this pre-determination information with the value of the counter in the reserved memory (i.e., which reserved first special random number the pre-determination information corresponds to) to the peripheral control board 1510 before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started (the start condition is met), allowing the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a so-called pre-reading effect corresponding to the start winning before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started (the start condition is met).

The processing performed when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 2004 is the same as the processing performed when a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, although the random numbers and tables used for the judgment are different, so a description of this will be omitted.

Following the start determination process in step S31, the main control MPU determines whether a jackpot in progress flag, indicating that control is being exercised for a jackpot game, is set (step S32). If the jackpot in progress flag is set, the main control MPU executes a jackpot control process (step S36) to control the jackpot game. In the jackpot control process, if the results of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops (the result of the hit determination and the details of the jackpot type) indicate, for example, a "15R jackpot," the main control MPU executes a process to control the game to a 15R jackpot game, in which the main prize opening 2005 is opened for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected that 10 game balls B have entered the main prize opening 2005, and the opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times.

In addition, during the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot opening 2005, a process for setting a time-saving flag is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control (control executed in the time-saving state) is being executed, and is set when the jackpot game based on the time-saving controlled jackpot ends after the jackpot game ends, and is reset by the first special symbol stop process described below or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process processing described below.

Furthermore, if the jackpot in progress flag is not set, the main control MPU executes a first special pattern process including a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops (step S34), provided that the value of the second special reserve number counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area, is "0" (step S33), and executes a second special pattern process including a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops (step S35), provided that the value of the second special reserve number counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area, is not "0" (step S33).

Figure 5 is a flowchart showing the steps of the first special symbol process (step S34). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S34 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S35 of the special symbol process are similar program modules, and only differ in the random numbers and tables used for judgment. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, if the interval timer described below has timed out (YES in step S85), one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the first special symbol process flag. Note that if the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following processes.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S80) reads the first special random number stored in the main control's built-in RAM, and based on the read first special random number, performs a lottery to determine the display mode of the first special symbol when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped.

2. First special symbol stop pattern setting process (step S81) determines the display mode of the first special symbol when the control of the first special symbol stops based on the results of a lottery process for determining the display mode when the control of the first special symbol stops.

3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process is performed on the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600.
4. First special symbol variation process (step S83) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.

5. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) stops the display of the first special symbol so that the display mode of the first special symbol when the control of the first special symbol is stopped, determined based on the results of a lottery process, is displayed on the first special symbol display unit of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the processing of step S1.

An example of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) will now be described. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the counter value of the first special reserved number counter is 0 or greater, reads random numbers (e.g., first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) from the main control built-in RAM, decrements the first special reserved number counter by 1, and shifts random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, stored in each memory area of the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM, in a first-in, first-out manner. Furthermore, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a win determination process, which is a lottery process for determining whether the big win or small win will occur, based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the first special symbol normal processing ends.

In the hit determination process described above, the hit determination table stored in the main control built-in ROM is compared with the special random number (the first special random number read during the first special symbol normal processing when the first special symbol normal processing is being executed, or the second special random number read during the second special symbol normal processing when the second special symbol normal processing is being executed) to determine whether a jackpot has been won, and a jackpot flag is set according to the determination result. If a jackpot has not been won, i.e., if it is determined to be a miss, the reach determination table stored in the main control built-in ROM is compared with the read reach random number (the reach random number read during the first special symbol normal processing when the first special symbol normal processing is being executed, or the reach random number read during the second special symbol normal processing when the second special symbol normal processing is being executed) to determine whether to execute a reach, and if so, the type of reach to execute, and a reach flag is set according to the determination result.

An example of the first special symbol stopping symbol setting process (step S81) will be described below. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stopping symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the varying display of the first special symbol stops, i.e., the result of the win determination process, and determines the stopped jackpot symbol or losing symbol based on the determination result. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sends a determination result notification command indicating the lottery result (indicating the type of jackpot, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of stopped symbol of the first special symbol)) to the peripheral control board 1510, and updates the first special symbol process flag to transition to the first varying pattern setting process (step S82).

An example of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) will be described below. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for a jackpot corresponding to the determined type of jackpot if the jackpot flag is set, selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for a reach if the ready flag is set, and selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for a miss if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, i.e., a normal miss (a miss where the reach effect is not executed). Each variation pattern table is stored in the main control's built-in ROM.

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed, and a variation pattern command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify it that the determined variation pattern will begin, thereby starting the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (the start condition is met). The main control MPU also sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer. As a result, the variation display of the first special symbol is controlled on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 for the variation time determined in this way, and the performance control is performed on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern table of this example, for example, the fluctuation time corresponding to the first special random number is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time-saving state, and 4 to 60 seconds in the time-saving state; similarly, the fluctuation time corresponding to the second special random number is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time-saving state, and 2 to 60 seconds in the time-saving state.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol begins, a determination is made as to whether the counter value of the time-saving count counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0." If this counter value is not "0," the time-saving count counter is counted down, and then a determination is made as to whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving count counter is "0." If the counter value is "0," a time-saving end flag is set, indicating that the time-saving control is to end.

If it is determined that the time-saving counter is not "0," the above-mentioned first special pattern process flag is updated (step S155) so that the process transitions to the above-mentioned first special pattern change process (step S83), and then this process ends.

An example of the first special symbol fluctuation process (step S83) will now be described. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 subtracts 1 from a fluctuation timer, which is set to a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern lottery process (step S82). Then, when the fluctuation time timer reaches 0, i.e., it is determined that the selected fluctuation time has elapsed, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process transitions to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

An example of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84) will be described below. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and also sends a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of a decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol.

Next, if the time-saving end flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag and also resets the time-saving flag. This ends the time-saving control and starts control of the non-time-saving state when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been displayed in varying states a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times).

In the time-saving state, in order to cause game ball B to enter second starting hole 2004, an instruction recommending a right-handed hit (hereinafter also referred to as a right-handed hit instruction) is executed using effect display device 1600, speaker 354, etc. As described above, when a predetermined number of special symbol variations have been completed since the start of the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends and the state returns to the normal state (non-time-saving state). When the state returns to the normal state, in order to cause game ball B to enter first starting hole 2002, the right-handed hit instruction ends and an instruction recommending a left-handed hit (hereinafter also referred to as a left-handed hit instruction) is executed using effect display device 1600, speaker 354, etc.

For example, if the number of time-saving cycles is 100 (i.e., the time-saving cycle ends when 100 special symbol variations have occurred since the time-saving cycle began), then by inserting game ball B into second starting hole 2004 during the 100th variation since the start of the time-saving cycle (i.e., the final variation of the time-saving cycle), up to four second special symbol variations can be performed in the normal state after the time-saving cycle ends.

In other words, after the time-saving mode ends, the second special symbol variation (which can mainly be performed during the time-saving mode) is executed, but since the mode remains normal, a state occurs in which a left-hand hit command is executed, which is a different way of hitting than during the time-saving mode.

When the second special symbol variation jackpot variation ends, the jackpot game begins, and during the jackpot game, the right-hit command is executed in the same way as during the time-saving mode, in order to place the game ball in the jackpot slot.

In addition, if a player hits from the right in the normal state after the time-saving feature has finished, the player can enter a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the special lottery that is normally drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003. However, since the probability of winning in the normal lottery is extremely low (or zero), it is difficult for game ball B to enter second starting port 2004, and the player has fewer opportunities to enter the special lottery compared to when the player hits from the left, meaning the probability of winning a jackpot is lower. If a player hits from the right in a situation where a left-handed hit is required (specifically, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls pass through gate 2003 within a predetermined time), a left-handed hit warning effect is executed, warning the player to hit from the left. The left-handed hit warning effect does not appear in situations where a right-handed hit is required, such as during a time-saving feature or jackpot game.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether the jackpot flag is set, and if it determines that the jackpot flag is set, it sets a jackpot start command indicating the start of jackpot play according to the type of jackpot, sets the waiting time until the jackpot play starts (the time during which a message indicating that jackpot play has started is displayed) in the interval timer, sets the jackpot in progress flag and the time-saving flag, and updates the first special symbol process flag to its initial value, which is a transition to normal first special symbol processing. If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the jackpot flag is not set, it updates the first special symbol process flag to its initial value, which is a transition to normal first special symbol processing, without executing the above processing.

Figure 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). During the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. Pre-opening process for the jackpot opening (step S91) waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game will begin based on the jackpot pattern displayed when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop changing, or until the next round begins.

2. Opening process of the large prize opening 2005 (step S92) controls the large prize opening 2005 to an open state when the special symbol stops changing and becomes a jackpot symbol, or when the next round begins, and closes the large prize opening 2005 after it has been open for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the first or second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have entered the large prize opening 2005.

3. Post-opening processing of the jackpot opening (step S93) waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game has ended when all rounds are completed.

The jackpot process flag is set in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 3) to indicate that the pre-opening process for the large prize opening (step S91) should be performed. Furthermore, in the processing during the opening of the large prize opening (step S92), a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set at the start of the round in which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open, and a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set at the end of the round in which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be closed. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effects corresponding to the number of rounds specified by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are executed by the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker 354, etc.

Figure 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol processing (step S15).

Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and that game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 will perform gate section passing processing in processing of step S802, such as first obtaining the normal random number for the normal pattern from the random number counter and storing it in the normal pattern reserved memory area of RAM.

Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol processing (step S803) reads the normal random number stored in the main control MPU's RAM and, based on the read normal random number, performs a lottery to determine the display mode when the normal symbol variable control is stopped.

2. A normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation processing (step S805) that waits until the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 stops.

4. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806) stops the display of the normal symbol fluctuations so that the display mode at the time of stopping the normal symbol fluctuation control, determined based on the results of the lottery processing, is displayed on the normal symbol display unit of the function display unit 1400.

5. When the results of the lottery process for determining the state of the normal symbol fluctuation control stop indicate a "normal symbol win," the normal electric device release process executes control to allow the second start opening 2004 to receive game ball B (step S807).

In addition, the normal symbol process flag is set in the processing of step S1 described above to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed.

An example of the gate passage processing (S802) will be described below. If the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has passed through the gate 2003, the normal random number and normal variable random number are obtained from the random number counter, and the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the reserved memory of normal random numbers in the main control built-in RAM, with a predetermined number (e.g., four) as the upper limit (in other words, if the reserved memory number has already reached the upper limit, this update processing will not be performed). Then, the normal pattern process flag is updated so that the process will transition to the normal pattern normal processing (step S803).

An example of the normal normal symbol processing (S803) will now be described. When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal normal symbol processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether there is variable display control for the normal symbol on hold based on the counter value of the normal hold memory counter. If it determines that there is variable display control for the normal symbol on hold, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the normal symbol hold memory area in the RAM of the main control MPU is read from the RAM. The normal hold number counter is then decremented by one, and the random numbers (normal random number, normal symbol variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, stored in each memory area of the normal hold memory area in the RAM of the main control MPU, are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then compares the read normal random number with the normal winning determination table stored in the main control built-in ROM to determine whether it is a normal winning. If it determines that it is a normal winning, it sets a normal winning flag indicating that the variation has resulted in a normal winning, and determines the normal winning symbol as the pattern when normal symbol variation control stops (the normal symbol stopping symbol). On the other hand, if it determines that it is not a normal winning, it determines the normal symbol losing symbol as the pattern when normal symbol variation control stops (the normal symbol stopping symbol).

After the lottery process for the normal symbols has been completed in this way, a normal symbol determination result notification command corresponding to the lottery results (indicating whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process transitions to the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804).

An example of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) will be described below. When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, if the time-saving flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time-saving mode stored in the main control built-in ROM with the normal random number read in the normal normal symbol normal processing; if the time-saving flag is set, it compares the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving mode stored in the main control built-in ROM with the normal random number read in the normal normal symbol normal processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern to be executed (normal symbol variation pattern). The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a normal symbol variation pattern command that notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of normal symbol variation according to the determined normal symbol variation pattern, and starts displaying the normal symbol variation on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (start condition is met).

In addition, when the main control MPU determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it sets the normal symbol variation time corresponding to this determined normal symbol variation pattern in the normal symbol variation timer. As a result, performance control is performed on the normal symbol display (display of normal symbol variations on the normal symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 for the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving mode in this example, the normal symbol variation time is set to, for example, 20 seconds. On the other hand, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time-saving mode in this example, the normal symbol variation time is set to, for example, 0.8 seconds, so that the normal symbol variation time is shorter than in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving mode. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, when the normal pattern variable display control is initiated, this process ends when the normal pattern process flag is updated so that the process transitions to the normal pattern variable processing (step S805).

An example of the normal symbol variation process (step S805) will be described below. When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 subtracts 1 from the normal symbol variation timer, which has the normal symbol variation time set. Then, when the normal symbol variation time timer reaches 0, i.e., when it is determined that the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process transitions to the first special symbol stop process (step S806).

An example of the normal symbol stop processing (step S806) will now be described. When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs display control to display the normal symbol stop pattern determined in the normal normal symbol processing on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and sends a normal symbol stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the derived display of the first special symbol stop pattern.

Next, when the normal winning flag is set, the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set according to the current game state using the normal winning opening pattern table stored in the main control built-in ROM. Specifically, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to the non-time-saving state when it begins to open, and if a lottery result based on a normal random number results in a normal winning, the starting port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 is turned on, and opening pattern A is executed, in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a short opening mode (e.g., 0.05 seconds). As a result, when opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern for the second starting port 2004, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is short, making it difficult to insert a game ball when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. In other words, even if the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed in the non-time-saving state, almost no game balls enter the opening pattern.

On the other hand, if the second starting hole 2004 is controlled to the time-saving state when it begins to open, and the lottery result based on the normal random number results in a normal winning, the starting hole solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting hole 2004 will be turned on, and opening pattern B will be executed, in which the second starting hole 2004 opens and closes in a long opening mode (e.g., 1.5 seconds). As a result, when opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern for the second starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2004 opens for a long time, and a game ball can be inserted when the second starting hole 2004 is in the open state.

When the opening pattern of the second start port 2004 is set, a normal symbol win start command is set, indicating that a normal symbol win game has begun, and the normal symbol process flag is updated to transition to the normal electric device release process. The normal symbol win start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the normal symbol win game presentation corresponding to the type of normal symbol win indicated by the normal symbol win start command can be executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker 354, etc.

Furthermore, if the normal symbol win flag is not set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the normal symbol process flag to the initial value, normal symbol normal processing, without executing the above-mentioned processing.

An example of the normal electric accessory opening process (step S807) will be described below. If it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, and a predetermined time (the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the set opening pattern) has elapsed since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controlled the second starting port 2004 to the open state, the main control MPU will turn off the starting port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004, and end this process when the second starting port 2004 is controlled to the closed state.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in a closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 will end this processing when it is time to open the second starting port 2004 by turning on the starting port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 and controlling the second starting port 2004 to an open state.

Furthermore, if it is not the time to open the second start port 2004, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a normal win end command when the number of times the second start port 2004 has been opened reaches a predetermined number (the number of times the second start port 2004 has been opened in the set opening pattern). Then, this processing ends when the normal symbol process flag is updated to transition to the initial value of normal symbol normal processing. The normal symbol win end command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the normal symbol win end command, it can end the effect of the normal symbol win game currently being executed using the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker 354, etc.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. Figure 8 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 begins, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). This initial setting process includes processes such as clearing the RAM built into the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process is initiated that monitors whether the 16mS elapsed flag T has been set (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady-state processing. During the 2 ms steady-state processing, the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is counted up (the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is incremented by 1). When the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, i.e., when 16 ms have elapsed, the 16 ms progress flag T is set and the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (to 0). In this way, the 16 ms progress flag T is set to "1" every 16 ms during the 2 ms steady-state processing, and is normally set to "0." When the 16 ms progress flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms progress flag T is "1"), the 16 ms progress flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady-state processing is executed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady-state processing, processing is executed to control the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker 354, etc. based on commands received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady-state processing is completed, processing returns to step S502, and the above-mentioned steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is executed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

Figure 9 is a flowchart showing an example of 16mS steady-state processing executed every 16mS in the sub-main processing. In the 16mS steady-state processing, the peripheral control MPU executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the performance control processing of step S602, control processing related to the performance display device 1600 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing and second variation pattern setting processing).

In addition, the sound control process in step S603 executes control processing related to the speaker 354 provided in the pachinko machine 1. The lamp control process in step S604 executes control processing related to the lamps and LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1. The information output process in step S605 executes processing such as sending lamp and LED lighting signals to various decorative boards 184, 273, etc. The random number update process in step S606 executes processing to update the random numbers used for various settings in the performance control process (step S602).

Note that steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady-state processing are completed within 16 ms. Even if it takes more than 16 ms from the start of the 16 ms steady-state processing to the end of the 16 ms steady-state processing, the 16 ms steady-state processing is not executed from the beginning (from the command analysis processing in step S601) immediately after 16 ms have elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady-state processing. In other words, if 16 ms have elapsed during the execution of the 16 ms steady-state processing, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and after the end of the 16 ms steady-state processing, the 16 ms steady-state processing is started when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapsed flag has been set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed during 16 ms of steady-state processing to update various random numbers, but the timing at which the various random numbers are updated is not limited to this. For example, the various random numbers may be updated during either or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms of steady-state processing.

Figure 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the presentation control process (step S602). In the presentation control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five processes depending on the presentation process flag that indicates the progress of the game and is stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510.

1. After performing processing to control the display device 1600, LEDs, speaker 354, etc. based on the variation pattern commands (first variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the second special symbol) that indicate the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed in the command analysis processing, a variation effect start processing (step S711) is performed, in which the variation effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation effect in progress processing.

2. Measure the elapsed time since control of the display device 1600, LEDs, speaker 354, etc., begins, and perform processing to control the display device 1600, LEDs, speaker 354, etc. according to the elapsed time. After the elapse of the time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) change pattern, the display process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the change end processing (step S712).

3. Upon receiving a stop display command instructing the display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to stop, the system performs processing to derive and display the specified display result. If the result is a miss, the system changes the display process flag to a value corresponding to the display start processing. If the result is a jackpot, the system changes the flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing. If the result is a small win, the system changes the flag to a value corresponding to the small win display processing.

4. Upon receiving a jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game, the display device 1600 performs processing to control the display during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the display process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variable display start processing (step S714).

Through the above processing, the effect display device 1600 will display the changing decorative patterns in synchronization with the changing display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) executed on the special pattern display devices (first special pattern display device of function display unit 1400, second special pattern display device of function display unit 1400). If the special pattern does not change for a predetermined period of time, the effect display device 1600 will display a demo screen (a predetermined video including the characters and story that appear in the effects of pachinko machine 1, an explanation of the effects, the model name, the manufacturer name, etc.) indicating that the machine is waiting for customers.

[2. Attack Performance]
11 and 12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an attack effect when an effective operation period for an attack effect (a period that ends when a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation unit is detected during the period or when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the period) occurs and an operation to launch an attack is performed during the effective operation period. The attack effect is an effect that is executed, for example, before the start of a reach effect during a fluctuation in which a reach effect is executed, or during a fluctuation in which a reach effect is not executed. The attack effect is an effect that is executed, for example, when a start win is made in the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004 and the jackpot flag is set, and when the reach flag is set, regardless of which fluctuation pattern is selected. The attack effect is an effect that is executed when a start win is made in the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004 and neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, and when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected.

In an attack effect, an effective operation period occurs, and when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit during that effective operation period, an ally character (a white character in the illustration) will launch either a punch or a kick attack against an enemy character (a character with diagonal lines in the illustration). If the attack hits the enemy character, the effect progresses to a reach effect; if the enemy character avoids the attack, the effect does not progress to a reach effect, and the decorative pattern stops with a miss combination, ending the current variation. Note that, for example, when a variation pattern in which a reach is executed is selected, the allocation for an ally character to execute a punch effect in an attack effect is smaller than the allocation for an ally character to execute a kick effect (e.g., the allocation for a punch is 1/3 of the allocation for a kick), and when a variation pattern in which a reach is not executed is selected, the allocation for an ally character to execute a punch effect in an attack effect is larger than the allocation for an ally character to execute a kick effect (e.g., the allocation for a punch is 3 times the allocation for a kick).

The first effect pattern that is performed when an attack effect is being performed encourages operation of the pressure operation unit 303 (for example, pressing (a so-called single press)), and the second effect pattern that is performed when an attack effect is being performed encourages continuous operation of the rotation operation unit 302 (for example, rotation, which is an operation different from pressing (a so-called single press) which is an operation of the pressure operation unit 303, continued by a predetermined amount for a predetermined period of time or more).

In this example, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated clockwise within a range of up to 360 degrees (for example, when it has been rotated 360 degrees clockwise, a stopper is activated to prevent it from rotating further clockwise), and one step of clockwise rotation corresponds to a 10-degree rotation, for a maximum of 36 steps. The rotation detection sensor 347 provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 (how many steps it has been rotated). Note that the range of clockwise rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 from its initial position does not have to be the 360 degrees mentioned above, and may be any value between 45 degrees and 360 degrees, for example.

Note that in the diagram, the effects branch into the upper and lower rows, but the effects before the branching are common to both the first and second effect patterns, while the effects shown in the upper row after the branching are effects of the first effect pattern, and the effects shown in the lower row after the branching are effects of the second effect pattern.

In the first effect pattern, an effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs. When the pressing detection sensor 381 provided in the pressing operation unit 303 changes from an off state to an on state during this effective operation period, the operation period ends, and the post-operation effect corresponding to that operation is a reach suggestion effect in which the ally character attacks the enemy character (an effect in which the probability of a reach being executed varies depending on whether a punch or kick appears), and an effect in which the attack hits the enemy character or is avoided by the enemy character.

In the second effect pattern, an effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 occurs. During this effective operation period, if the rotation detection sensor 347 provided on the rotation operation unit 302 detects a right rotation of a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter, five steps or more) from the initial position, an effect in which an ally character is surrounded by an aura is executed as an in-operation effect corresponding to that operation. This in-operation effect in which an ally character is surrounded by an aura continues to be executed as long as a right rotation of five steps or more of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302.

Furthermore, in the second presentation pattern, if the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate right for five or more steps for three seconds during the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, the valid operation period ends, and as post-operation presentations, a reach suggestion presentation in which the ally character attacks the enemy character (a presentation in which the likelihood of a reach being executed varies depending on whether a punch or kick appears) and a presentation in which the attack hits the enemy character or is avoided by the enemy character are executed. In the first presentation pattern, the valid operation period ends when the pressure detection sensor 381 changes from an off state to an on state during the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303, and in the second presentation pattern, the valid operation period ends when the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate right for five or more steps for three seconds during the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the operations that end the valid operation period differ between the first presentation pattern and the second presentation pattern. In the second effect pattern, the conditions for the end of the valid operation period and the execution of the post-operation effect may be that the rotation operation unit 302 is operated continuously for a predetermined time during the valid operation period regardless of the amount of rotation, that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by five or more steps or for a predetermined total time during the valid operation period regardless of the amount of rotation, or that the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, the maximum amount of rotation, 36 steps) during the valid operation period, etc.

The effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the first presentation pattern and the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 in the second presentation pattern are both 10 seconds. The effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the first presentation pattern may be longer or shorter than the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 in the second presentation pattern. However, the operation required to produce the post-operation effect in the second presentation pattern (continuing to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 right by five or more steps for three seconds during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302) takes longer than the operation required to produce the post-operation effect in the first presentation pattern (changing the pressing detection sensor 381 from the off state to the on state during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303). Therefore, it is desirable that the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 in the second presentation pattern be longer than the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the first presentation pattern.

Figure 11(A) shows a state in which all decorative symbols have changed and an attack effect has begun. In Figure 11(A), the effect display device 1600 displays a message indicating that if an ally character's punch hits an enemy character, it will be a chance. The decorative symbols are multiple rows of symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 that indicate the results of a special lottery. The decorative symbols, for example, consist of three rows: a left decorative symbol, a center decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol. The three rows of decorative symbols begin to change when the special symbol change begins, and then, for example, the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the center decorative symbol are displayed in that order. Finally, when all decorative symbol rows are displayed in a stopped state, the result of the special lottery is shown to the player based on the combination of the displayed decorative symbols. When an ally character's attack hits an enemy character during an attack effect, the decorative symbols form a reach after the attack effect ends, and a reach effect is executed. A state in which a decorative pattern reach has been formed is a state in which all decorative patterns in multiple rows (for example, three rows of left, middle, and right decorative patterns) except for one decorative pattern (for example, the middle decorative pattern) have stopped in the same display mode (for example, the left and right decorative patterns are the same pattern) (however, they may appear to be stopped even though they are slightly shaking up and down, so this is a so-called temporary stop state), and that one decorative pattern is fluctuating.

In Figure 11 (A), the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 has not yet begun (the player does not know whether a first effect pattern will be executed in which operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is required during the valid operation period, as in the effects from Figure 11 (C) onwards, or whether a second effect pattern will be executed in which rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is required during the valid operation period, as in the effects from Figure 11 (C') onwards), and the player has not yet operated the pressing operation unit 303 or the rotation operation unit 302.

In Figure 11 (B), an ally character and an enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a line suggesting that the ally character will soon attack is also displayed on the effect display device 1600. In Figure 11 (B), the effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 has not yet begun, and the player has not yet operated the pressing operation unit 303 or the rotation operation unit 302. In addition, the player does not know whether the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern will be executed.

After FIG. 11(B), if it is determined that the first presentation pattern will be executed, the presentation will transition to FIG. 11(C) or later, and if it is determined that the second presentation pattern will be executed, the presentation will transition to FIG. 11(C') or later. First, we will explain the case where the presentation transitions to FIG. 11(C) (where it is determined that the first presentation pattern will be executed). Following FIG. 11(B), in FIG. 11(C), the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 begins, and a gauge 1603 indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period and a display prompting the player to operate the pressing operation unit 303 (an image modeling the pressing operation unit 303 and the message "Press!") are displayed on the presentation display device 1600. Note that in FIG. 11(C), the player has not yet operated the pressing operation unit 303.

In Figure 12 (D), the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303 is progressing, and the remaining time of the valid operation period indicated by the gauge 1603 is decreasing, but the player has not yet operated the press operation unit 303.

Figure 12 (E) shows the state in which the player operates the press operation unit 303 during the valid operation period (the press operation unit 303 is pressed down by a height tmax from the initial position of the press operation unit 303 before Figure 12 (D), and a press is detected), and the post-operation effect has begun. Specifically, a reach suggestion effect is being executed in which the ally character throws a punch at the enemy character (which has a lower likelihood of a reach being executed than a kick), and it has not yet been announced whether the punch will hit the enemy character.

Figure 12 (F) shows a continuation of the post-operation performance, in which the enemy character steps back to avoid the ally character's punch, announcing that the performance will not progress to a reach performance, and the post-operation performance ends. During the post-operation performance, a sound corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation performance (for example, a different sound depending on whether the ally character's attack is a punch or a kick, and a different sound depending on whether the ally character's attack hits) is output from speaker 354, and a lamp lights up in a mode corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation performance (for example, a different light-emitting mode depending on whether the ally character's attack is a punch or a kick, and a different light-emitting mode depending on whether the ally character's attack hits).

When the first presentation pattern is being executed in a variation in which a reach is being executed, the reach suggestion presentation of FIG. 12(E) (a presentation in which an ally character throws a punch or kick) is followed by the presentation in FIG. 12(F) in which the ally character's attack hits the enemy character (a presentation informing players that the game will progress to a reach presentation), ending the post-operation presentation, which then progresses to a reach presentation. Even in the post-operation presentation of the first presentation pattern in a variation in which a reach is being executed, a sound corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation presentation (which may be the same as in the case in which the game does not progress to reach, or a different sound) is output from speaker 354, and a lamp lights up in a mode corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation presentation (which may be the same light-emitting mode as in the case in which the game does not progress to reach, or a different light-emitting mode).

Following the effect shown in Figure 12 (F), the decorative symbols stop when a combination is found that indicates the result of the special lottery is a miss (a combination in which the display mode of at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is different from the display mode of the remaining decorative symbols), and the ongoing special symbol variation ends (not shown).

Next, we will explain the case where the effect of Figure 11(C') (where it has been determined that the second effect pattern will be executed) has been transitioned to. Following Figure 11(B), in Figure 11(C'), the valid operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 has begun, and a gauge 1603 indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period and a display encouraging the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 (an image imitating the rotation operation unit 302 and the message "Spin!") are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that in Figure 11(C'), the player has not yet operated the rotation operation unit 302.

In Figure 12 (D'), the valid operation period of the rotary operation unit 302 is progressing, and the remaining time of the valid operation period indicated by the gauge 1603 is decreasing. Furthermore, because the player has rotated the rotary operation unit 302 to the right five steps or more, an in-operation effect is being executed in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura, a sound corresponding to the aura is output from the speaker 354, and a lamp lights up in the color of the aura. Note that the display mode, such as the color and size of this aura, suggests the attack (punch or kick) that the ally character will make, suggesting the likelihood of a reach being executed before the post-operation effect.

In Figure 12(E'), the valid operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 ends when the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate right for 3 seconds or more over 5 steps during the valid operation period, and the post-operation effect begins. Specifically, a reach suggestion effect is being executed in which an ally character throws a punch at an enemy character (which has a lower likelihood of a reach being executed than a kick), and it has not yet been announced whether the punch will hit the enemy character. Figure 12(F') is a continuation of the post-operation effect, in which the enemy character steps back to avoid the ally character's punch, announcing that the effect will not progress to a reach effect, and the post-operation effect ends. Following the effect in Figure 12(F'), the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating that the special lottery result is a miss, and the special symbol variation currently being executed ends (not shown).

Figure 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect when the operation unit is not operated. First, an example will be described in which it has been determined that the first effect pattern will be executed. Following Figure 11 (C), in Figure 13 (D2), similar to Figure 12 (D), the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 is progressing, and the remaining time of the effective operation period indicated by the gauge 1603 is decreasing, but the player is not operating the press operation unit 303.

In Figure 13 (E2), the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303 continues to progress, and the remaining time of the valid operation period indicated by the gauge 1603 is further decreasing. Also in Figure 13 (E2), the player has not operated the press operation unit 303, and the same display as Figure 13 (D2) is being displayed, except for the display of the remaining time of the valid operation period indicated by the gauge 1603. In Figure 13 (F2), even though the entire valid operation period of the press operation unit 303 has elapsed and the valid operation period has ended, the press operation unit 303 has not been operated, and the attack effect has ended without a post-operation effect being performed. Following the effect in Figure 13 (F2), the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating that the special lottery result is a loss, and the ongoing special symbol variation ends (not shown).

Next, we will explain an example in which it has been decided that the second effect pattern will be executed. Following Figure 11(C), in Figure 13(D'2), similar to Figure 12(D'), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has progressed and the remaining time of the effective operation period indicated by the gauge 1603 has decreased. In Figure 13(D'2), the player has not operated the rotation operation unit 302 (has not rotated right by five steps or more), so the effect during operation in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura is not executed.

Figure 13 (E'2) shows a state in which the valid operation period of the rotary operation unit 302 has progressed further, and the remaining time of the valid operation period indicated by the gauge 1603 has further decreased. In Figure 13 (E'2), the player has not yet started operating the rotary operation unit 302 (the right rotation of 5 steps or more has not continued for 3 seconds), so the same display as Figure 13 (D'2) is displayed, except for the display of the remaining time of the valid operation period on the gauge 1603, and no in-operation effects are executed.

Figure 13 (F'2) shows a state in which the condition that the rotation operation unit 302 rotates right five steps or more for three seconds continuously during the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 is not met, and the valid operation period ends when the entire valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has elapsed, resulting in the end of the valid operation period and the end of the attack effect without a post-operation effect being performed. Following the effect of Figure 13 (F'2), the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating that the result of the special lottery is a miss, and the ongoing special symbol variation ends (not shown). Note that if the rotation operation unit 302 rotates right five steps or more during the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, an effect in which an ally character is surrounded by an aura is performed as an in-operation effect, but if the rotation operation unit 302 does not rotate right five steps or more for three seconds continuously by the end of the valid operation period, the post-operation effect will not be performed.

In addition, if the valid operation period for the first and second attack effect patterns ends without any operation being performed to execute a post-operation effect during that valid operation period, an effect similar to the post-operation effect (i.e., an ally character attacks, and then an effect in which an ally character announces whether or not the attack will hit, depending on whether or not it will develop into a reach effect) may be executed after the valid operation period ends, and then an effect in which decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating that the result of the special lottery is a miss, or a reach effect may be executed.

Figures 14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects when operation of the operation unit has begun at the start of the effective operation period for the attack effect. Figure 14(A) is similar to Figure 11(A). First, an example of a transition to Figure 14(B3) (where it has been determined that the first effect pattern will be executed) will be explained. Following Figure 14(A), in Figure 14(B3), the same effect as in Figure 11(B) is being performed, and the player has already operated the press operation unit 303 (the press operation unit 303 has been pressed down by a height tmax from the initial position of the press operation unit 303 in Figure 12(A), and the press has been detected). In Figure 14(B3), the press operation unit 303 has been operated and is in the on state, but because the effective operation period has not yet begun, the post-operation effect is not being executed.

In FIG. 14(C3), the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303 has begun. Note that in FIG. 14(C3), the player is still operating (pressing) the press operation unit 303, continuing from FIG. 14(B3). In other words, the press detection sensor 381 provided in the press operation unit 303 has been in the ON state since before the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303 began, and has not changed from the OFF state to the ON state since the valid operation period began. In this case (i.e., even if the press operation unit 303 is in an operated state at the start of the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303, if there is no change from a non-operated state to an operated state during the valid operation period), the post-operation effect will not occur. Note that if the press operation unit 303 is operated simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period in FIG. 14(C3) (i.e., the press detection sensor 381 provided in the press operation unit 303 is in the ON state exactly at the start of the valid operation period), the same effect as that shown in FIG. 14(C3) and subsequent figures will be produced.

In Figure 15 (D3), the player continues to operate (continuously press) the press operation unit 303 from Figure 14 (B3). In this way, if the press operation unit 303 is being operated at the start of the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 and operation of the press operation unit 303 continues thereafter, the press detection sensor 381 provided in the press operation unit 303 does not change from an OFF state to an ON state during the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303, and therefore the post-operation effect is not executed even though the press operation unit 303 is being operated. Therefore, no sound corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation effect is output from the speaker 354, and the lamp does not light up in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation effect. In Figure 15 (D3), the same effect as in Figure 12 (D) is executed. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a lamp that lights up when the press operation unit 303 is being operated (press detection sensor 381 is on), the lamp lights up when the press operation unit 303 is being operated at the start of the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303, and also lights up when the press operation unit 303 is operated at the start of the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 and operation of the press operation unit 303 continues.

In Figure 15 (E3), the player continues to operate (continuously press) the press operation unit 303 from Figure 14 (B3). The press detection sensor 381 equipped to the press operation unit 303 does not change from an off state to an on state during the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303, so the post-operation effect is not executed. Therefore, no sound corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation effect is output from the speaker 354, and the lamp does not light up in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation effect. In Figure 15 (E3), the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303 has progressed further, and the remaining time indicated by the gauge 1603 has further decreased.

In Figure 15 (F3), the entire valid operation period has elapsed. Also, in Figure 15 (F3), the player continues to operate (continuously press) the press operation unit 303 from Figure 14 (B3), and the press detection sensor 381 equipped to the press operation unit 303 does not change from an OFF state to an ON state during the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303, so no post-operation effects are performed. Following the effect in Figure 15 (F3), the decorative symbols stop in a combination that indicates that the result of the special lottery is a loss, and the ongoing special symbol variation ends (not shown).

14 (B3), a common effect is performed for both the first and second effect patterns, so the player does not know which effect pattern is being executed. If it is determined that the first effect pattern will be executed, and the press operation unit 303 is operated before the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 begins and the press detection sensor 381 is on at the start of the effective operation period, executing a post-operation effect would result in a sudden, reach-indicating effect (an effect in which an ally character delivers a punch or kick) being executed simultaneously with the start of the effective operation period, which would extremely surprise the player. Therefore, if it is determined that the first effect pattern will be executed, even if the press operation unit 303 is operated before the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 begins and the press detection sensor 381 is on at the start of the effective operation period, the post-operation effect is not executed. Furthermore, if it has been determined that the first effect pattern will be executed, and the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated before the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs and the pressing detection sensor 381 is in the on state at the start of the effective operation period, the post-operation effect will not be executed if the operation is continued, and even if the operation is stopped (i.e., even if the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from the on state to the off state), the post-operation effect will not be executed.

If the pressing operation unit 303 is in an operating state before the valid operation period begins, and the operation is stopped during the valid operation period and the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again (i.e., the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from the on state to the off state, and then changes from the off state to the on state), the post-operation performance will be executed.

Next, we will explain an example of a transition to Figure 14 (B'3) (where it has been decided that the second presentation pattern will be executed). Following Figure 14 (A), in Figure 14 (B'3), the same presentation as in Figure 11 (B) is being performed, and the player has already rotated the rotation operation unit 302 to the right by five steps or more. In Figure 14 (B'3), the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated to the right by five steps or more, but the effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 has not yet begun, so the presentation during operation is not being executed.

In Figure 14 (C'3), the effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 has begun. Note that in Figure 14 (C'3), the player is still operating the rotation operation unit 302 (continuously rotating it to the right by five or more steps) from Figure 14 (B'3). In other words, the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 by five or more steps was detected before the effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 began, and the rotation detection sensor 347 is still detecting rotation by five or more steps at the start of the effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302. As long as the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 by five or more steps is detected during the effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 (in other words, there is no need for the rotation detection sensor 347 provided in the rotation operation unit 302 to change from its off state), an in-operation effect will appear in which an ally character is surrounded by an aura, similar to that shown in Figure 12 (D'). Therefore, in Figure 14 (C'3), a right rotation of five or more steps of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected at the start of the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, and therefore the in-operation effect appears from the start of the valid operation period. Note that if the rotation operation unit 302 has not been operated before the start of the valid operation period in Figure 14 (B'3), and the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated to the right by five or more steps since the start of the valid operation period in Figure 14 (C'3), the in-operation effect will start when the right rotation of five or more steps of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected.

In Figure 15 (D'3), continuing from Figure 14 (B'3), the rotation operation unit 302 is being operated (rotated to the right for 5 steps or more), but the rotation operation unit 302 has not been rotated to the right for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds during the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 (3 seconds have not yet passed since the start of the valid operation period), so the during operation effect continues but the post-operation effect is not performed, and the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 continues, causing the remaining time indicated by the gauge 1603 to decrease.

In Figure 15 (E'3), continuing from Figure 14 (B'3), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 ends when the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate right for 3 seconds or more than 5 steps during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, and the post-operation effect begins. Specifically, a reach suggestion effect is being executed in which an ally character throws a punch at an enemy character (which has a lower likelihood of a reach being executed than a kick), and it has not yet been announced whether the punch will hit the enemy character. Figure 15 (F'3) is a continuation of the post-operation effect, in which the enemy character steps back to avoid the punch from the ally character, an announcement is made that the effect will not progress to a reach effect, and the post-operation effect ends. Following the effect of Figure 15 (F'3), the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating that the special lottery result is a miss, and the special symbol variation currently being executed ends (not shown).

In the second presentation pattern, when the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated five or more steps to the right before the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the effective operation period begins, an in-operation presentation in which an ally character is enveloped in an aura is executed. Therefore, even if a player who becomes extremely nervous when seeing a reach suggestion presentation has rotated the rotation operation unit 302 five or more steps to the right before the start of the effective operation period and the effective operation period begins, if the rotation operation unit 302 is stopped from rotating five or more steps to the right before continuing for three seconds during the effective operation period (by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by an amount less than five steps, or by not rotating it at all), the player will not need to see the reach suggestion presentation. Note that in the second presentation pattern, when the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated five or more steps to the right before the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the effective operation period begins, the in-operation presentation in which an ally character is enveloped in an aura does not have to be executed. In the second presentation pattern, if the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated five steps or more to the right before the start of the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the valid operation period begins, even if the in-operation presentation in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura is not executed, if the rotation operation unit 302 is stopped from rotating five steps or more to the right before continuing for three seconds during the valid operation period (by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by an amount less than five steps, or by not rotating it at all), the reach suggestion presentation will not be seen.

In the second presentation pattern, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated five or more steps to the right at the start of the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation is stopped before the post-operation effect appears, and the rotation operation unit 302 is restarted to rotate five or more steps to the right during the valid operation period, but the rotation operation unit 302 cannot continue to rotate five or more steps to the right for three seconds by the end of the valid operation period, the post-operation effect will not be displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (F3). In other words, in the second presentation pattern, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated five or more steps to the right at the start of the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation is stopped before the post-operation effect appears, the reach suggestion effect cannot be displayed unless the rotation operation unit 302 is restarted to rotate five or more steps to the right three seconds before the end of the valid operation period.

In the above example, the attack effect is a pre-reach effect that indicates whether it will develop into a reach effect, but it may also be possible to execute an attack effect as a reach effect. Also, when an attack effect that is a pre-reach effect that indicates whether it will develop into a reach effect is executed and it is announced that it will develop into a reach effect, it may be possible to execute an attack effect as a reach effect in the same variation (i.e., in the reach effect that it will develop into).

In an attack effect as a reach effect, an ally character launches either a punch or a kick attack; if the ally character's attack hits an enemy character, a jackpot is announced; if the ally character's attack is avoided by the enemy character, a miss is announced. Note that, for example, in an attack effect in a jackpot variation (a variation in which the jackpot flag is set), the allocation for an ally character to execute a punch effect is smaller than the allocation for an ally character to execute a kick effect (for example, the allocation for a punch is 1/3 of the allocation for a kick), and in an attack effect in a variation that is not a jackpot variation, the allocation for an ally character to execute a punch effect is larger than the allocation for an ally character to execute a kick effect (for example, the allocation for a punch is 3 times the allocation for a kick).

In the first attack effect pattern as a reach effect, when the pressure detection sensor 381 changes from an off state to an on state during the effective operation period of the pressure operation unit 303, a post-operation effect is executed in which an ally character attacks an enemy character (the probability of a jackpot being announced varies depending on whether a punch or kick is performed), and an effect in which the attack hits the enemy character or is dodged by the enemy character. Note that the effective operation period of the pressure operation unit 303 in the first attack effect pattern as a reach effect may be the same length as or different from the effective operation period in the first attack effect pattern (the effect in Figures 11 (A) to 12 (F)), which is the pre-reach effect that indicates whether the attack will develop into a reach effect.

In the second attack effect pattern as a reach effect, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by five steps or more during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, an effect in which an ally character is enveloped in an aura is executed as an in-operation effect. Note that the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 in the second attack effect pattern as a reach effect is the second attack effect pattern (which may be the same length as or a different length from the effective operation period in the effects of Figures 11(A) to 12(F')) that is a pre-reach effect that indicates whether the effect will develop into a reach effect. In the second attack effect pattern as a reach effect, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by five steps or more continuously for three seconds during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, an effect in which an ally character attacks an enemy character (the probability of announcing a jackpot differs depending on whether a punch or kick is executed) and an effect in which the attack hits the enemy character or is dodged by the enemy character are executed as post-operation effects.

In the first presentation pattern of the attack presentation as a reach presentation, even if the press operation unit 303 is held down before the start of the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303 as shown in Figures 14 (B3) to (C3) and the press operation unit 303 is pressed at the start of the valid operation period (because the press detection sensor 381 provided in the press operation unit 303 does not change from an OFF state to an ON state during the valid operation period), the post-operation presentation will not be executed at the start of the valid operation period. However, because whether or not a jackpot notified by the attack presentation as a reach presentation has been won is important information for the player, it is desirable to execute at least part of the post-operation presentation (for example, both the punch or kick presentation of Figure 12 (E) (a presentation suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot) and the presentation of Figure 12 (F) notifying whether or not a jackpot has been won, or only the presentation of Figure 12 (F)) when the valid operation period ends because a predetermined time has passed since the start of the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303.

Furthermore, because whether or not a jackpot has been won is important information for the player, in the second presentation pattern of the attack presentation as a reach presentation, if the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 ends because a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the valid operation period, it is desirable to perform at least a portion of the post-operation presentation (for example, both the punch or kick presentation of FIG. 12(E) (a presentation suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot) and the presentation of FIG. 12(F) announcing whether or not a jackpot has been won, or only the presentation of FIG. 12(F)). For example, even if the rotation operation unit 302 had been rotated five or more steps to the right at the start of the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, but the right rotation was stopped and the rotation operation unit 302 was resumed five or more steps to the right during the valid operation period, but the duration of the five or more steps of the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 by the end of the valid operation period was less than three seconds, it is desirable to perform at least a portion of the post-operation presentation when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, in the second attack presentation pattern, the player may be prompted to operate another operation unit instead of the rotation operation unit 302. This other operation unit may be, for example, an operation unit that allows rotation operation and is an operation unit other than the rotation operation unit 302. Furthermore, this other operation unit may be an operation unit that allows an operation different from rotation operation (i.e., an operation different from rotation operation is prompted). In addition, the operation unit that the player is prompted to operate in the first and second attack presentation patterns may be the same operation unit or different operation units.

For example, in the second attack performance pattern, the player may be prompted to operate the pressing operation unit 303 (i.e., the same operation unit as the operation prompted in the first performance pattern) instead of the rotation operation unit 302 (the effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs instead of the effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302). In this case, in the second attack performance pattern, the player is prompted to operate the pressing operation unit 303 by long pressing or repeatedly tapping (continuous operations on the pressing operation unit 303) instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for five or more steps continuously for three seconds.

When the second attack effect pattern requires a long press of the pressure operation unit 303 instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for five or more steps for three seconds, and the pressure detection sensor 381 is on during the effective operation period of the pressure operation unit 303 (regardless of whether the pressure detection sensor 381 changes from off to on), an effect in which the ally character is enveloped in an aura is executed as an in-operation effect. In other words, when the second attack effect pattern requires a long press of the pressure operation unit 303 instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for five or more steps for three seconds, and the pressure detection sensor 381 is on during the effective operation period of the pressure operation unit 303, this is equivalent to the rotation operation unit 302 being rotated to the right by five or more steps during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 when rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is required during the second attack effect pattern.

Furthermore, in the second attack effect pattern, if the user is prompted to press and hold the pressure operation unit 303 instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right five steps or more for three seconds, the post-operation effect will appear if the pressure operation unit 303 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time during the valid operation period (if the pressure detection sensor 381 remains on for a predetermined time). In other words, in the second attack effect pattern, if the user is prompted to press and hold the pressure operation unit 303 instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right five steps or more for three seconds, the pressure detection sensor 381 remaining on for a predetermined time during the valid operation period of the pressure operation unit 303 corresponds to the rotation operation unit 302 rotating to the right five steps or more for three seconds during the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 when rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is prompted in the second attack effect pattern.

When the second attack effect pattern encourages repeated tapping of the pressure control element 303 instead of rotating the rotation control element 302 to the right for five or more steps for three seconds, an effect is executed in which an ally character is enveloped in an aura as an in-operation effect when the pressure detection sensor 381 changes from an OFF state to an ON state during the effective operation period of the pressure control element 303. In other words, when the second attack effect pattern encourages repeated tapping of the pressure control element 303 instead of rotating the rotation control element 302 to the right for five or more steps for three seconds, the change of the pressure detection sensor 381 from an OFF state to an ON state during the effective operation period of the pressure control element 303 corresponds to the rotation control element 302 being rotated to the right by five or more steps during the effective operation period of the rotation control element 302 when rotation of the rotation control element 302 is encouraged in the second attack effect pattern. However, in the second attack effect pattern, if the player is prompted to repeatedly tap the pressing operation unit 303 instead of continuing to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for five or more steps for three seconds, then at the start of the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, if the pressing detection sensor 381 is in the on state (regardless of whether the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from an off state to an on state), an effect in which the ally character is enveloped in an aura is executed as an in-operation effect. Note that the in-operation effect in the second attack effect pattern in which the player is prompted to repeatedly tap the pressing operation unit 303 is erased when a predetermined time has elapsed since the pressing detection sensor 381 turned on. However, if the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from the off state to the on state again while the in-operation effect in the second attack effect pattern in which the player is prompted to repeatedly tap the pressing operation unit 303 instead of continuing to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for five or more steps for three seconds is being executed, the in-operation effect is restarted. In other words, if the pressure detection sensor 381 changes from the OFF state to the ON state again before a predetermined time has elapsed since the in-operation performance began, the in-operation performance will continue without ending.

Furthermore, in the second attack effect pattern, if the user is prompted to repeatedly tap the pressure operation unit 303 instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for five or more steps for three seconds, the post-operation effect will appear if the pressure operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times during the valid operation period (if the pressure detection sensor 381 turns on a predetermined number of times). In other words, in the second attack effect pattern, if the user is prompted to repeatedly tap the pressure operation unit 303 instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for five or more steps for three seconds, the pressure detection sensor 381 turning on a predetermined number of times during the valid operation period of the pressure operation unit 303 corresponds to the rotation operation unit 302 rotating to the right for five or more steps for three seconds during the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 when rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is prompted in the second attack effect pattern.

Note that a second attack effect pattern may be performed after a first attack effect pattern is performed during the same variation. For example, a first attack effect pattern is performed as a pre-reach effect indicating whether the effect will develop into a reach effect, and then a second attack effect pattern is executed as a reach effect during the same variation after the first effect pattern.

Also, the first attack effect pattern may be performed after the second attack effect pattern is performed during the same variation. For example, the second attack effect pattern is performed as a pre-reach effect indicating whether the effect will develop into a reach effect, and after the second effect pattern, the first attack effect pattern is executed as a reach effect during the same variation.

Figure 16 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of an attack effect in which operation of the rotation operation unit 302 has already begun at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 in the second attack effect pattern. In the second attack effect pattern of Figure 16, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated five or more steps to the right at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty is incurred in which operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is invalid for a predetermined time (hereinafter, 8 seconds) after the start of the effective operation period.

Figure 16(A) is similar to Figure 11(A). Following Figure 16(A), in Figure 16(B'4), the valid operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 has not yet begun, and a message ("Don't spin until the gauge appears!!") urging the player not to operate the rotation operation unit 302 before the start of the valid operation period is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In Figure 16 (C'4), the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has not yet begun, and the same effect as in Figure 11 (B) is being performed, but the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated five steps or more to the right. Figure 16 (D'4) shows the state after the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has begun. Because the rotation operation unit 302 was rotated five steps or more to the right at the start of the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty has occurred in which operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is invalid for eight seconds from the start of the valid operation period. In Figure 16 (D'4), a message indicating that the penalty has occurred ("Rotation is invalid for eight seconds because it was rotated before the gauge appeared") is displayed on the effect display device 1600, superimposed on the effect display of Figure 13 (D'2).

In addition, in Figure 16 (D'4), due to a penalty that invalidates the operation, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by five steps or more, but the effect of the ally character being surrounded by an aura as part of the during-operation effect is not performed, and this does not count toward the duration of the five or more steps of right rotation required to produce the post-operation effect.

In Figure 16 (E'4), 8 seconds have passed since the start of the valid operation period (i.e., since the penalty began), so the penalty has been lifted and operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is now valid. Note that the valid operation period for the rotary operation unit 302 continues even while the penalty is occurring, so the initial 10-second valid operation period has only 2 seconds remaining when the penalty is lifted in Figure 16 (E'4).

Therefore, when a penalty occurs, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by five or more steps from the time the penalty is released until the end of the valid operation period, the post-operation effect cannot be made to appear (this is because there are two seconds remaining in the valid operation period when the penalty is released, and the condition for making the post-operation effect appear is that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by five or more steps for three seconds during the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302). Note that if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by five or more steps during the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 after the penalty is released, the effect of an ally character being surrounded by an aura will be executed as an in-operation effect.

In Figure 16 (E'4), the effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 has expired, and the effective operation period has ended, so the attack effect ends without a post-operation effect being performed. Following the effect in Figure 16 (E'4), the decorative symbols stop in a combination that indicates that the result of the special lottery is a miss, and the ongoing special symbol variation ends (not shown).

In the example above, the penalty time was set to 8 seconds from the start of the valid operation period, but the penalty time may be set to 7 seconds or less from the start of the valid operation period so that the reach suggestion effect can appear even if operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is started after the penalty period has ended.

Figure 17 is a schematic diagram showing another example configuration of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation operation unit 302 in this example can be rotated clockwise from the initial position within a range of up to 360 degrees (for example, after rotating 360 degrees clockwise, a stopper is activated to prevent further clockwise rotation), and one step of clockwise rotation corresponds to a 10-degree rotation, allowing for a maximum of 36 steps of rotation, similar to the rotation operation unit 302 in Figures 11 to 16. The rotation operation unit 302 is also similar to the rotation operation unit 302 in Figures 11 to 16 in that it is equipped with a sensor that can detect the amount of rotation (how many steps it has been rotated).

In this example, the rotation operation unit 302 further includes a specific detection unit (not shown) that can detect specific operations. The specific operation detected by the specific detection unit may be, for example, contact by the player, or pressing or rotation by the player. The specific detection unit may be provided so as to cover the entire rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., if the specific operation is contact, operating the rotation operation unit 302 will contact the specific detection unit), or it may be provided so as to cover only a portion of the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., if the specific operation is contact, it is possible to operate the rotation operation unit 302 without contacting the specific detection unit). The pachinko machine 1 also includes a movable body 310 that resembles a chicken character and is attached to the game board 5, for example, and located outside the play area 5a (which may be located above, below, to the right, or to the left of the play area 5a).

In Figure 17(a), the rotation operation unit 302 is in the initial position, meaning the amount of rotation is zero. At this time, the pressing operation unit 303 is in the initial position (in this example, the initial position is the lowest position, and in the initial position, part of the pressing operation unit 303 is hidden by the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., this part is not visible to the player because of the rotation operation unit 302), and part of the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes from the rotation operation unit 302), and cannot be pressed. Note that when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the initial position, the entire pressing operation unit 303 may be hidden by the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., the entire pressing operation unit 303 is not visible to the player because of the rotation operation unit 302). Also, in Figure 17(a), the movable body 310 is not moving.

In Figure 17(b), the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated r1 steps clockwise from its initial position. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise from its initial position, the press operation unit 303 begins to protrude, and when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated r1 steps, the press operation unit 303 protrudes t1 from its initial position (i.e., the area of the press operation unit 303 that is hidden from view by the rotation operation unit 302 is reduced compared to the state in Figure 17(a)). Note that as long as the press operation unit 303 protrudes further than its initial position (i.e., as long as the rotation operation unit 302 has rotated clockwise from its initial position, regardless of whether a specific operation has been performed on the specific detection unit), the press operation unit 303 can be pressed. In this way, the press operation unit 303 can only be operated when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, allowing players to enjoy complex operations.

When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r1 steps or more and the specific detection unit provided on the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the movable body 310 performs a periodic movement (here, a movement of swinging from side to side). In Figure 17(b), the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r1 steps, and the specific detection unit provided on the rotation operation unit 302 detects the specific operation, causing the movable body 310 to swing from side to side, with a swing amplitude of w1. Note that if the specific detection unit does not detect a specific operation, the movable body 310 will not move even if the rotation operation unit 302 rotates by r1 steps or more. Furthermore, as described above, the specific detection unit may be arranged to cover the entire outer surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In this case, for example, if the specific operation detected by the specific detection unit is contact, the player will inevitably come into contact with the specific detection unit when rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and therefore the movable body 310 will move when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 by r1 steps or more.

Note that when the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the greater the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, the greater the range of movement of the movable body 310. Furthermore, if the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the movable body 310 may begin to move at the point when rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 begins, even if the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is less than r1 steps.

In Figure 17(c), the rotary operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise r2 (>r1) steps from its initial position (i.e., in Figure 17(b), the rotary operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise r2-r1 steps from the state in which it was rotated clockwise r1 step from its initial position), and the player is further performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotary operation unit 302. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated r2 steps, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes a maximum protrusion amount tmax (>t1) from its initial position (i.e., the area of the pressing operation unit 303 that is not visible due to the rotary operation unit 302 is reduced compared to the state in Figure 17(b)). Furthermore, in Figure 17(c), the rotary operation unit 302 has been rotated r2 (>r1) steps, and the specific detection unit provided on the rotary operation unit 302 has detected the specific operation, so the movable body 310 swings left and right, with a swing amplitude of w2 (>w1).

Note that within the range of 0 to r2 steps for the amount of right rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, the greater the amount of rotation, the greater the amount of protrusion of the press operation unit 303; however, even if the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated right by more than r2 steps, the amount of protrusion of the press operation unit 303 remains tmax. On the other hand, when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated right by an amount greater than r2 steps, the amplitude by which the movable body 310 swings continues to increase until the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated right by the maximum amount of rotation rmax. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated right by the maximum amount of rotation rmax, the movable body 310 swings left and right by the maximum swing amplitude wmax.

In Figure 17(d), the rotary operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise (r2<) r3 (<maximum rotation amount rmax) steps from its initial position (i.e., in Figure 17(c), the rotary operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise r2 steps from its initial position, and then further rotated clockwise r3-r2 steps), and the player is performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotary operation unit 302. Even when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise up to r3 steps (which is equal to or greater than r2 steps), the pressing operation unit 303 remains protruding by the maximum protrusion amount tmax from its initial position. Furthermore, when the rotary operation unit 302 has been rotated r3 (>r2) steps and the specific detection unit provided on the rotary operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the movable body 310 swings left and right, with the swing amplitude being (maximum swing amplitude wmax>) w3 (>w2).

In Figure 17(e), the rotary operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise (r3<) r4 (<maximum rotation amount rmax) steps from its initial position (i.e., in Figure 17(d), the rotary operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise r3 steps from its initial position, and then further rotated clockwise r4-r3 steps), and the player is performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotary operation unit 302. Even when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated up to r4 steps (which is r2 steps or more), the pressing operation unit 303 remains protruding by the maximum protrusion amount tmax from its initial position. Furthermore, when the rotary operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise r4 (>r3) steps, if the specific detection unit provided on the rotary operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the movable body 310 will swing left and right, with the swing amplitude being (maximum swing amplitude wmax>) w4 (>w3).

Note that even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right, if the specific detection unit does not detect a specific operation, the movable body 310 will not move. However, if a specific operation is performed on the specific detection unit while the rotation operation unit 302 is maintained in its right rotation, the movable body 310 will suddenly move with a width corresponding to the amount of rotation. Specifically, for example, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by r4 steps, if the specific detection unit does not detect a specific operation, the movable body 310 will not move. However, if a specific operation is performed on the specific detection unit while the rotation operation unit 302 is maintained in its right rotation by r4 steps, the movable body 310 will suddenly swing with a swing width w4.

In Figure 17 (f), the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise r4 steps from the initial position, the player has performed a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303 has been pressed to the initial position. When the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position, the movement of the movable body 310 stops regardless of the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, and even if the specific detection unit detects a specific operation. Note that when the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise from the initial position, the player has performed a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303 has been pressed to the initial position, if the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is stopped, the movable body 310 will move according to the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. Furthermore, the drive member for swinging the movable body 310 left and right operates with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, and if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position while the movable body 310 is operating, for example, stoppers are activated on the left and right sides of the movable body 310 when the movable body 310 returns to its initial position, thereby stopping the operation of the movable body 310.

Furthermore, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise from the initial position, a specific operation is being performed on the specific detection unit, and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position, the operation of the movable body 310 is stopped by configuring the detection of the specific operation by the specific detection unit to be invalidated by the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, or by blocking the detection of the specific operation from being input (in other words, the specific operation on the specific detection unit is invalidated when the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated).Furthermore, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated while pressing the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 will not protrude as long as pressure on the pressing operation unit 303 is maintained.

In the illustrated example, the volume of the rotation operation unit 302 is depicted as being smaller than the volume of the pressing operation unit 303, but when the pressing operation unit 303 is protruding to tmax, the volume of the protruding portion may be smaller than the volume of the rotation operation unit 302.

Furthermore, when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r1 steps or more from the initial position, and the specific detection unit provided in the rotary operation unit 302 detects a specific operation and the movable body 310 operates periodically, it is desirable that the operating mode of the movable body 310 change, such as increasing the speed of the operation or widening the operating range, as the number of steps by which the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise increases. In the example of Figure 17, an example is described in which the operating range of the movable body 310 increases as the number of steps by which the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise increases. However, while the operating range and operating period of the movable body 310 remain the same, the speed at which the movable body 310 moves from the initial position to the maximum operating range may increase. Specifically, for example, when the movable body 310 operates, the movable body 310 moves to the right from the initial position, returns to the initial position, stops at the initial position, moves to the left from the initial position, and returns to the initial position, repeating this series of operations. At this time, for example, the movable body 310 moves from the initial position to the maximum operating range on the right side in time t1-kr (where t1 and k are positive constants, and r is the number of steps by which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right, and t1 and k are determined so that t1-kr>0 even when r is at its maximum value), returns from the maximum operating range on the right side to the initial position in time t2 (a positive constant), stops at the initial position for time t3+2kr (where t3 is a positive constant), moves from the initial position to the maximum operating range on the left side in time t1-kr, and returns from the maximum operating range on the right side to the initial position in time t2 (a positive constant). As a result, the greater the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, the smaller the value of time t1-kr. Therefore, although the speed at which the movable body 310 moves from the initial position to the maximum operating range on the right and left sides increases, the operating range of the series of operations and the time required for the series of operations, i.e., the operating cycle of the series of operations (t1-kr)+t2+(t3+2kr)+(t1-kr)+t2=2t1+2t2+t3, can be kept constant regardless of the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302. Note that, although the operating range and operating cycle of the movable body 310 remain the same as the number of steps by which the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise increases, the speed at which the movable body 310 moves from the initial position to the maximum operating range increases. In this case, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position while the movable body 310 is performing cyclical movement, the cyclical movement of the movable body 310 stops regardless of the speed of the movable body 310.

Furthermore, when the pressing operation unit 303 has not protruded to the maximum protrusion amount tmax, pulling the pressing operation unit 303 (i.e., applying a force to the pressing operation unit 303 in the opposite direction to the direction of the force applied to the pressing operation unit 303 when pressing) can cause the pressing operation unit 303 to protrude to the maximum protrusion amount tmax, and at this time the rotation operation unit 302 can be configured to rotate clockwise in accordance with the protrusion amount of the pressing operation unit 303. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 has not protruded to the maximum protrusion amount tmax in response to operation of the rotation operation unit 302, pulling the pressing operation unit 303 to the maximum protrusion amount tmax without operating the rotation operation unit 302 can cause the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate up to r2 steps without the player operating the rotation operation unit 302. Furthermore, by pulling the pressing operation unit 303 and performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit, the state shown in Figure 17(c) can be achieved without the player having to operate the rotation operation unit 302, and the cyclical movement of the movable body 310 can begin.

In the example of Figure 17(b), the movable body 310 can begin to operate even if the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is less than the minimum amount of rotation (r2 steps) required for the pressing operation unit 303 to reach the maximum protrusion amount tmax. However, the movable body 310 may not operate until the amount of rightward rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation (e.g., r3 steps) that is greater than the r2 steps, which is the minimum amount of rotation required for the pressing operation unit 303 to reach the maximum protrusion amount tmax. In other words, the movable body 310 may not operate even if the pressing operation unit 303 has protruded to the maximum protrusion amount tmax. Note that if the movable body 310 can start operating for the first time when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated beyond the state in which the pressing operation unit 303 first protrudes to the maximum protrusion amount tmax (for example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is rotated r3 steps, which is larger than the r2 steps that are the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 required for the pressing operation unit 303 to first protrude to the maximum protrusion amount tmax), the movable body 310 will not operate even if the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation after the pressing operation unit 303 has been pulled to the maximum protrusion amount tmax.

In the example of Figure 17, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 protrudes upward from the top surface of the rotation operation unit 302. However, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 may also be provided so as to protrude outward from a portion of the side surface of the rotation operation unit 302. The protruding pressing operation unit 303 may also be attached to the rotation operation unit 302, or the protruding pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 may be integrated. In addition, if the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is provided so as to protrude outward from a portion of the side surface of the rotation operation unit 302, it is desirable that the surface area exposed to the outside of the rotation operation unit 302 when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the initial position be approximately 1/30 to 1/5 of the surface area of the side surface of the rotation operation unit 302.

Figures 18 and 19 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a cancelable attack effect. Canceling an attack effect means that the attack effect is stopped and another effect is performed instead, or that the effect is not performed at all. A cancelable effect is an effect that can be determined in both a variation pattern in which a reach is executed and a variation pattern in which a reach is not executed. In Figure 19, the effects are branched into upper and lower sections according to operations on the operation unit. In the example of Figures 18 and 19, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the pressing operation unit 303, rotation operation unit 302, and movable body 310 shown in Figure 17, as well as a specific detection unit.

A cancelable attack effect is canceled if a right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., the attack effect is stopped and ends at that point. For example, if it is canceled before a reach suggestion effect in which an ally character launches a punch or kick attack, the reach suggestion effect will not be performed, and no effect will be performed to notify whether the attack will develop into a reach depending on whether it hits). Note that during a cancelable attack effect, if force is applied to the press operation unit 303 so that it does not protrude (i.e., if the press operation unit 303 is not moved from its initial position), the attack effect will not be canceled even if the rotation operation unit 302 detects a right rotation. If the detection of rotation operations by the rotation operation unit 302 is configured to be invalidated by operation of the pressing operation unit 303, or if the detection of specific operations is blocked for input, even if the pressing operation unit 303 does not have a sensor for detecting pressure, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right while the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed (i.e., with the pressing operation unit 303 not protruding), the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 will be invalidated and the attack effect will not be canceled.

Note that a cancelable attack effect is always within the valid operation period of the rotation control unit 302, and the attack effect can be canceled by operating the rotation control unit 302 at any time from the start of the attack effect (from the time a message similar to that in Figure 11(A) is displayed) to the end (until the end of the effect in which the attack hits or is dodged by the enemy character similar to that in Figures 12(F) and 12(F')). Furthermore, if a predetermined amount of time passes after the start of a cancelable attack effect without the attack effect being canceled, a reach suggestion effect will be displayed in which the ally character will launch an attack (punch or kick) at the enemy character, and an effect will be displayed in which the enemy character will avoid the ally character's attack or the attack will develop into a reach in which the enemy character will dock the ally character's attack or the enemy character will be hit.

In Figure 18(A), the same effect as in Figure 11(A) is being performed. In Figure 18(A), the rotation operation unit 302 is not being operated, so the pressing operation unit 303 is in its initial position and does not protrude, making it impossible to press the pressing operation unit 303, the movable body 310 is not moving, and the attack effect continues without being canceled.

In Figure 18(B), a message indicating that the attack effect will be canceled when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated ("Spin if you don't want to see the effect!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In Figure 18(B), the rotation operation unit 302 is not operated, so the pressing operation unit 303 is not protruding from its initial position and cannot be pressed, the movable body 310 is not moving, and the attack effect continues without being canceled. Note that if a cancelable attack effect has begun even before the message in Figure 18(B) is displayed (for example, even at the timing of Figure 18(A)), the attack effect can be canceled. Note that the effect in Figure 18(B), which displays a message indicating the operation to cancel the attack effect, does not have to be performed.

In Figure 18(C), the same effect as in Figure 11(B) is being performed, but because the entire attack effect is within the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, the gauge 1603 indicating the remaining time of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 is not displayed. In Figure 18(C), because the rotation operation unit 302 is not being operated, the pressing operation unit 303 is not protruding from its initial position and cannot be pressed, the movable body 310 is not operating, and the attack effect continues without being canceled.

First, we will explain an example of a transition to Figure 19(D) (an example of canceling an attack effect). Figure 19(D) shows a state in which, in the state of Figure 18(C), the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r1 steps, and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. However, in Figure 19(D), the pressure operation unit 303 is not operated. At this time, because the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected without detecting a press on the pressure operation unit 303, the attack effect is canceled (ended). Note that in Figure 19(D), the attack effect is canceled and only the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600; however, when the attack effect is canceled, the stopped decorative pattern and an image not displayed in a cancelable attack effect (for example, an image different from either the ally character or the enemy character displayed in a cancelable attack effect) may be displayed. Also, in Figure 19 (D), the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise by r1 steps, causing the pressing operation unit 303 to protrude to t1, and the specific detection unit has detected a specific operation, causing the movable body 310 to move to a width w1. In this way, when the conditions for canceling the attack effect are met, the movable body 310 is moving, so even if the attack effect is canceled, the player's interest in the game will not decrease as long as they watch the movement of the movable body 310.

As mentioned above, when a cancelable attack effect is being executed, the attack effect may be canceled simply by detecting a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302. In this case, the attack effect can be canceled without the pressing operation unit 303 protruding, and without operating the movable body 310. Furthermore, the attack effect is always canceled in order to operate the movable body 310 (because the conditions for operating the movable body 310 include the specific detection unit detecting a specific operation) (in other words, the movable body 310 cannot be operated when a cancelable attack effect is being executed). Furthermore, during a cancelable attack effect, there may be times when the attack effect is not canceled even if a specific operation is detected on the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

Figure 19(E) shows a state in which the attack effect has been canceled, but the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise by r3 steps, and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 has detected a specific operation. Some players may feel bored if nothing is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the attack effect has been canceled. Therefore, provided that the amount of clockwise rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is within a predetermined range (here, greater than or equal to r3 steps and less than r4 steps) and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 has detected a specific operation, an effect in which an ally character swings a punch is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, in Figure 19(E), the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise by r3 (>r2) steps, so the pressure operation unit 303 has protruded to tmax, and the specific detection unit has detected a specific operation, so the movable body 310 is operating at a width w3. When this ally character is practicing a punch, the color of the fist may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot in the current variation (for example, when an ally character is punching with a white fist, the likelihood of a jackpot in the current variation is lower than when the ally character is punching with a red fist). Note that instead of the effect of an ally character practicing a punch, the attack effect described in Figures 11 to 16 may be executed, or an effect different from the cancelable attack effect (an effect in which a display different from the ally character or enemy character displayed in the attack effect is displayed) may be executed.

The effect of an ally character practicing a punch may be executed immediately when the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is greater than or equal to r3 steps and less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, or it may not be executed immediately after these operations are detected; for example, it may be executed a predetermined time after the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is greater than or equal to r3 steps and less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. Also, the effect of an ally character practicing a punch may be executed with a predetermined probability when the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is greater than or equal to r3 steps and less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation (in other words, it does not necessarily have to be executed even if these operations are detected).

Furthermore, after a cancellable attack effect is canceled, the next special pattern variation may begin and an effect in which an ally character practices a punch may be performed, provided that the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is greater than or equal to r3 steps and less than r4 steps, and a specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. Furthermore, in the special variation that begins next after a cancellable attack effect is canceled, an effect may be performed in which an ally character strikes a fighting pose but is not practicing a punch (an example of an effect suggesting that an effect in which an ally character practices a punch will be performed in the next special pattern variation), provided that the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is greater than or equal to r3 steps and less than r4 steps, and a specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, and then an effect in which an ally character practices a punch may be performed in the next special pattern variation.

Figure 19 (F) shows the state after the attack effect is canceled, in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r4 steps, and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. In Figure 19 (F), the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise by r4 (>r2) steps, causing the pressing operation unit 303 to protrude to tmax, and the specific detection unit has detected a specific operation, causing the movable body 310 to operate at a width w4. Furthermore, when the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, a message is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This message may be displayed so that it appears to the player as if it is coming from the chicken on the movable body 310. The message in Figure 19 (F), "You're shaking too much and making you dizzy, fall over, stop, fall over...", encourages the player to reduce the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302. Seeing this message provides further enjoyment for the player, and if the player follows the message to reduce the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, the amount of movement of the movable body 310 decreases, thereby reducing the load on the movable body 310. Note that this message may encourage the player to reduce the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, such as "You're shaking too much and making you dizzy, turn it down...", or it may also suggest to what extent the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 should be reduced (for example, to less than r4 steps). Note that this message will not be displayed unless the following conditions are met: the amount of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more, and the specific detection unit included in the rotary operation unit 302 detects a specific operation.

Note that if the conditions for displaying the message of FIG. 19(F) are met while the display of FIG. 19(E) is continuing, the message of FIG. 19(F) may be displayed superimposed on the display of FIG. 19(E). However, in order to make the message of FIG. 19(F) easier for the player to recognize and to quickly reduce the load on the movable body 310, when the display of FIG. 19(E) and the message of FIG. 19(F) are displayed superimposed, it is desirable that the message of FIG. 19(F) have a higher display priority in the area where the display of FIG. 19(E) and the message of FIG. 19(F) are displayed superimposed (i.e., the message of FIG. 19(F) is displayed closer to the front than the display of FIG. 19(E)).

Note that the message in Figure 19 (F) is a message that conveys that the amount of movement of the movable body 310 is too large, and therefore it is desirable for it to be displayed immediately when the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation; however, it may also be displayed a predetermined time after the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation (i.e., it does not have to be displayed immediately), or it may be displayed with a predetermined probability when the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation (i.e., it does not necessarily have to be displayed even if these operations are detected).

In the examples of Figures 19(E) and 19(F), an effect in which an ally character practices a punch is displayed only when the specific detection unit detects a specific operation when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps to the right, and a message urging the player to reduce the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is displayed when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation. In addition to this effect, an effect in which an ally character practices a kick may be displayed only when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, such as a message urging the player to increase the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, such as "If you turn it more, a kick practice effect will occur!", may be displayed, and an effect in which an ally character practices a kick may be displayed when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation.

The effect of the ally character swinging a punch in Figure 19(E) ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect began. The message in Figure 19(F) disappears when a predetermined time has elapsed since the message began to be displayed. If the pressing operation unit 303 is operated while the ally character swinging a punch in Figure 19(E) or the message in Figure 19(F) is displayed, the movement of the movable body 310 will stop, but the effect of the ally character swinging a punch in Figure 19(E) and the display of the message in Figure 19(F) will not end until the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, the movement of the movable body 310 will stop even when the effect of the ally character swinging a punch in Figure 19(E) or the message in Figure 19(F) is displayed.

The predetermined time from the start to the end of the effect of the ally character swinging a punch in Figure 19 (E) and the predetermined time from the display of the message in Figure 19 (F) to its disappearance may be the same or different. Furthermore, the predetermined time from the start to the end of the effect of the ally character swinging a punch in Figure 19 (E) may be a time determined from multiple times. Each of the multiple times may be different from the predetermined time from the display of the message in Figure 19 (F) to its disappearance, or some of the multiple times may be the same as the predetermined time for displaying the message in Figure 19 (F).

Furthermore, the effect of an ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) ends after a predetermined time has elapsed, but if the conditions for executing the effect of an ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) are met again after the effect has ended, the effect of an ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) may be executed again. Furthermore, if the conditions for executing the effect of an ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) are met again while the effect of an ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) is being executed, the predetermined time may be cleared and reset to restart when the conditions are met again (i.e., the time for which the effect of an ally character swinging a punch is executed may be extended), or the predetermined time may continue to be counted without being cleared (i.e., the time for which the effect of an ally character swinging a punch is executed may not be extended). Similarly, the message in FIG. 19(F) is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed, but if the conditions for displaying the message in FIG. 19(F) are met again after the message in FIG. 19(F) has been erased, the message in FIG. 19(F) may be displayed again. Also, if the conditions for displaying the message in FIG. 19(F) are met again while the message in FIG. 19(F) is being displayed, the count of the predetermined time may be cleared and reset to restart when the conditions are met again (i.e., the display time of the message may be extended), or the count may continue without clearing the predetermined time (i.e., the display time of the message may not be extended).

It is desirable that the effect of the ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) and the effect of the message in FIG. 19(F) be non-cancellable (i.e., they cannot be stopped by the player's operation). Note that when the message in FIG. 19(F) is displayed, if the conditions for displaying the ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) are met, the message in FIG. 19(F) may be erased (i.e., the display of the message in FIG. 19(F) may be canceled on the condition that the rotation control unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation). Satisfying the conditions for displaying the ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) means that the amount of rotation of the rotation control unit 302 has become less than r4 steps, and it is considered that the player reduced the amount of rotation of the rotation control unit 302 in accordance with the message in FIG. 19(F).

An example of a transition from Figure 18(C) to Figure 19(D') (an example in which the attack effect is not canceled) is explained below. Figure 19(D') shows the state in Figure 18(C) in which, while force is being applied to the pressing operation unit 303 so that it does not protrude, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r1 steps, and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. In a cancelable attack effect, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotating clockwise, by not protruding the pressing operation unit 303 (i.e., by preventing the pressing operation unit 303 from moving from its initial position), the attack effect continues without being canceled, and the same effect as Figure 12(E) is performed, and the movable body 310 does not move.

If the pressing operation unit 303 is not protruding in this way, the attack effect will not be canceled even if the rotation operation unit 302 is operated (even if the operation required for cancellation is performed). Therefore, players who do not want to accidentally cancel the attack effect can simply prevent the pressing operation unit 303 from protruding during a cancelable attack effect.

In Figure 19(E'), the rotation operation unit 302 remains rotated clockwise by r1 steps, and no force is being applied to the pressing operation unit 303, so the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes to t1. In other words, because the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes and only the rotation operation unit 302 is rotating clockwise, the same effect as in Figure 12(F) is not performed, and the attack effect is canceled, as in Figure 19(D), and the movable body 310 also moves at width w1.

In addition, in Figures 19(D) and 19(E'), when an attack effect is canceled, a dedicated sound may be output from the speaker 354, or a dedicated image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that the output of the dedicated sound and/or the display of the dedicated image may be performed in place of a cancelable attack effect. For example, simply by performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a dedicated sound may be output from the speaker 354 or a dedicated image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the dedicated sound may be output or the dedicated image may be displayed even though the movable body 310 is not moving. This allows the player to concentrate on the dedicated sound or dedicated image without being distracted by the movement of the movable body 310.

Following the effect of Figure 19(E'), if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, the effect of Figure 19(E) can be executed, and if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, the effect of Figure 19(F) can be executed.

The cancelable attack effects in Figures 18 and 19 not only prevent the appearance of reach suggestion effects like the attack effect in Figure 13, but also allow for the cancellation of effects that occur before the reach suggestion effects (such as the display of a message explaining the cancelable attack effects in Figures 18(A) and 18(B), or the display of ally and enemy characters in Figure 19(C) before the ally character begins their attack).This allows players who tend to feel tense when watching attack effects to calmly proceed with the game by canceling effects that occur before the reach suggestion effects.Furthermore, the cancelable attack effects in Figures 18 and 19 allow for the effects to be canceled even after the reach suggestion effects have begun, so a player can cancel the effects even if they have a feeling after the reach suggestion effects have begun that the reach suggestion effects will not suggest that a reach effect will be executed.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the operation unit for canceling an attack effect be limited to a portion of the operation units provided on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the only operation unit for canceling an attack effect is the rotation operation unit 302). This is because if an attack effect could be canceled by operating any operation unit provided on the pachinko machine 1 during an attack effect, there is a risk that a player who did not intend to cancel the attack effect may unintentionally cancel the attack effect. However, to make it easier to cancel an attack effect, it is also possible to make it possible to cancel the attack effect by operating any operation unit provided on the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the cancelable attack effects in Figures 18 and 19 may appear in the normal state, time-saving state, and probability-varying state, but it is desirable that they not appear during jackpot play. This is because if a player accidentally cancels an effect midway through a jackpot play, the player's sense of elation at having won the jackpot will be diminished. Note that not all effects that trigger an effective period for the rotation operation unit 302 can be canceled by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 during that effective period or by performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 during that effective period (in other words, there are effects that cannot be canceled among effects that trigger an effective period for operation of the rotation operation unit 302).

In addition, since some players do not want to see any attack effects at all because they increase the tension too much, it is possible to prevent the cancellable attack effect itself from appearing, for example, if the rotation control unit 302 is maintained rotating to the right (a state in which an operation to cancel a cancellable attack effect is being performed) when a cancellable attack effect is not being performed (this may be before a cancellable attack effect begins or after a cancellable attack effect has been canceled). Because the operation to cancel a cancellable attack effect (whether this operation is the right rotation of the rotation control unit 302 or the detection of a specific operation by the specific detection unit) is included in the conditions for operating the movable body 310, a cancellable attack effect is not performed when the movable body 310 is operating (the operation of the movable body 310 and a cancellable attack effect are not performed simultaneously). However, a player who rotates the rotation control unit 302 to the right while not protruding the pressing control unit 303 when a cancelable attack effect is not being performed is considered to be a player who intends to see a cancelable attack effect, so it is desirable that a cancelable attack effect be able to appear if the pressing control unit 303 is not protruding, even if the rotation control unit 302 is maintained in the right direction when a cancelable attack effect is not being performed.

As mentioned above, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pulled from its initial position, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates to the right according to the amount of protrusion of the pressing operation unit 303, without directly operating the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, if the condition for canceling the attack effect is the detection of a specific operation by the specific detection unit, the specific operation is contact, and the specific detection unit is attached to cover the entire outer surface of the rotation operation unit 302, pulling the pressing operation unit 303 without operating the rotation operation unit 302 and without the specific detection unit detecting the specific operation will cause the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate to the right, but because the specific detection unit attached to the rotation operation unit 302 does not detect the specific operation (contact), the attack effect can continue without being canceled, even though the rotation operation unit 302 rotates to the right and the pressing operation unit 303 is protruding.

The cancelable attack effects in Figures 18 and 19 may also be performed when game play is not in progress (when neither a winning game, including a big win game and a small win game, nor a special symbol variation is being executed). In a cancelable attack effect performed when game play is not in progress, for example, a fortune-telling effect (which does not show the results of a special lottery) is performed. A cancelable attack effect performed when game play is not in progress begins, for example, when a predetermined time has passed since game play entered a state where game play is not in progress, without detecting rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., without performing an operation to cancel the cancelable attack effect). If the rotation operation unit 302 is operated during a cancelable attack effect performed when game play is not in progress, the attack effect is canceled. When a predetermined operation unit other than the rotation operation unit 302 (the operation unit for canceling a cancelable attack effect) is operated during a cancelable attack effect that is performed when a game is not in progress, an effect in which an ally character launches an attack (punch or kick) at an enemy character and an effect in which the enemy character dodges the ally character's attack or the attack hits the enemy character (for example, a predetermined distribution determines whether the enemy character dodges the ally character's attack or the attack hits the enemy character) are performed, and if the enemy character dodges the ally character's attack, a "bad luck" is announced as the fortune-telling result, and if the ally character's attack hits the enemy character, a "good luck" is announced as the fortune-telling result. Note that, in a cancelable attack effect that is performed when a game is not in progress, the condition for executing the effect in which an ally character launches an attack (punch or kick) at an enemy character and an effect in which the enemy character dodges the ally character's attack or the attack hits the enemy character may be that a predetermined time has passed since the start of the attack effect without being canceled. Furthermore, if a cancelable attack effect is being performed while the game is not in progress, and the attack effect is not canceled by not protruding the pressing operation unit 303, the game may remain stopped as long as this operation is maintained.

Furthermore, for players who have canceled a cancellable attack effect but still want to see it, the cancellable attack effect may be executed again after a predetermined time has elapsed since the attack effect was canceled (or after the attack effect ended without being canceled) unless the rotation control unit 302 is rotated right (unless the same operation as the operation to cancel the attack effect is performed). During this predetermined time, the stopped decorative pattern and an image not displayed in the cancellable attack effect (for example, an image different from either the ally character or the enemy character displayed in the cancellable attack effect) may be displayed. Furthermore, even if the rotation control unit 302 is rotated right after canceling the attack effect, the cancellable attack effect may be displayed again with a predetermined probability after a predetermined time has elapsed since the cancellation.

For example, when an operation is performed on the rotation operation unit 302 that allows the effects of Figures 19(E) and 19(F), which are effects after canceling an attack effect (rotation of r3 steps or more and detection of a specific operation by the specific detection unit), the player may be given a benefit such as an increased likelihood of a starting win or the opportunity to enter a favorable special lottery. Furthermore, for example, the effect in which an ally character practices a punch in Figure 19(E) and the effect in which a message is displayed in Figure 19(F) may be effects that are performed under specified conditions. The state in which game ball B is being fired is one example of the predetermined condition, and the strength with which game ball B is fired determines whether the effect of an ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) is executed or the message of FIG. 19(F) is displayed (for example, the strength with which game ball B is fired must be within a first predetermined range to execute the effect of an ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E), and the strength with which game ball B is fired must be within a second predetermined range (the minimum value of the second predetermined range is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the first predetermined range) to display the message of FIG. 19(F)). Furthermore, the effect of an ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) and the effect with the message of FIG. 19(F) are executed not only after a cancelable attack effect is canceled, but may also be executed if the above-mentioned predetermined conditions are met.

Instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and rotation operation unit 302 in Figures 11 to 16, the pressing operation unit 303, rotation operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and movable body 310 shown in Figure 17 may be applied.

When the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 shown in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, in the first attack performance pattern, the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 begins in FIG. 11 (C) and FIG. 14 (C3), and when the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from an OFF state to an ON state during the effective operation period, a post-operation performance is executed. However, when the rotating operation unit 302 is not rotated clockwise, the pressing operation unit 303 does not protrude. Therefore, in order for the post-operation performance to be executed in the first attack performance pattern, it is necessary to rotate the rotating operation unit 302 clockwise to protrude the pressing operation unit 303 and turn the pressing detection sensor 381 OFF, and then operate the pressing operation unit 303 to turn the pressing detection sensor 381 ON during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303.

When the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and rotation operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, in the second presentation pattern of the attack presentation, an effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 occurs in FIG. 11 (C'), FIG. 14 (C'3), and FIG. 16 (D'4), and if a right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 of a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter referred to as r1 step or more at which the movable body 310 can start moving) is detected during the effective operation period, an in-operation presentation is executed. Furthermore, if a right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 of a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter referred to as r1 step or more at which the movable body 310 can start moving) is continuously detected for a predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as 3 seconds) during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, an after-operation presentation is executed. However, in FIG. 16, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by more than a predetermined amount (more than r1 steps) after the start of the attack effect (the start of the display of the message in FIG. 16(A)) and before the start of the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty of a predetermined time begins from the start of the valid operation period in FIG. 16(D'4), and until the predetermined time has elapsed, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by more than the predetermined amount (more than r1 steps), the during-operation effect will not be executed, and will not be counted toward the duration of the right rotation of more than the predetermined amount (more than r1 steps) that is a condition for causing the post-operation effect to appear.

If the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, an operation-in-progress effect may be executed in the second effect pattern of the attack effect on the condition that a right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 of a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter, this is defined as r1 steps or more at which the operation of the movable body 310 can begin) is detected during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation. In this case, when the operation-in-progress effect is being executed in the second effect pattern, the conditions for the operation of the movable body 310 are also met, and therefore the movable body 310 operates. 16 , if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by a predetermined amount (r1 step or more) after the start of the attack effect (the start of the display of the message in FIG. 16(A)) and before the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty of a predetermined time is initiated from the start of the effective operation period, and until the predetermined time has elapsed, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by the predetermined amount (r1 step or more) and the specific operation detection unit detects a specific operation, the movable body 310 will operate but the during-operation effect will not be executed. Also, in the second effect pattern of the attack effect, a post-operation effect may be executed on the condition that, during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, the detection of the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 by a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter, referred to as r1 step or more at which the movement of the movable body 310 can be initiated) and the detection of a specific operation by the specific operation detection unit are simultaneously and continuously detected for a predetermined time (hereinafter, referred to as 3 seconds). However, in Figure 16, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by more than a predetermined amount (more than r1 steps) after the start of the attack effect (the start of the display of the message in Figure 16 (A)) and before the start of the valid operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty of a predetermined time will begin from the start of the valid operation period in Figure 16 (D'4), and until the predetermined time has elapsed, this will not be counted towards the duration of the detection of the right rotation of more than the predetermined amount (more than r1 steps) and the detection of the specific operation by the specific detection unit, which are conditions for causing the post-operation effect to appear.

Note that when the pressing operation unit 303, rotation operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and rotation operation unit 302 shown in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the minimum amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 required to perform the during-operation performance in the second performance pattern of the attack performance and the amount of rotation required to cancel the attack performance in the cancelable attack performance of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 may be the same or different. Also, when the pressing operation unit 303, rotation operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and rotation operation unit 302 shown in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the minimum amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 required to perform the after-operation performance in the second performance pattern of the attack performance and the amount of rotation required to cancel the attack performance in the cancelable attack performance of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 may be the same or different. It should be noted that the cancelable attack effects in Figures 18 and 19 may be performed when the game is not in progress (when neither a winning game, including a big win game or a small win game, nor a special symbol variation is being performed), but it is desirable that the attack effects in Figures 11 to 16 be performed only when a special symbol variation is being performed.

When the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, it is desirable that a specific operation be required to execute the attack effects of FIG. 11 to FIG. 16 for players who do not want to see the attack effects. Specifically, for example, to execute the attack effects of FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the rotating operation unit 302 must be rotated right by at least r3 steps but less than r4 steps, the specific detection unit must detect the specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 must not be operated (protruding from its initial position). On the other hand, the cancelable attack effects of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 can be canceled at any time even by players who do not want to see the attack effects, so they may appear regardless of the amount of rotation of the rotating operation unit 302.

Note that if the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 including a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, the conditions for executing the first attack effect pattern and the conditions for executing the second attack effect pattern may be different. For example, the first attack effect pattern may be executed on the condition that the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by at least r3 steps but less than r4 steps, the specific detection unit detects the specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated (i.e., the movable body 310 operates with a width of at least w3 but less than w4), and the second attack effect pattern may be executed on the condition that the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by at least r4 steps, the specific detection unit detects the specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated (i.e., the movable body 310 operates with a width of at least w4 but less than wmax).

In this case, it is preferable that the shortest time required for the second pattern of the attack effect (the time required from the start of the effect of FIG. 11(A) to the end of the effect of FIG. 12(E') and FIG. 12(F') by continuing to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 right by five or more steps for three seconds from the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302) is shorter than the shortest time required for the first pattern of the attack effect (the time required from the start of the effect of FIG. 11(A) to the end of the effect of FIG. 12(E') and FIG. 12(F') by changing the pressing operation unit 303 from the OFF state to the ON state at the start of the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303). In other words, it is preferable that the shortest time required for the effect performed when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated is shorter than the shortest time required for the effect performed when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated.

Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302, the likelihood of a reach effect being executed is higher when the first attack effect pattern is executed than when the second attack effect pattern is executed (i.e., the probability that the ally character's attack will hit the enemy character is higher). In other words, the likelihood of a reach effect being executed is higher when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated than when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r4 steps or more and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated.

Furthermore, when the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 in FIGS. 11 to 16, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the second attack effect pattern (e.g., the effect in FIGS. 11(A) to 12(F')) is executed than when the first attack effect pattern (e.g., the effect in FIGS. 11(A) to 12(F)) is executed. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated than when the effect is executed when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated.

Even if the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the attack effects in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16 cannot be canceled (i.e., cannot be stopped by operation by the player). Furthermore, after the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to cancel the cancellable attack effect in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the first attack effect pattern may be executed under the conditions that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by at least r3 steps but less than r4 steps, the specific detection unit detects the specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated (protruding from its initial position). Furthermore, after the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to cancel the cancellable attack effect in Figures 18 and 19, a second attack effect pattern may be executed on the condition that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r4 steps or more, the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated.

[3. Exploration Quest Production]
Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation will be collectively referred to simply as "variations." The search quest effect will be explained. The search quest effect is, for example, an effect that starts after the variation starts and before the decorative symbol forms a reach, and ends before the decorative symbol forms a reach, or continues after the decorative symbol forms a reach.

In the exploration quest presentation, two characters are selected from multiple types of characters (here, "hunters" or "villagers"), and the two selected characters search for and defeat rare animals. If the two selected characters discover a rare animal, attack it, and defeat it, a jackpot is announced. Also, if the two characters fail to discover a rare animal during the exploration quest presentation, a loss is announced.

Furthermore, in the exploration quest presentation, if two characters discover a rare animal and are attacked by it, an endurance presentation is executed. In the endurance presentation, if the two characters withstand the attack from the rare animal, a jackpot is announced, and if they cannot withstand it, a loss is announced.

In addition, if the endurance performance of the exploration quest performance is successful and a jackpot is announced, a reward performance (for example, a message that is only displayed when the endurance performance is successful) should always be executed, or a special benefit that is advantageous to the player (for example, transitioning to a jackpot game state with the largest number of rounds) should always be granted.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, there are strong bosses and weak bosses as rare beasts that the two characters can discover, and the likelihood of winning is higher when a weak boss is discovered than when a strong boss is discovered.

In addition, if two different characters are selected in the exploration quest presentation, the two different characters may not be able to find the rare animal and a loss may be announced (i.e., two different characters may only be selected if a loss has been selected). Also, in the exploration quest presentation, if the background at the start of the exploration quest presentation is the same, it is desirable that the probability of a jackpot (the rate of a jackpot) be higher if two hunters are selected than if two villagers are selected.

Figures 20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an encounter with a strong boss during an exploration quest. Figures 20 and 21 explain the exploration quest effect that is executed in normal game mode, which is neither a time-saving mode nor a special mode.

Figure 20 (A) shows the state when the change has begun, with a display indicating that the search quest effect has begun being displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, in Figure 20 (A), a pending display corresponding to a pending change and a pending display corresponding to a change that is currently being executed (hereinafter, these will be collectively referred to as simply pending displays) are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is a first background hatched with vertical lines. The first background is a background image that can only be displayed in normal game mode, and is the background with the lowest chance of winning a jackpot. When the search quest effect in Figure 20 (A) begins, BGM1 is output from the speaker 354. BGM1 is the BGM that can only be output in normal game mode, and is the BGM with the lowest chance of winning a jackpot.

Figure 20(B) shows the state when Hunter 1601 is selected as the first character. Hunter 1601 is a white character in the figure, and holds a sword as his weapon. When the first character is selected, the first background and hold display are displayed on the performance display device 1600, as in Figure 20(A), and BGM1 continues to be output from speaker 354. Also, in Figure 20(B), a line is displayed on the performance display device 1600 indicating that Hunter 1601, the first character, is looking for a partner character to join him in searching for rare animals.

In Figure 20(C), in addition to the first hunter 1601, another hunter 1601 is displayed as a second character on the effect display device 1600. Both hunters 1601 are holding swords, and when the second hunter 1601 is displayed (when the same character is displayed as the first and second hunters), an effect selected from multiple effects (in the example shown, a star, with the probability of winning a jackpot varying depending on the type of effect) is displayed on the weapon (here, the sword) he is holding. Note that the designs of the swords held by the first hunter 1601 and the second hunter 1601 may be different. Also, in Figure 20(C), decorative patterns form a reach.

In the exploration quest presentation, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher if the first and second characters are both Hunters 1601 than if they are both Villagers. However, if Background 1 is displayed as the background image and BGM 1 is output at the start of the exploration quest presentation as shown in Figure 20, it is desirable that a jackpot is not confirmed even if the first and second characters are both Hunters 1601 (in other words, it is desirable that the first and second characters can both become Hunters 1601 even in the case of a miss).

In addition, in Figure 20 (C), when a second hunter 1601 is displayed in addition to the first hunter 1601, the background music output from speaker 354 changes to BGM2. Furthermore, when a second hunter 1601 is displayed in addition to the first hunter 1601 (when the same character is displayed as the first and second hunters), a special sound may be output in an output mode selected from multiple output modes. Note that the probability of winning a jackpot varies depending on the output mode of the special sound (for example, the length of time it is output). This change in background music and output of a special sound can make the player understand that the displayed character will now begin to seriously search for rare animals.

It is desirable that the above-mentioned special sound be output only when two of the same characters (two hunters 1601 or two villagers) are displayed on the performance display device 1600 (in other words, it is desirable that it not be output when one hunter 1601 and one villager are displayed).

In Figure 20(D), the two hunters 1601 hide their weapons (i.e., the swords that were displayed up until Figure 20(C) are no longer displayed), and the scene shifts to a full-scale search for the rare animal. However, to allow the player to recognize that the characters have not changed between Figure 20(C) and Figure 20(D), the display mode of the two hunters 1601 themselves does not change (i.e., the hunters 1601 themselves are displayed in the same manner in Figure 20(C) and Figure 20(D)).

As such, each character (hunter 1601 and villager) has a display mode in which they hold a weapon and a display mode in which they do not hold a weapon, and when multiple characters are displayed at the same time, they are displayed in the same display mode (in other words, when multiple characters are displayed at the same time, either all of the multiple characters are holding a weapon, or none of the multiple characters are holding a weapon).

In addition, in Figure 20 (D), the background displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to a second background hatched with dots. While the second background is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the weapon held by the character is hidden, and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is also hidden (only the pending display corresponding to the change currently being executed is displayed). By hiding the pending display corresponding to the pending change in this way, the player can concentrate on the effect of searching for the rare animal.

When the background displayed on the performance display device 1600 is the second background, not only the pending display corresponding to the pending change but also the pending display corresponding to the change being executed may be hidden. Also, in Figure 20 (D), the background music output from speaker 354 changes to BGM3.

It is desirable that the display size of the characters when the second background is displayed on the effect display device 1600 be smaller than the display size of the characters when the first background prior to Figure 20 (C) is displayed. This is because there is a possibility of encountering a rare animal when the second background is displayed, and the player's attention is drawn to the display of the rare animal rather than the character.

Also, as between Figure 20(C) and Figure 20(D), when a character changes from holding a weapon to not holding a weapon, the character (and weapon) may go through a state where it is not visible (for example, the character may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a predetermined movable body attached to the pachinko machine 1 may move to a position where it overlaps with the character's display area on the effect display device 1600, making it invisible). When a character changes from holding a weapon to not holding a weapon, the player's sense of tension can be alleviated by temporarily hiding the character. Furthermore, it is desirable that the background is also hidden (for example, a single-color background) at the time the character is temporarily hidden.

Figure 20(E) shows the state in which the hunters 1601 have discovered a rare animal. In Figure 20(E), two unarmed hunters 1601 and a rare animal, a strong boss 1610 with a crest and beak, are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, BGM3 is output from the speaker 354. Instead of suddenly displaying the rare animal, for example, a valid operation period for a specific operation unit (e.g., the pressing operation unit 303) may be generated, and the rare animal (either the strong boss 1610 or the weak boss) may be displayed when either the specified operation unit has been operated during the valid operation period or the valid operation period has ended.

Figure 20(F) shows two hunters 1601 being attacked by a strong boss 1610. After the two characters are attacked by a rare animal, the game transitions to an endurance performance. Also, in Figure 20(F), BGM 3 is being output from speaker 354.

When a character without a weapon is displayed and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which the character encounters and battles a rare animal) is being performed, a dropped weapon (i.e., the object that was displayed with the character when the first background was displayed) may be displayed. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation that the character will make use of the weapon. It is desirable that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when a dropped weapon is displayed than when it is not displayed.

Figure 21 (G) shows the state when the endurance performance has begun. In Figure 21 (G), the two hunters 1601 (characters attacked by rare animals) are shown using their weapons to maintain their balance so as not to fall. Furthermore, a cut-in of a character other than the two hunters 1601 (i.e., a villager 1602 who was not selected) occurs, and a performance is executed in which the cut-in villager 1602 is shown trying to go and rescue the two hunters 1601 who are about to fall.

It is desirable that the two hunters 1601 (characters attacked by rare animals) who are about to fall and the cut-in characters are dynamically depicted. Specifically, for example, by repeatedly having the two hunters 1601 who are about to fall stagger from side to side, the player can easily recognize that the two hunters 1601 have not yet fallen. Also, for example, by repeatedly having the cut-in character stomp their feet, the player can hope that the cut-in character will come to the rescue of the two hunters 1601 and succeed in the endurance depiction. Furthermore, the length of time that this dynamic depiction is performed may suggest whether the endurance depiction will be successful (for example, the dynamic depiction will be performed for a longer period if the endurance depiction is successful than if it is unsuccessful).

In addition, in Figure 21 (G), the character displayed in the cut-in is also holding a weapon, just like the hunter 1601 (the weapon held by the villager 1602 is a metal club). In this way, in the endurance performance, in addition to the hunter 1601 who is about to fall, the villager 1602 is displayed as a helper character, and by the displayed character once again holding a weapon, the player is given a sense of anticipation that the hunter 1601 will not fall but will get up again.

In addition, in Figure 21 (G), background music is not being output from the speaker 354 to draw the player's attention to whether the hunter 1601 will fall. Note that in Figure 21 (G), a character attacked by a rare animal may use a weapon to maintain balance and not fall, and dedicated background music may be output when a cut-in of an unselected character occurs.

Also, in Figure 21 (G), the background displayed on the effect display device 1600 has returned to the first background so as not to make the player overly hopeful that the hunter 1601 will not be defeated. Furthermore, in Figure 21 (G), pending displays corresponding to changes that are currently being made and pending displays corresponding to changes that are on hold are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In other words, when the first background is displayed, the displayed character is holding a weapon, and when the first background is displayed, all pending displays are displayed.

To indicate to the player that the endurance effect will begin, two weaponized hunters 1601 (characters attacked by rare animals) and a weaponized villager 1602 (helper character) may be displayed after FIG. 20(F) and before FIG. 21(G). Then, for example, the endurance effect of FIG. 21(G) will begin a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the two weaponized hunters 1601 (characters attacked by rare animals) and the weaponized villager 1602 (helper character) begin to be displayed.

In Figure 21 (G), in order to make the player hope that the arrival of the helper character will lead to success in the endurance performance, it is desirable that the display size of the helper character be larger than the display size of the two hunters 1601, who are the first and second characters.

If the same character as the character attacked by the rare animal comes to the rescue in the endurance performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than if a different character comes to the rescue. For this reason, a different character is always displayed in the cut-in in Figure 21 (G), and a message suggesting that the same character will come to the rescue is displayed in Figure 21 (H), described below, giving the player a sense of excitement. If the same character as the character attacked by the rare animal comes to the rescue in the endurance performance, a jackpot is confirmed, and if a different character comes to the rescue, a loss is confirmed.

Also, as between Figure 20 (F) and Figure 21 (G), when a character changes from not holding a weapon to holding a weapon, the character (and weapon) may go through a state where it is not visible (for example, the character may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a predetermined movable body attached to the pachinko machine 1 may move to a position where it overlaps with the character's display area on the effect display device 1600, making it invisible). When a character changes from not holding a weapon to holding one, temporarily hiding the character can ease the player's sense of tension. It is also desirable that the background is also hidden (for example, a single-color background) at the time the character is temporarily hidden.

Following Figure 21(G), the screen transitions to Figure 21(H) or Figure 21(J). In Figure 21(H), the message "I'll arrive first!" (a message suggesting that a character other than the help character displayed in Figure 21(G), i.e., a hunter 1601, will come to the rescue) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that in Figure 21(H), the first background is displayed as the background image on the effect display device 1600, but in order to give the player a sense of anticipation by the fact that a character other than the help character displayed in Figure 21(G) will come to the rescue, a background other than the first background (for example, a background dedicated to displaying the message) may be displayed.

In addition, in Figure 21(H), BGM 4 (i.e., BGM different from BGM 1-3) is output from speaker 354 to give the player a sense of excitement that Hunter 1601 is coming to their rescue. Also, in Figure 21(H), the first background continues to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, but a special background different from the first and second backgrounds may be displayed to give the player a sense of excitement. Also, in Figure 21(H), all pending displays are hidden to draw the player's attention to the above-mentioned message (if the conditions for additional pending changes are met while the pending displays are hidden, the changes are additionally pending, but the pending displays remain hidden).

Figure 21 (I) shows a state in which two hunters 1601 have not fallen because a new hunter 1601 has come to their rescue, meaning the endurance performance has been successful, and the decorative symbols have stopped in a jackpot combination. Figure 21 (I) displays three hunters 1601 (three of the same characters), including the two hunters 1601 who have been attacked by the rare animal and the one hunter 1601 who has come to their rescue, and all of the hunters 1601 are holding weapons (swords). To maintain the player's sense of excitement, BGM 4 continues to be output from speaker 354. It is advisable to display a message indicating that the game has been controlled (transitioned) to the jackpot game state (an example of an advantageous state) at the timing when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (an example of an advantageous state) after the display of Figure 21 (I).

In Figure 21(J), which transitions from Figure 21(G), a villager 1602 comes to the rescue, but the two hunters 1601 have fallen, meaning the endurance performance has failed, and the decorative symbols stop in a losing combination. In Figure 21(J), two hunters are shown who have been attacked by a rare animal and fallen, along with one villager 1602 who has come to the rescue (i.e., two of the same characters and one different character), and both characters are holding weapons (the hunter 1601 has a sword, and the villager 1602 has a metal club). In Figure 21(J), background music is not being output from the speaker 354 to avoid stimulating the player's sense of disappointment.

The time from when the state in Figure 21 (G) begins until the state in Figure 21 (J) is reached and the fluctuation ends is within a predetermined time (for example, within 3 seconds), and the time from when the state in Figure 21 (G) begins until the state in Figure 21 (I) is reached and the fluctuation ends, via the state in Figure 21 (H), is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). As a result, the time from when the endurance effect begins to when the fluctuation ends is longer when the endurance effect is successful compared to when it is unsuccessful, allowing the player to enjoy the successful endurance effect for a longer period of time.

The expected probability of a jackpot in this variation may also be indicated by the length of time from when the character holding the weapon in FIG. 21(G) is displayed again until the transition to the next presentation (FIG. 21(H) or FIG. 21(J)). For example, if the time from when the character holding the weapon in FIG. 21(G) is displayed again until the presentation changes to that of FIG. 21(H) is 5 seconds, and the time from when the character holding the weapon in FIG. 21(G) is displayed again until the presentation changes to that of FIG. 21(J) is 3 seconds, then if the presentation does not change even after 3 seconds or more have passed since the character holding the weapon in FIG. 21(G) was displayed again, this indicates that the endurance presentation was successful (i.e., this indicates that a jackpot will be announced).

Furthermore, it is desirable that the rate at which unsuccessful endurance effects occur is higher than the rate at which endurance effects are successful. If the rate at which endurance effects are successful were high, players would be less likely to appreciate the reward effects that are executed when endurance effects are successful, or the advantageous benefits that are granted to players.

In Figures 21(I) and 21(J), the display size of the help character may be larger than the display size of the two hunters 1601, who are the first and second characters, to make it easier for the player to recognize whether a hunter 1601 or a villager 1602 has appeared as the help character. Alternatively, all displayed characters may be the same size to make it easier to recognize all characters. After displaying the help character in a larger size than the display size of the two hunters 1601, who are the first and second characters, all characters may be displayed at the same size (the display size of the first and second characters may be matched to the display size of the help character, the display size of the first and second characters may be matched to the display size of the help character, or the display size of all characters may be matched to a size different from the size at which the first and second characters and the size at which the help character were displayed).

Furthermore, it is desirable that the display size of the characters when it is determined that the endurance performance in Figures 21(I) and 21(H) has been successful or unsuccessful be larger than the display size of the characters at the start of the endurance performance in Figure 21(G). This is to allow the player to recognize which character's endurance performance has been successful or unsuccessful.

For example, a zone effect related to a search quest effect may be executable. For example, when a rare animal discovery confirmation zone effect is executed, the character will definitely discover a rare animal, suggesting a higher chance of winning compared to when a rare animal discovery confirmation zone effect is not executed. This rare animal discovery confirmation zone effect may be executed during a variation in which a search quest effect is executed (however, it may start before the rare animal is discovered), or it may be executed as a pre-emptive effect from a variation prior to the variation in which a search quest effect is executed. The zone display indicating that a rare animal discovery confirmation zone effect is being executed has a higher display priority than the background display (i.e., the zone display is displayed in the foreground in an overlapping display area between the zone display and the background display), but a lower display priority than the character or weapon (i.e., the character or weapon is displayed in the foreground in an overlapping display area between the zone display and the character or weapon).

It is desirable that, after a character holding a weapon is displayed when the first background is displayed as in Figures 20(B) to 20(C), the rate at which this does not change (as in the presentation explained in Figure 24 below) is higher than the rate at which the situation changes to a character not holding a weapon as in Figure 20(D) and subsequent images. This can heighten the player's sense of anticipation when the situation changes to a character not holding a weapon.

Furthermore, when the display changes from one in which a character is holding a weapon to one in which a character is not holding a weapon, as occurs when transitioning from Figure 20(C) to Figure 20(D), it is desirable to change from the display of a character holding a weapon to the display of a character not holding a weapon without an intervening period in which no characters are displayed. This causes a sudden change from a character not holding a weapon to a character holding a weapon, making it easier for the player to notice the change in whether or not a character has a weapon, which helps to heighten the sense of anticipation.

On the other hand, when the transition from Figure 20 (F) to Figure 21 (G) occurs, where a character not holding a weapon is displayed is changed to a character holding a weapon, it is desirable to change from a character not holding a weapon to a character holding a weapon after a period in which the character (including the weapon) is not displayed.

Incidentally, even when the transition from Figure 20(C) to Figure 20(D) occurs when a character holding a weapon is displayed to a character not holding a weapon, it may be possible to change from a character holding a weapon to a character not holding a weapon after a period in which the character (including the weapon) is hidden.

Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a character discovers a weak boss that is a rare animal in an exploration quest presentation. Figure 22 (E2), which transitions from Figure 20 (D), shows the state in which a hunter 1601 has discovered a rare animal. In Figure 22 (E2), two unarmed hunters 1601 and a weak boss 1611 that is a rare animal without a crest or beak are displayed on the presentation display device 1600. The likelihood of a jackpot is higher when a character discovers a weak boss 1611 than when a character discovers a strong boss 1610. Also, in Figure 22 (E2), a second background is displayed as the background on the presentation display device 1600, and BGM 3 continues to be output from speaker 354.

In Figure 22 (F2), two unarmed hunters 1601 (characters from Figure 22 (E2)) and one unarmed helper character hunter 1601 have joined the battle, meaning that a total of three characters are launching a preemptive attack on the weak boss 1611. When a character launches a preemptive attack on a rare animal, the endurance effect is not executed. Also, when a character launches a preemptive attack on a rare animal, it is preferable that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the endurance effect is executed. Note that although the unarmed helper character is displayed in an area overlapping with the weak boss 1611, the display priority of the helper character is higher (i.e., the helper character is displayed closer to the weak boss 1611).

Note that when a hunter 1601 is selected as the first and second characters, the character is more likely to launch a preemptive attack on a rare beast (i.e., less likely to be attacked by a rare beast) than when a villager 1602 is selected. Also, when a weak boss 1611 is selected as the rare beast, the character is more likely to launch a preemptive attack on a rare beast (i.e., less likely to be attacked by a rare beast) than when a strong boss 1610 is selected.

In Figure 22 (G2), an effect is produced showing that three characters, two hunters 1601 and one helper hunter 1601, have defeated the weak boss 1611, and the decorative symbols stop in a winning combination. Also in Figure 22 (G2), the effect display device 1600 displays the second background as the background, and BGM 3 continues to be output from the speaker 354. Note that after Figure 22 (G2), an effect may be produced in which the unweaponed hunter 1601 changes into the weaponed hunter 1601.

It is preferable that a display be displayed indicating that the game has been controlled (transitioned) to the jackpot game state (an example of an advantageous state) at the timing when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after Figure 22 (G2). This will give the player an instant sense of elation by displaying a display indicating that the game has been controlled to the jackpot game state. It is also possible to display a display indicating that the game will be controlled (transitioned) to the jackpot game state (an example of an advantageous state) before the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (specifically, for example, at the start of the variation in which the search quest presentation is executed, or at the time when the special random number corresponding to the variation in which the search quest presentation is executed is reserved). This will allow the player to be notified of the jackpot at an early stage, giving them a sense of surprise.

In addition, in Figure 22 (F2), if a character different from the first and second characters (here, villager 1602) is selected as the helper character, the expected probability of a jackpot is lower than if the same character is selected (or a miss may be confirmed). In addition, in Figure 22 (F2), if the same character as the first and second characters is selected as the helper character, a jackpot may be confirmed (in other words, a transition to Figure 22 (H2) may not occur).

In addition, in Figure 22 (H2), an effect is produced showing that two hunters 1601 and one helper hunter 1601, a total of three characters, have escaped to the weak boss 1611, and furthermore, the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 returns to the first background, and no background music is output from the speaker 354.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, various background images such as the first background, second background, and the third background described below can be displayed on the presentation display device 1600, so the transparency of the character and image may be changed to allow the player to enjoy the background images.

Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a search quest presentation. In the search quest presentation of Figure 23, BGM 3, which was output when the character encountered a rare animal in the search quest presentations of Figures 20 to 22, is output from speaker 354 when the change begins (BGM 3 can suggest that a rare animal will be encountered, i.e., BGM 3 functions as a precursor to an encounter with a rare animal), and the background displayed on presentation display device 1600 is a third background hatched with horizontal straight lines.

In the exploration quest presentation in Figure 23 (a exploration quest presentation in which BGM 3 is output at the start of the change and the background is background 3), it is desirable that the character will always encounter a rare animal (or that the rate of encountering a rare animal is higher than in the exploration quest presentations in Figures 20 to 22).

As a result, when the exploration quest presentation in Figure 23 begins, players who hear BGM 3 (which is output when a rare animal is encountered in the exploration quest presentation in Figures 21 and 22) can feel a sense of anticipation that their character will encounter a rare animal.

Figure 23 (A3) is the same as Figure 20 (A), except that the third background is displayed as the background image on the performance display device 1600, and BGM3 is output from speaker 354.

In Figure 23 (B3), the third background is displayed as the background image on the performance display device 1600, and BGM 3 is output from the speaker 354. Furthermore, in Figure 23 (B3), the character Hunter 1601 is hiding his weapon (i.e., the weapon is not displayed) while searching for his companions.

As mentioned above, in the presentations of Figures 20 and 22, the character hides his weapon when he encounters a rare animal, so by having the hunter 1601 hide his weapon in advance in Figure 23 (B3), the player can get a sense of anticipation that the character will encounter a rare animal. Note that the character displayed in the exploration quest presentation of Figure 23 always does not have a weapon.

Figure 23 (C3) is similar to Figure 20 (C), except that the third background is displayed as the background image on the performance display device 1600, BGM 5 is output from the speaker 354, and the character is hiding a weapon. In other words, in Figure 23 (C3), when a second hunter 1601 is displayed in addition to the first hunter 1601 (when the same character is displayed as the first and second hunters), the same special sound as in Figure 20 (C) may be output. Note that BGM 3 may continue to be output in place of BGM 5 even after Figure 23 (C3).

Figures 23 (D3) to 23 (F3) are similar to Figures 22 (E2) to 22 (G2), respectively, except that a third background is displayed as the background image on the effect display device 1600 and BGM 5 is output from the speaker. Note that in the search effect in which the first background was displayed at the start of the variation, when a second character identical to the first character is additionally displayed in Figure 20 (C3), BGM 2, which is not output at other times, is output from speaker 354, but when a second character identical to the first character is additionally displayed in Figure 23 (C3), BGM 5, which is also output from Figure 23 (D3) onwards, is output from speaker 354. In FIG. 23 (C3), BGM2 (the BGM that is output when two of the same characters begin to be displayed in the exploration quest presentation that begins with the display of the first background) may be output, or dedicated BGM for when two of the same characters begin to be displayed in the exploration quest presentation that begins with the output of BGM3 may be output.

Note that BGM 3 may be output from speaker 354 throughout the entire exploration quest presentation in FIG. 23. In other words, in the exploration quest presentation in FIG. 23, the BGM may change or BGM 3 may continue to be output, so the length of time BGM 3 is output is indefinite. For example, if the length of time BGM 3 is output is indefinite, and the longer BGM 3 is output, the higher the chance of a jackpot, the player can tensely wait for BGM 3 to end. On the other hand, in FIG. 20, BGM 3 is output when the two characters are actively searching for and battling rare animals, so the length of time BGM 3 is output is constant.

In the search quest presentation of Figure 23, i.e., in which the third background is displayed as the background image on the presentation display device 1600 and BGM3 is output from the speaker at 354 from the start of the variation, in order to avoid damaging the player's sense of anticipation heightened by the third background and BGM3, it is also possible to make it so that a jackpot is confirmed when two hunters 1601 (who create a stronger sense of anticipation than the villagers 1602) are searching for a rare animal.

Furthermore, when the search quest presentation shown in Figure 23 is executed, the player's sense of anticipation is heightened by the third background and BGM 3 that has been output since the start of the fluctuation, so it is desirable that the rate of winning a jackpot is higher than when the search quest presentation shown in Figures 20 to 22 is executed (a search quest presentation in which the first background is displayed as the background image on the presentation display device 1600 and BGM 1 is output from the speaker 354).

Note that in the exploration quest presentation in which the third background of FIG. 23 is displayed, when a predetermined presentation (for example, a presentation following an encounter with a rare animal or a presentation in which two or more of the same characters are displayed) is not being performed, the background music being output from speaker 354 can be interrupted (the background music simply stops or changes to other background music) by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, pressing operation unit 303), and the background music can be output again by operating the predetermined operation unit again. Note that, to draw the player's attention to the fact that the background music will be interrupted by this operation, no operation sound is output in association with the operation to interrupt the background music. On the other hand, in exploration quest presentations in which the third background is not displayed, such as those of FIG. 20 to FIG. 22, the background music being output from speaker 354 will not be interrupted even if a predetermined operation unit (for example, pressing operation unit 303) is operated.

Furthermore, in the exploration quest presentation in which the third background of FIG. 23 is displayed, when a predetermined presentation (for example, a presentation after encountering a rare animal or a presentation in which two or more of the same characters are displayed) is not being performed, an icon display whose appearance can be changed in response to operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, pressing operation unit 303) may be displayed on the presentation display device 1600. Therefore, when the predetermined operation unit is operated when the predetermined presentation is not being performed, the background music being output from the speaker is interrupted and the appearance of the icon display changes. Then, when the predetermined operation unit is operated again, the background music is output again and the appearance of the icon display can be changed again (it may return to its original appearance or change to a different appearance). On the other hand, in the exploration quest presentation in which the third background is not displayed, such as those of FIG. 20 to FIG. 22, the icon display is not displayed on the presentation display device 1600 regardless of operation of the predetermined operation unit. Note that the icon display may include information related to the background music being output from speaker 354.

Note that the search quest presentation in Figure 23 is preferably executed in a game state that is advantageous to players in a time-saving state or a special probability state (for example, a game state with a higher probability of winning than a game state in which the search quest presentation in which the first background is displayed is executed) in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation with the third background and BGM3. On the other hand, the search quest presentation in Figures 20 to 22 is preferably executed in a normal game state that is not a time-saving state or special probability state.

Figure 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which two selected characters are unable to find a rare animal during an exploration quest presentation. Figure 24 (A4) is the same as Figure 20 (A). Figure 24 (B4) is the same as Figure 20 (B), except that a villager 1602 holding a weapon (a metal club) is selected as the first character.

In Figure 24 (C4), in addition to the first villager 1602, a hunter 1601 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a second character, with the villager 1602 holding a metal club and the hunter 1601 holding a sword. In Figure 20 (C), when the same character as the first character is displayed as the second character, a specified effect is displayed on the weapon he is holding. However, if the first and second characters are different, the player will not encounter a rare animal and will ultimately be notified of a miss. Therefore, to avoid unnecessarily raising the player's expectations, the specified effect is not displayed. Also, in Figure 24 (C4), the decorative symbols form a reach. Also, in Figure 24 (C4), to avoid unnecessarily raising the player's expectations, the background music output from the speaker 354 remains BGM 1, and no special sounds are output.

In Figure 24 (D4), unlike Figure 20 (D), there is no effect of hiding the weapons to prevent the rare animal from noticing them (i.e., the weapons remain visible), and instead the two characters are shown searching for the rare animal. This suggests to the player that the two characters will not be able to encounter the rare animal.

Also, in Figure 24 (D4), in order to avoid unnecessarily increasing the player's expectations, the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 remains as the first background, all hold displays remain displayed, and the background music output from the speaker 354 remains as BGM1.

In Figure 24 (E4), when it appears that two characters have discovered a rare animal, it turns out that it is the other villager 1602 who discovers it (i.e., the rare animal is not discovered), and the decorative patterns stop in a losing combination. Also, in Figure 24 (E4), the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 remains the first background, and BGM is not being output from the speaker 354.

Note that while Figure 24 describes an effect in which two different characters are selected and a rare animal cannot be encountered, an effect in which a rare animal cannot be encountered may also be executed even when the same two characters are selected. That is, for example, the effects of Figures 20(A) to 20(C) may be executed, followed by the effects of Figures 24(D4) and 24(E4) (however, the first and second characters in Figures 24(D4) and 24(E4) are hunters 1601, as in Figure 20(C), and the third character is a villager 1602 different from the first and second characters).

In addition, instead of transitioning from Figure 24 (C4) to Figure 24 (D4), the selected first and second characters may be temporarily hidden and the first and second characters may then be reselected. This character reselection may be repeated multiple times. Furthermore, the more times character reselection is performed, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. When reselecting characters, the same combination of characters as the first and second characters previously selected may be selected, or a different combination of characters may be selected. For example, if reselection is repeated in which the first and second characters are both hunters, the special sound described in Figure 20 (C) will be output each time the second hunter 1601 is displayed in addition to the first hunter 1601. In other words, the special sound can be output multiple times with one change.

Also, instead of transitioning to Figure 20 (D) or Figure 20 (D4) after the first and second characters are selected as in Figure 20 (C) or Figure 24 (C4), a specified character that is neither a hunter 1601 nor a villager 1602 may be displayed as the third character, and then the first and second characters may be re-selected.

Figures 25 and 26 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of a search quest presentation. In the search quest presentations of Figures 25 and 256, similar to the search quest presentation of Figure 23, from the start of the fluctuation, the third background is displayed as the background image on the presentation display device 1600, and BGM3 is output from the speaker 354. In addition, in the search quest presentations of Figures 25 and 26, an endurance presentation is also performed.

Figures 25 (A5) to 25 (D5) are similar to Figures 23 (A3) to 23 (D3), except that villager 1602 is selected as the first and second characters, respectively.

Figure 25 (E5) shows two villagers 1602 being attacked by a weak boss 1611. The performance display device 1600 continues to display the third background as the background image, and only the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change is displayed, and BGM 5 is output from the speaker 354.

In Figure 25 (F5), an endurance performance is being performed. In Figure 25 (F5), the third background continues to be displayed as the background image on the performance display device 1600, all hold displays are displayed, and BGM is not being output from the speaker 354. Also, in the endurance performance when the third background is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the characters (two villagers 1602 who are characters attacked by rare animals, and a hunter 1601 (different from the villagers 1602) who is a cut-in character) do not carry weapons. The third background has already raised the player's expectations, and by not allowing the characters to carry weapons, the player's expectations are not made excessive.

In Figure 26 (G5), a message ("Looks like we won't make it...") indicating that the jackpot has not been won (the endurance effect has failed) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, a fourth background hatched in a grid pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a background image. The fourth background is a background image exclusive to when the message is displayed. In addition, all pending displays are displayed on the effect display device 1600, but to make it easier for the player to recognize the message and the fourth background, the pending display corresponding to the change in progress may be hidden, or both the pending display corresponding to the change in progress and the pending change may be hidden. In addition, BGM 6 is output from speaker 354. BGM 6 is exclusive to when the message is displayed.

In Figure 26 (G5), a message indicating that the jackpot has not been won is displayed, and by displaying the dedicated background image, Background 4, and outputting dedicated BGM, BGM 6, the player is made to realize that they have not won the jackpot before the search quest presentation has completely ended, preventing sudden disappointment.

However, it is desirable that the effect of FIG. 26 (G5) can only be executed when the third background is displayed from the start of the exploration quest effect and when the characters selected as the first and second characters are not the hunters 1601 with the highest jackpot expectation (i.e., one of the characters is a villager 1602). In an exploration quest effect that starts from the first background, which has a low jackpot expectation, as in FIG. 21, the player is prepared to not win a jackpot from the start, so they will not become suddenly disappointed even if the effect of FIG. 26 (G5) is not executed and a loss is announced. Furthermore, in an exploration quest effect that starts from the third background, which has a high jackpot expectation, if two hunters 1601 with a high jackpot expectation are selected as the first and second characters, a jackpot is already confirmed from the start, and the effect of FIG. 26 (G5) will not be executed.

In Figure 26 (H5), the endurance performance has failed, and the decorative symbols have stopped in a losing combination. The performance display device 1600 displays the first background as the background image, and all pending displays are displayed. Note that in Figure 26 (H5), instead of the first background, a fifth background may be displayed, which can only be displayed after the fourth background of Figure 26 (G5) is displayed. Note that the fifth background can continue to be displayed in subsequent variations, and can be displayed, for example, from the time the fifth background is displayed until a predetermined number of variations have been completed. The two villagers 1602 and the one helper character, the hunter 1601, are both holding weapons. Also, no background music is output from the speaker 354. Furthermore, when the fifth background is displayed from the time it is displayed until the predetermined number of changes has been completed, it is preferable that BGM (dedicated BGM different from any of BGM1 to BGM6) can be output from speaker 354 at least while the predetermined number of changes is being performed (the BGM may be switched to another BGM during the predetermined number of changes, and the BGM may be switched back to the dedicated BGM during the predetermined number of changes).

Note that if a search quest presentation is performed in the variation following the variation that ended in Figure 26 (H5), the search quest presentation will begin from the presentation in Figure 20. In other words, the search presentation for the next variation will begin with the first background displayed, and the first and second characters selected will be holding weapons. Therefore, in Figure 26 (H5), the first background is displayed in advance and the characters are shown holding weapons in preparation for the search quest presentation that may be performed in the next variation.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, if the background image and BGM at the start of the exploration quest presentation are the same, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher if a hunter 1601 is selected as both the first and second characters than if a villager 1602 is selected as both the first and second characters.

However, it is desirable that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when a search quest presentation begins with the third background displayed and BGM 3 output and a villager 1602 is selected as both the first and second characters (for example, the search quest presentation in Figures 25 and 26), than when a hunter 1601 is selected as both the first and second characters in the search quest presentation that begins with the first background displayed and BGM 1 output (for example, the search quest presentation in Figures 20 and 21).

Note that if a loss is announced in the exploration quest presentation that begins with the display of the third background and the output of BGM3, the presentation of FIG. 26 (G5) may be omitted. If the presentation of FIG. 26 (G5) is omitted, the presentation of FIG. 25 (A5) may be resumed following FIG. 26 (H5). In this case, in FIG. 25 (F5) and FIG. 26 (H5), BGM may not be output, or BGM3 may be output. Also, in the exploration quest presentation that begins with the display of the third background and the output of BGM3, when a character encounters a rare animal (FIG. 23 (D3) to FIG. 23 (F3), FIG. 25 (D5) to FIG. 25 (E5)), a background different from the third background (for example, the second background or a dedicated background) may be displayed.

Note that Figures 21, 22, and 23 illustrate examples in which a jackpot is announced after two identical characters encounter a rare animal, but a jackpot may also be announced when two identical characters are selected but without encountering a rare animal. Specifically, for example, a jackpot may be announced by the presentation of Figure 21(I) following Figure 20(C). Also, a jackpot may be announced by the presentation of Figure 21(I) (where the background image is the third background) following Figure 23(C3). This can give the player a sense of surprise. However, it is desirable that the likelihood of a jackpot be higher when two identical characters encounter a rare animal than when two identical characters are selected but do not encounter a rare animal.

In addition, in the search quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, even if a hunter 1601 is selected as both the first and second characters (for example, the search quest presentations in Figures 20 and 21), or even if a villager 1602 is selected as both the first and second characters, there is a possibility that a loss will be announced (in other words, these presentations can be selected whether a jackpot or a loss is selected).

On the other hand, in the exploration quest presentation that begins with the third background displayed and BGM 3 being output, if a hunter 1601 is selected as both the first and second characters (for example, the exploration quest presentation in Figure 23), a jackpot is confirmed (i.e., this presentation can only be selected if a jackpot is selected), but if a villager 1602 is selected as both the first and second characters, a loss may be announced (i.e., this presentation can be selected whether a jackpot or a loss is selected).

Furthermore, for example, in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the display of the third background and the output of BGM 3, it is desirable that the minimum time of the advantageous state (jackpot play) controlled when villager 1602 is selected as both the first and second characters and a jackpot is announced be shorter than the minimum time of the advantageous state (jackpot play) controlled when hunter 1601 is selected as both the first and second characters and a jackpot is announced.

In addition, in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the third background being displayed and BGM 3 being output, a jackpot may also be announced if a different character combination (a combination of hunter 1601 and villager 1602) is selected as the first and second characters. Specifically, for example, in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the third background being displayed and BGM 3 being output, after the different character combination is selected, a jackpot is announced without encountering a rare animal (for example, the presentation of FIG. 21(I) is executed). This allows the player's emotions to fluctuate greatly, with anticipation rising when the third background is displayed and BGM 3 being output, and decreasing when a different character combination is selected, but then a sudden surge of excitement when a jackpot is announced without a rare animal being discovered.

On the other hand, in a search quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, if a different character combination is selected as the first and second characters, it is preferable that a jackpot is not announced (for example, as in the search quest presentation in Figure 24). (In other words, a different character combination is selected as the first and second characters only if a miss is selected, and when a jackpot is announced, the same characters are always selected as the first and second characters.)

Also, in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, after different characters are selected as the first and second characters (for example, as in Figure 24 (C4)), the second character may be reselected to be the same character as the first character (for example, a transition to Figure 20 (C) may occur).

Furthermore, for example, in a search quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, a presentation may be executed in which a total of four characters, two hunters 1601 and two villagers 1602, gather together (for example, at the timing shown in Figure 20(C)) and go in search of a rare animal to defeat it. For example, it is desirable that the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: when two villagers 1602 gather < when a total of four characters, two hunters 1601 and two villagers 1602, gather < when two hunters 1601 gather.

In addition, in such an effect where multiple characters (three or more characters) gather, other characters other than the hunter 1601 and the villager 1602 may also be displayed. Even in this case, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when an effect in which only two hunters 1601 are displayed is executed than when an effect in which multiple characters including the hunter 1601 are executed. However, the likelihood of a jackpot may be higher only when all characters are gathered in an effect in which multiple characters (three or more characters) gather (when all types of characters are gathered) than when an effect in which only two hunters 1601 are displayed.

It is desirable that the fluctuation time during which a jackpot is announced in a search quest presentation that begins with the third background being displayed and BGM 3 being output be shorter than the fluctuation time during which a jackpot is announced in a search quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM 1 being output. In a search quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM 1 being output, the player's anticipation is not high at the start of the search quest presentation, and by performing the fluctuation presentation over a long period of time, the player's anticipation can be gradually increased. On the other hand, in a search quest presentation that begins with the third background being displayed and BGM 3 being output, the player's anticipation is already high from the start of the search quest presentation, so a short fluctuation time can maintain the player's anticipation and ultimately reduce fatigue.

Also, for the same reason, it is desirable that the time period over which a miss is announced in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the third background being displayed and BGM3 being output be shorter than the time period over which a miss is announced in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the shortest change time for a jackpot to be announced in a search quest presentation that begins with the third background being displayed and BGM 3 being output is shorter than the shortest change time for a jackpot to be announced in a search quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM 1 being output. Furthermore, regardless of whether a jackpot is announced, it is desirable that the shortest change time for a search quest presentation that begins with the third background being displayed and BGM 3 being output is shorter than the shortest change time for a search quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM 1 being output. This makes it possible to realize a variety of presentation patterns over time, regardless of whether a jackpot is announced, and gradually increase the player's anticipation, which was not high at the start of the search quest presentation.

Furthermore, in the exploration quest presentation, up to three characters can be displayed simultaneously, but a jackpot may be confirmed when a predetermined combination of three characters is displayed simultaneously. For example, the predetermined combination may be three hunters 1601 or three villagers 1602.

Furthermore, in the exploration quest presentation, after the two characters who fought the rare animal and the helper character become the above-mentioned predetermined character combination and a jackpot is announced, a character change presentation may be executed in which these characters change into other characters. For example, in FIG. 21 (I), if the rare animal is defeated by three villagers 1602 holding weapons rather than three hunters 1601 holding weapons, a character change presentation may be executed in which all three villagers 1602 holding weapons simultaneously change into hunters 1601 holding weapons. However, because the player feels more excited when hunters 1601 are displayed rather than villagers 1602, it is preferable not to execute a presentation in which all three hunters 1601 holding weapons simultaneously change into three villagers 1602 holding weapons when a jackpot is announced and three hunters 1601 holding weapons are displayed.

Similarly, in Figure 22 (G2), if three unarmed villagers 1602, rather than three unarmed hunters 1601, defeat a rare animal, a character change effect may be performed in which all three unarmed villagers 1602 simultaneously change into unarmed hunters 1601. However, since the player feels more excited when hunters 1601 are displayed than when villagers 1602 are displayed, it is desirable not to perform an effect in which all of these characters simultaneously change into three unarmed villagers 1602 when three unarmed hunters 1601 are displayed and a jackpot is announced.

In order to give players a sense of exhilaration through the character change effects, it is desirable that the character change effects be executed only when a predetermined advantageous state (such as a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state) is achieved. In the character change effects, the presence or absence of weapons of the characters may change, for example, such that the three unarmed villagers 1602 change into weapon-wielding hunters 1601, or the three weapon-wielding villagers 1602 change into weaponless hunters 1601.

In addition, when the three villagers 1602 transform into three hunters 1601 during the character transformation effect, a special animation movie or the like can be displayed to give the player a sense of elation. Also, to further enhance the sense of elation given to the player when the character transformation effect appears, it is preferable that the rate at which the character transformation effect appears when a jackpot is announced during the search quest effect is lower than the rate at which the character transformation effect does not appear.

In addition, in the character change presentation, it is preferable to display different special effect movies and grant different benefits to the player when three weapon-wielding villagers 1602 change into three weapon-wielding hunters 1601 than when three weaponless villagers 1602 change into three weaponless hunters 1601. For example, in the character change presentation, a more luxurious special effect movie (for example, a longer display time for the effect movie, a larger number of characters displayed in the effect movie, or a louder sound output simultaneously with the effect movie) may be displayed or a more advantageous benefit (for example, a larger number of rounds in the jackpot game that starts immediately after) may be granted to the player when three weaponless villagers 1602 change into three weaponless hunters 1601 than when three weapon-wielding villagers 1602 change into three weaponless hunters 1601.

In Figures 21 (G) and 25 (F5), at the start of the endurance performance, the two characters attacked by the rare animal and the cut-in character are displayed simultaneously; however, to ensure that the player is aware of who the cut-in character is at the start of the endurance performance, it is also possible to first display only the cut-in character (without changing the background image from when the rare animal attacked), and then, as in Figures 21 (G) and 25 (F5), display the two characters attacked by the rare animal and the cut-in character.

In the exploration quest presentation that begins with the display of the third background and the output of BGM3, two unarmed villagers 1602 are attacked by a weak boss 1611, and the two unarmed villagers 1602 become invisible due to the fourth background in FIG. 26 (G5). The two unarmed villagers 1602 are then redisplayed in FIG. 26 (H5) holding weapons. However, in the exploration quest presentation that begins with the display of the third background and the output of BGM3, if two unarmed hunters 1601 discover a rare animal, it is desirable that the fourth background in FIG. 26 (G5) not be displayed, and that the two unarmed hunters 1601 in FIG. 26 (H5) not change into weaponized hunters 1601. This is because, when the two hunters 1601 encounter a rare animal, the likelihood of a jackpot is high and the player's expectations are rising, so the fourth background, which includes a display indicating that the jackpot has not been won, does not dampen the player's expectations.

Furthermore, in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, as in the examples of Figures 20 and 21, it is possible to have two unarmed hunters 1601 fight a rare animal and then the two hunters 1601 regain their weapons, or two unarmed villagers 1602 fight a rare animal and then the two hunters 1601 regain their weapons. However, since the likelihood of a jackpot is not high in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, it is desirable not to display the fourth background, which would further reduce the player's sense of anticipation, as shown in Figure 21, when there is a change in the presence or absence of weapons.

Figure 27 is another example of a search quest presentation. In the search quest presentation of Figure 27, a predetermined operation is prompted on the pressing operation unit 303 during a battle between a character and a rare beast, and when the predetermined operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303, a presentation is executed in which the character attacks the rare beast, or in which the character is attacked by the rare beast. Figure 27(E) is a presentation that transitions from Figure 20(D), and has the same presentation as Figure 20(E). It is possible to transition from Figure 27(E) to Figure 27(F6), Figure 27(F7), or Figure 27(F8).

In Figure 27 (F6), similar to Figure 27 (E), two unarmed hunters 1601, a strong boss 1610, a first background as a background image, and a hold display corresponding to the ongoing change are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and BGM3 is output from the speaker 354. Furthermore, in Figure 27 (F6), a first button image (an image consisting of an image of a button labeled "PUSH" and an image of an arrow) instructing the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed (a so-called single press) is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, and an instruction sound ("Press!") instructing the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed (i.e., indicating the instruction content of the first button image) is output from the speaker 354.

To make it easier for the player to recognize that an operation is being instructed on the pressing operation unit 303, the display priority of the first button image is higher than the display priority of other images such as characters and rare animals. The display of the first button image and the output of an instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the first button image may be performed when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a predetermined operation (for example, a long press as opposed to a simple press) is performed on the pressing operation unit 303).

In Figure 27 (F6), if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in accordance with the instructions indicated by the first button image, the first button image is erased and the screen transitions to Figure 27 (F). In Figure 27 (F), the same effect as in Figure 20 (F) is performed, and then the screen transitions to the endurance effect of Figure 21 (G) (i.e., an effect in which a character holding a weapon is displayed).

In Figure 27 (F6), if the instruction indicated by the first button image is not followed and the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed, the display transitions to Figure 27 (F7). Figure 27 (F7) shows a performance during a specific period when no performance images, such as images of characters and rare animals, are displayed. The first button image continues to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the instruction sound instructing the player to press the pressing operation unit 303 indicated by the first button image continues to be output from the speaker 354. However, to make it easier for the player to recognize the instruction to press the pressing operation unit 303, the images of the character and rare animal are erased from the performance display device 1600, and the output of the background music is stopped. In this way, during a specific period when no performance images, such as images of characters and rare animals, are displayed, the background music output is also stopped, thereby increasing the player's anticipation that the character will be able to defeat the rare animal by operating the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, in Figure 27 (F7), instead of stopping the BGM output, the volume of the BGM may be reduced (for example, below the volume at the start of the exploration quest presentation).

27(F7), the background image may be changed to a single color image of a predetermined color to make the first button image easier to recognize. Also, in FIG. 27(F7), all hold displays may be erased from the effect display device 1600. Also, in FIG. 27(F7), it is desirable that no effect sounds other than the instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the first button image are output from the speaker 354. Examples of effect sounds other than the instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the first button image include effect sounds related to the two characters, such as the voices of the two characters or rare animals, and sound effects in battles with the two characters or rare animals. Example effect sounds related to the two characters include effect sounds accompanying the actions of the two characters, effect sounds output when a character is determined in FIG. 20(B) and FIG. 20(C), and effect sounds output when the same two characters are selected in FIG. 20(C). Also, as described above, the transition from FIG. 27(E) to FIG. 27(F7) may be made without passing through FIG. 27(F6).

In Figure 27 (F7), if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in accordance with the instructions indicated by the first button image, the specific period ends and the screen transitions to Figure 27 (F). In other words, in this case, the character without a weapon is hidden, and the next time the character is displayed again, it will still be without a weapon.

In FIG. 27 (F7), if the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed in accordance with the instructions indicated by the first button image, the specific period ends and the display transitions to FIG. 27 (F8). Note that in FIG. 27 (F7), if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in accordance with the instructions indicated by the first button image, the specific period may end after the first button image is erased, or the first button image may be erased after the specific period ends.

In addition, in FIG. 27 (F7), if the instructions indicated by the first button image are not followed and the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed (even after a predetermined time has passed since the first button image was displayed), the specific period may end and the display may transition to FIG. 27 (F). Also, if the instructions indicated by the first button image are not followed and the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed (even after a predetermined time has passed since the first button image was first displayed), the player will not be interested in the effects of the character attacking rare animals or being attacked by rare animals, so the specific period may end after FIG. 27 (F7), and the display may transition to the endurance effect of FIG. 21 (G) without transitioning to FIG. 27 (F). In other words, in this case, the character without a weapon is hidden, and the next time the character reappears, it will be holding a weapon.

Furthermore, for example, the first button image may be displayed even during an endurance performance (a situation in which three characters are displayed) (either continuing from FIG. 27 (F7) or after the start of the endurance performance). In this case, for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has passed since the start of the endurance performance, the first button image is hidden, and when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has passed since the first button image was erased, the images of the three characters are also hidden. After the three characters are also erased, a predetermined movie is displayed on the performance display device 1600, but the predetermined movie is terminated, for example, when operation of a predetermined operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

It is desirable that no sound be output from speaker 354 while the specified movie is being displayed, in order to maintain the sense of tension imparted to the player by the endurance performance. The three characters may be hidden and the specified movie may be displayed, provided that a specified time (5 seconds) has passed since the endurance performance began. The time from when the three characters are displayed until they are hidden in the endurance performance is longer than the time until the first button image is erased. In the example above, the specified movie is displayed after the three characters are hidden, but the three characters may also be hidden when the specified movie is displayed.

Figure 27 (F8) shows a performance during a specific period when performance images such as images of characters and rare animals are not displayed, and a second button image (an image consisting of an image of a button labeled "long press" and an image of an arrow) instructing a long press of the pressing operation unit 303 (an operation different from a single press) is displayed in the upper left of the performance display device 1600 (a position different from the position (center) where the first button image is displayed).

In FIG. 27 (F8), to make it easier for the player to recognize the instruction to press and hold the pressing operation unit 303 indicated by the second button image, images of the character and rare animal are not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and background music is not output. Furthermore, unlike when the first button image is displayed, when the second button image is displayed, no instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image is output. In this way, by stopping the output of background music during a specific period when effect images such as images of characters and rare animals are not displayed, the player can increase their sense of anticipation that the character will be able to defeat the rare animal by pressing and holding the pressing operation unit 303. Furthermore, by not outputting an instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image, a sense of tension is created for the player, and the instruction effect using the second button image can be treated like a hidden effect. Note that in FIG. 27 (F8), rather than stopping the output of background music, the volume of the background music may be reduced (for example, below the volume at the start of the exploration quest effect).

Furthermore, the display size of the second button image is smaller than the display size of the first button image. Also, in FIG. 27 (F8), it is desirable that not only the background music and instruction sounds indicating the instructions of the second button image, but also other sound effects (for example, the voices of characters and rare animals, and sound effects in battles with characters and rare animals) are not output from speaker 354.

In Figure 27 (F8), if a predetermined time has passed since the second button image was displayed, or if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed and held down (for example, pressed for 3 seconds or more), the specific period ends and the display transitions to Figure 27 (F). In other words, in this case, the character without a weapon is hidden, and the next time the character is displayed again, it will still be without a weapon.

In addition, in Figure 27 (F8), if a predetermined time has passed since the second button image was displayed, or if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed and held (for example, pressed for 3 seconds or more), the specific period will end, and Figure 27 (F) may be omitted and the display may transition to the endurance presentation of Figure 21 (G). In other words, in this case, the character without a weapon will be hidden, and the next time the character reappears, it will be holding a weapon.

Incidentally, as shown in Figure 27 (F8), after the second button image is displayed during a specific period when the two characters and rare animal are not displayed, when the specific period ends and the two characters and rare animal are redisplayed, the first button image may be displayed in place of the second button image (or the second button image may be redisplayed and then erased). In this way, when the display changes from the second button image to the first button image, a specific effect image may always be displayed.

The second button image is smaller in display size than the first button image, is displayed in a corner of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and no sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image is output. Therefore, the second button image is less noticeable than the first button image. Therefore, the second button image may remain displayed even before the transition to FIG. 27 (F8) (for example, from the start of the change in which the exploration quest effect is executed or from the time the character encounters a rare animal, etc.).

For example, if the second button image remains displayed from the start of a change that executes a search quest presentation, a sound indicating the instruction of the second button image may be output at the start of the change or before the change starts (for example, a predetermined number of seconds before).

In FIG. 27 (F8), an instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image may be output, but it is desirable that the rate at which an effect in which an instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image is output is higher than the rate at which an effect in which an instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image is output in FIG. 27 (F8).

In addition, in Figure 27 (F8), if an operation other than a long press (for example, repeated taps) is performed on the pressing operation unit 303, an instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image may be additionally output to allow the player to recognize the operation content.

In FIG. 27 (F6), a second button image may be displayed instead of the first button image. In this case, BGM3 is output from speaker 354, but no instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image is output. The second button image may only be displayed in the exploration quest presentation that begins when the third background is displayed and BGM3 is output. The display priority of the second button image is higher than the display priority of other images such as characters and rare animals, and may be higher or lower than the display priority of the first button image.

In addition, to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, a sound exclusive to the specific period may be output from speaker 354 during the specific period in Figures 27 (F7) and 27 (F8), and at this time, a special effect image that is different from the first button image and the second button image and is only displayed during the specific period may also be displayed.

In addition, in Figures 27 (F6), 27 (F7), and 27 (F8), when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in accordance with the instructions on the first button image or second button image, the first button image or second button image may not be hidden until a predetermined time has passed since the operation (in other words, they may not be hidden at the time the operation is detected) so that the player can confirm what instructions were displayed.

For example, the pachinko machine 1 may have a movable body at a predetermined position. For example, when the two characters and rare animal become hidden, such as when transitioning from Figure 27 (F6) to Figure 27 (F7), the movable body may begin operation from a standby position (initial position), and move to a position where the two characters and rare animal remain hidden, overlapping the display area of the first button image. Also, for example, when the two characters and rare animal become hidden, such as when transitioning from Figure 27 (E) to Figure 27 (F8), the movable body may begin operation from a standby position, and move to a position where the two characters and rare animal remain hidden, overlapping the display area of the second button image. Additionally, the display size of the second button image is smaller than the display size of the first button image, and if the position of the movable body overlaps with the display position of the second button image, it will be difficult for the player to see the instructions of the second button image. Therefore, the operating position of the movable body may include a position that overlaps with the display area of the first button image, but may not include a position that overlaps with the display area of the second button image.

It is desirable that the standby position of the movable body does not overlap the display area of either the first button image or the second button image. For example, the movable body may overlap the display area of the first button image or the display area of the second button image when in its maximum operating position, or the movable body may not overlap the display area of the first button image or the display area of the second button image when in its maximum operating position, but may overlap the display area of the first button image or the second button image only while moving to its maximum operating position. There may also be a time when the movable body completely covers the first button image or the second button image, or at least a portion of the first button image or the second button image may be visible regardless of the position of the movable body.

For example, when two characters and the first button image are displayed as in Figure 27 (F6), the output state (e.g., the length of time for which it is output) of a predetermined sound effect (e.g., a sound effect accompanying the actions of the two characters) may be changed by operating a predetermined operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303). However, it is desirable that the output state of the instruction sounds indicating the instructions of the first button image and the second button image do not change (i.e., the output state does not change even if the predetermined operation unit is operated) so that the player can reliably recognize the instructions.

For example, as in Figure 27 (F6), when two characters and the first button image are displayed, the aforementioned character reselection can be performed, and the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when character reselection is performed than when character reselection is not performed. A character reselection effect may also be performed when two different characters and the first button image are displayed, and this reselection effect can transform the two different characters into two identical characters. On the other hand, it is desirable that the aforementioned character reselection not be performed when two characters and the first button image are displayed. Furthermore, the character reselection effect is more likely to be performed when two identical characters and the first button image are displayed, as in Figure 27 (F6), than when one hunter 1601, one villager 1602, and the first button image are displayed.

In addition, when the search quest presentation during a jackpot variation passes through a situation in which two characters and a first button image are displayed together, as in Figure 27 (F6), it is desirable that the jackpot be announced after the same two characters are displayed in that situation. On the other hand, when the search quest presentation during a jackpot variation passes through a situation in which two characters and a second button image are displayed together, it may be possible to execute both a presentation in which the same two characters are displayed in that situation and a jackpot is announced after the jackpot has been announced, and a presentation in which a jackpot is announced without the same two characters being displayed in that situation.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the shortest time that the two characters are displayed together when an effect is executed in which the first button image and two characters are displayed together, as shown in Figure 27 (F6), is longer than the shortest time that the two characters are displayed together when the second button image and two characters are displayed together.

In the exploration quest presentation, there are times when each character is displayed holding a weapon, and times when each character is displayed without a weapon. However, if the character is the same, the display of that character will be the same when holding a weapon and when not holding a weapon (i.e., the character is the common part of both).

Also, for example, when the same character is displayed in a display mode holding a weapon and in a display mode not holding a weapon, the common parts of the character may be displayed in exactly the same display mode, or they may be displayed in different display modes as long as the player can recognize that they are the same character (for example, the pose of the hunter 1601 part may be different, the clothes they are wearing may be different, and the movement mode may be different between the hunter 1601 holding a weapon and the hunter 1601 not holding a weapon).

[4. Daruma-san ga Koronda performance]
The Daruma-san ga Koronda effect will be explained below. The Daruma-san ga Koronda effect can be executed before the decorative symbols form a reach state, and can also be executed as a reach effect after the decorative symbols form a reach state. Hereinafter, the Daruma-san ga Koronda effect executed before the decorative symbols form a reach state will also be called the "Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance," and the Daruma-san ga Koronda effect as a reach effect will also be called the "Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach."

In the Daruma-san ga Koronda performance, the image displayed on the performance display device 1600 is an image seen from the perspective of the Oni. In other words, the Daruma-san ga Koronda performance is a performance in which the player simulates the experience of Daruma-san ga Koronda by imagining that they are the Oni.

In the Daruma-san ga Koronda performance, if all non-Oni characters move when the line "Daruma-san ga Koronda!" is not being output from speaker 354, the Oni wins (i.e., the player wins), and if the Oni is touched by any non-Oni character when the line is being output, the Oni loses (i.e., the player loses).

If the Oni wins in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, the game progresses to the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, and if the Oni loses, a loss is announced. Also, if the Oni wins in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, a jackpot is announced, and if the Oni loses, a loss is announced. Note that while it may be possible to announce a jackpot when the Oni wins in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, it is desirable that the rate at which a jackpot is announced when the Oni wins in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance is significantly lower than the rate at which the game progresses to the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach.

Figures 28 and 29 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a Daruma-san ga Koronda final battle reach. Figure 28(A) shows the state when a Daruma-san ga Koronda final battle reach has begun. In Figure 28(A), decorative symbols form a reach pattern, and a title image indicating that a Daruma-san ga Koronda final battle reach has begun is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that decorative symbols do not have to be displayed from the start of a Daruma-san ga Koronda final battle reach (from Figure 28(A)) until the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda final battle reach described below is displayed and the non-Oni characters are hidden (until Figure 28(F)).

In addition, in Figure 28 (A), a forest background (an image of five trees growing) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the background image. This forest background is a dedicated background image that can only be displayed during the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, and when the forest background is displayed, it is desirable that the probability of a jackpot be higher than when the sea background described below is displayed. In addition, during the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, the hold display is hidden until the transition to Figure 29 (E) described below is made to allow the player to focus on the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach effect.

In Figure 28 (B), the line "Daruma-san..." is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and while this line is being displayed and output, two non-oni characters 1604 (facing forward and in the same white display mode) displayed on the effect display device 1600 are moving (for example, moving forward). Also in Figure 28 (B), a forest background is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a background image. When two non-oni characters 1604 in the same display mode are selected, a predetermined effect may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be superimposed on the two non-oni characters 1604 in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.

In the example of Figure 28, the display of two non-oni characters 1604 (in the same display mode, white and facing forward) begins from Figure 28(B), but the two non-oni characters 1604 (in the same display mode, white and facing forward) may also be displayed from Figure 28(A), i.e., at the start of the Daruma-san ga Koronta Final Battle Reach.

If two non-Oni characters with different display modes are selected, the two non-Oni characters with different display modes may remain displayed, and Daruma-san ga Koronda may not be performed (i.e., the performance from Figure 28(C) onwards may not be executed), and the Daruma-san ga Koronda chance and the variation may end. In other words, the result of the lottery (a loss) is indicated by the display of two non-Oni characters with different display modes.

In Figure 28(C), the line "I fell!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and the movement of the two non-oni characters 1604 has stopped by the time the output of the line has finished. Because the two non-oni characters 1604 are moving forward, the display size of the two non-oni characters is larger in Figure 28(C) than in Figure 28(B). Also, in Figure 28(C), a forest background is displayed as the background image on the effect display device 1600.

In Figure 28 (D), the line "Daruma-san..." is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354. Also, in Figure 28 (D), the background and two non-oni characters 1604 are hidden on the effect display device 1600 (a single-color image (for example, solid black) may be displayed as the background image). In this way, by hiding the non-oni characters 1604, the player cannot tell how far the non-oni characters 1604 have advanced, creating a sense of tension. Note that in Figure 28 (D), the line "Daruma-san..." may also be hidden.

In addition, in FIG. 28(D), in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, the two non-Demon characters 1604 may be hidden by, for example, displaying a special image (for example, by covering the two non-Demon characters 1604 with a special image). Note that this special image may be a dedicated image that can only be displayed in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach.

In Figure 28 (D) (i.e., in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach where a forest background is displayed), the two non-Oni characters 1604 are hidden for a predetermined period of time, but this predetermined period of time may be longer or shorter than the predetermined period of time in which the two non-Oni characters are hidden in Figure 30 (C) described below (i.e., in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance where an ocean background is displayed, described below).

In Figure 28(E), the line "I fell!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and by the time the output of the line is finished, the two non-Oni characters 1604 have made the action of touching the Oni. In other words, the Oni has been notified that he has lost, and the decorative patterns have stopped in a losing combination. Note that only one of the non-Oni characters 1604 may make the action of touching the Oni. Because the two non-Oni characters 1604 are moving forward, the display size of the two non-Oni characters 1604 is larger in Figure 28(E) than in Figure 28(C). Also, in Figure 28(E), a forest background is displayed as the background image on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in Figure 28 (E), an effect may be executed that prompts a predetermined operation (e.g., pressing) on a predetermined operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303). In accordance with this effect, when the predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation unit during the operation valid period of the predetermined operation unit, the two non-demon characters 1604 are hidden (e.g., transitioning to the effect in Figure 28 (F)).

In Figure 28 (F), the background and two non-oni characters 1604 are hidden on the effect display device 1600 (although a single color image (for example, solid black) may be displayed as the background image). In this way, by hiding the background image and the two non-oni characters 1604, it is possible to calm the player's disappointment caused by the loss notification in Figure 28 (E).

Note that in Figure 28 (F) (i.e., when a loss is announced in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach where a forest background is displayed and the background and two non-Oni characters are hidden), a dedicated image may be displayed. This dedicated image is, for example, an image that is displayed before the background changes (from the forest background in Figure 28 (E) to the ocean background in Figure 30 (G) described below). Note that it is desirable that the time that the dedicated image is displayed (i.e., the time that the background and two non-Oni characters are hidden) be longer than the time that the background and two non-Oni characters are hidden in Figure 28 (D) and the time that the background and two non-Oni characters are hidden in Figure 30 (C) described below).

In addition, when the start condition is met (game ball B enters the first start port 2002 when the number of reserved memories for the first special random number has not reached its upper limit, or game ball B enters the second start port 2004 when the number of reserved memories for the second special random number has not reached its upper limit), a sound effect is generally output to indicate that the start condition has been met. However, in FIG. 28(F) (i.e., when the two non-oni characters 1604 are temporarily hidden after a loss is announced in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach), if the start condition is met, it is desirable not to output the sound effect that is output when the start condition is met in order to calm the player's disappointment. In this case, the player can recognize that the start condition has been met by visually checking the reserve display after it is redisplayed.

On the other hand, as in Figure 28(D) and Figure 30(C) described below, when the two non-Demon characters 1604 are temporarily hidden before it is announced whether the variation is a jackpot or a loss, it is desirable that the sound effect be output if the start condition is met. Note that even when the two non-Demon characters 1604 are temporarily hidden as in Figure 28(D) and Figure 30(C) described below, the sound effect that is output when the start condition is met may not be output if the start condition is met, in order to allow the player to concentrate on the Daruma-san ga Koronda effect.

In addition, in Figure 28 (E), when a jackpot is announced (i.e., when the two non-Demon characters 1604 act while the line "I fell!" is being output and an effect is executed in which the Oni wins), in order to maintain the player's sense of excitement, it is desirable that the effect in Figure 28 (F) (i.e., an effect in which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are not displayed) is not executed, and the effect proceeds with the two non-Demon characters 1604 displayed.

In Figure 29(G), the two non-oni characters 1604 are redisplayed on the effect display device 1600. The two non-oni characters 1604 have changed to a different state from the state displayed in Figure 28(E) (i.e., they have changed from an outstretched hand touching the Oni to a state with their hands lowered), and are stopped. By redisplaying the two white non-oni characters 1604, the same as in Figure 28(E), in a different display state (i.e., a state different from when the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda reach was announced), the player can be sure to recognize the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle reach, while also being sure to recognize that the effect is progressing. Note that the display size of the two non-oni characters 1604 displayed in Figure 29(G) is preferably larger than the display size of the two non-oni characters 1604 displayed in Figure 29(E) (the display size before they were temporarily hidden).

In addition, in Figure 29 (G), the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to an ocean background (image of waves), and a hold display is displayed. By displaying a background image (ocean background) different from the background image (forest background) previously displayed in Figure 28 (E) and displaying the hold display, the player can be sure that they have reached the end of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach. As will be described in detail later, this ocean background is the background image displayed during the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance. In Figure 29 (G), the change ends when a predetermined time has passed since the two non-oni characters 1604, the ocean background, and the hold display are redisplayed. In Figure 29 (G), the effect sound may be suppressed to calm the disappointment of a player who has been notified of a loss during the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach.

In FIG. 29 (G), the timing at which the hold display is redisplayed is the same as the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed, or within a predetermined time of the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed (for example, 0.5 seconds before or 0.5 seconds after the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed).

In Figure 28(E), the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach is announced when the line "Daruma-san ga Koronda!" is output for the second time, but in Figure 28(C), the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach may also be announced when the line "Daruma-san ga Koronda!" is output for the first time. That is, in Figure 28(C), two non-Oni characters 1604 may touch the Oni (indicating that the Oni has lost) while the line is being output, or one of the non-Oni characters 1604 may take action (indicating that the Oni has won) when the line output in Figure 28(C) has finished. In this case, the effects in Figures 28(D) and 28(E) are omitted (and the effect in Figure 28(F) may also be omitted).

Note that when the aforementioned dedicated image is displayed in Figure 28 (F), a dedicated background may be displayed in Figure 29 (G) instead of the ocean background. Note that when this dedicated background is displayed, it may continue to be displayed until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until a predetermined number of changes have been made since the dedicated background was displayed) in order to leave the player with the feeling of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, and after the predetermined condition is met, the ocean background may be displayed. Note that when a dedicated background is displayed, the non-oni characters displayed may also be dedicated non-oni characters. Displaying dedicated non-oni characters that correspond to the dedicated background makes it possible to provide a consistent presentation, making it easier for players who want to see limited presentations to continue playing.

In FIG. 29(G), an effect may be executed to prompt a player to perform a predetermined operation (e.g., a long press) on a predetermined operation unit (e.g., the pressing operation unit 303) simultaneously with the start of display of the dedicated background or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is desirable that this effect prompting a player to perform a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation unit be executed for a predetermined time, and not interrupted even if the predetermined operation on the predetermined operation unit is performed, in order to ensure that the player performs the predetermined operation.

Note that the examples in Figures 28 and 29 illustrate an example in which a loss is announced during the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, but instead of Figure 28(F), for example, a special announcement effect may be displayed indicating that the non-Oni character 1604 was actually moving while the line "I fell down!" is being output and before touching the Oni (i.e., an announcement that the Oni has won and a jackpot has been reached). In this case, in Figure 29(G), two non-Oni characters 1604 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, for example, along with a line indicating that they have lost to the Oni, and the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination.

Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance. Figure 30(A) shows the state in which the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance has started. The Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance starts, for example, at the same time as the start of the variation. In Figure 30(A), the decorative pattern does not form a reach pattern, and a title image indicating that the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in Figure 30 (A), an ocean background is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the background image. Because a jackpot is never announced during the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance event (or because the rate at which a jackpot is announced is extremely low), it is desirable that the ocean background is not a dedicated background image (i.e., a background image that can be displayed in other effects as well) in order to avoid creating excessive expectations in the player. Also, in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance event, a hold display is displayed in order to avoid creating excessive expectations in the player and to keep them aware of future fluctuations.

In addition, in Figure 30(A), a white non-oni character 1604 facing forward and a non-oni character 1605 facing left and hatched with diagonal lines are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In Figure 30(A), the two non-oni characters who will participate in Daruma-san ni koronda have not yet been determined, and the combination of the two non-oni characters displayed in Figure 30(A) may change over time. In addition, in Figure 30(A) (i.e., until the two non-oni characters who will participate in Daruma-san ni koronda have been determined), the two non-oni characters may be displayed in a transparent state (for example, a transparency selected from a range of transparency greater than 0% and less than 100%) to allow the player to recognize that the two displayed non-oni characters are not characters determined to participate in Daruma-san ni koronda. If the two non-oni characters are in a transparent state, the ocean background displayed behind the two non-oni characters 1604 becomes visible.

In Figure 30 (B), two non-oni characters 1604 who will participate in Daruma-san ga Koronda have been determined. The combination of two non-oni characters who will participate in Daruma-san ga Koronda is determined from two non-oni characters 1604, two non-oni characters 1605, or one non-oni character 1604 and one non-oni character 1605. Also, in Figure 30 (B), an ocean background is displayed as a background image on the performance display device 1600, and a hold display is also displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In Figure 30(C), the line "Daruma-san..." is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and the two non-oni characters 1604 are hidden. Also in Figure 30(C), an ocean background is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a background image, and a hold display is also displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that also in Figure 30(C), the two non-oni characters 1604 may be displayed in a transparent state (for example, a transparency selected from transparency rates greater than 0% and less than 100%). If the two non-oni characters 1604 are in a transparent state, the ocean background displayed behind the two non-oni characters 1604 becomes visible.

In FIG. 30(C), in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, the two non-Demon characters 1604 may be hidden (for example, by covering the two non-Demon characters 1604 with the specific image) by displaying, for example, a specific image (an image indicating that the two moving non-Demon characters 1604 will be displayed again). Note that this specific image may also be an image that can be displayed even outside of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance event.

Following Figure 30(C), the display transitions to Figure 30(D) or Figure 30(F). In Figure 30(D), the line "I fell!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and by the time the output of the line has finished, the two non-Oni characters 1604 have made the action of touching the Oni. In other words, the Oni has been notified that they have lost. Note that only one of the non-Oni characters 1604 may make the action of touching the Oni. Because the two non-Oni characters 1604 are moving forward, the display size of the two non-Oni characters 1604 is larger in Figure 30(D) than in Figure 30(B). Also, in Figure 30(D), an ocean background is displayed as a background image on the effect display device 1600, and a hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In FIG. 30 (D), the timing at which the pending display is redisplayed is the same as the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed, or within a predetermined time of the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed (for example, 0.5 seconds before or 0.5 seconds after the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed).

In Figure 30(E), the two non-Oni characters 1604 are stopped in the same manner as they were displayed in Figure 30(D) (i.e., with their hands outstretched and touching the Oni). By displaying the two non-Oni characters 1604 in the same display manner as in Figure 30(D) (i.e., the same manner as when the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance is announced), the player can be sure to recognize the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance. Note that in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, a jackpot is never announced (or the rate at which a jackpot is announced is extremely low), and therefore the player's disappointment is small even if a loss is announced. Therefore, after the presentation of Figure 30(D), the presentation of Figure 30(E) is executed without inserting the presentation of Figure 28(F) to reduce the player's disappointment.

Following Figure 30(C), in Figure 30(F), the line "I fell!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and while the line is being output, the two non-Oni characters do not touch the Oni, and after the line is output, the two non-Oni characters 1604 move. In other words, the Oni has won, which is indicated. Note that only one of the non-Oni characters 1604 may have moved. Because the two non-Oni characters 1604 are moving forward, the display size of the two non-Oni characters 1604 is larger in Figure 30(F) than in Figure 30(B). Also, in Figure 30(F), an ocean background is displayed as a background image on the effect display device 1600, and a hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

When the Oni wins during the Daruma-san ga Koronda chance as shown in Figure 30(F), the game progresses to the Daruma-san ga Koronda final battle reach of Figures 28 and 29 (i.e., transitions to Figure 28(A)). Note that in Figures 30(D) and 30(F), the non-oni character that is redisplayed may have changed to a non-oni character different from the non-oni character 1604 displayed in Figure 30(B) (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot may differ depending on the non-oni character selected, and the non-oni character may change to one with a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the non-oni character in Figure 30(B)).

In addition, in both the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach (a Daruma-san ga Koronda presentation in which a forest background is displayed) and the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance (a Daruma-san ga Koronda presentation in which only an ocean background is displayed), if different non-oni characters are selected as the two non-oni characters, a jackpot may not be announced (in other words, two different non-oni characters may only be selected when a miss is announced).

In the above example, two non-Oni characters are displayed during the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance and Daruma-san ga Final Battle Reach. However, three or more non-Oni characters may be displayed. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 28(F) of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, a character with a different display mode from the two non-Oni characters 1604 is additionally displayed as a third non-Oni character, and the third non-Oni character also makes an action of touching the Oni. In FIG. 28(F), the third non-Oni character is also hidden like the two non-Oni characters 1604, and in FIG. 29(G), the third non-Oni character is redisplayed like the two non-Oni characters 1604. In FIG. 29(G), after the three non-Oni characters are redisplayed, an effect may be executed in which the third non-Oni character changes into a non-Oni character 1604 with the same display mode as the two non-Oni characters 1604.

Also, for example, in Figure 30(D) of Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, a character with a different display style from the two non-Oni characters 1604 is added and displayed as a third non-Oni character, and this third non-Oni character also makes an action of touching the Oni. In Figure 30(E), this third non-Oni character remains displayed in the same way as the two non-Oni characters 1604.

In the above example, in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, one of two patterns is selected: a loss is announced, or the game develops into the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach. However, for example, if a special background (hereinafter referred to as a desert background) is displayed instead of the ocean background in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, the game may always develop into the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach. In other words, the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance has a higher chance of winning when a desert background is displayed than when an ocean background is displayed, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation. In addition, in Figure 29 (G), after a loss is announced in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach that developed from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance in which a desert background is displayed, the desert background is displayed again instead of the ocean background.

In the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance game shown in Figure 30(C), which starts with a desert background displayed, the two non-Oni characters 1604 are hidden for a predetermined period of time, but this predetermined period of time is preferably longer than the period of time during which the two non-Oni characters 1604 are hidden in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance game shown in Figure 30(C), which starts with an ocean background displayed. As mentioned above, the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance game that starts with a special background displayed will always develop into the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, so by hiding the two non-Oni characters 1604 for a longer period of time, it is possible to further heighten the player's sense of anticipation and tension.

As mentioned above, in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach where a forest background is displayed, when a loss is announced and the background and two non-Oni characters 1604 are hidden (presentation in Figure 28 (F)), a dedicated image may be displayed; however, in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, when the two non-Oni characters 1604 are hidden, the dedicated image may not be displayed, whether the background is an ocean or a desert.

As mentioned above, it is desirable that no sound effects be output in Figure 29(G) in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, which developed from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance game where an ocean background is displayed (a state in which a loss is announced, the forest background disappears, and then the ocean background reappears). On the other hand, it is desirable that sound effects be output in Figure 29(G) in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, which developed from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance game where a desert background is displayed (a state in which a loss is announced, the forest background disappears, and then the desert background reappears). In the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, which developed from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance game where a desert background is displayed, the desert background reappears even after a loss is announced, which, unlike in the case of the ocean background, allows the player to recognize that they are still on the desert background, meaning that the probability of a jackpot is still high. This creates a sense of anticipation for the next play, and by being able to output sound effects, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation and tension for a jackpot through both their eyes and ears.

In the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, which develops from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance where a desert background is displayed, as shown in Figure 29 (G) (where a loss is announced, the forest background disappears, and then the desert background reappears), sound effects may not be output. This can calm the player's disappointment when a loss is announced despite the development from the desert background, which has a high probability of winning.

As mentioned above, in Figure 28 (F) in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach that developed from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance in which an ocean background is displayed (when a loss is announced and the forest background and two non-Oni characters are hidden), a dedicated image may be displayed. On the other hand, in Figure 28 (F) in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach that developed from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance in which a desert background is displayed (when a loss is announced and the forest background and two non-Oni characters are hidden), the dedicated image may or may not be displayed.

In the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance and Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, decorative symbols are displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, during the special symbol variation that executes the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance and Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, all decorative symbols are constantly varying (i.e., all decorative symbols are invisible), and all decorative symbols may be stopped (i.e., all decorative symbols are visible) when the special symbol variation stops. This prevents the player from realizing that a reach is in progress even when looking at the decorative symbols, but allows the player to recognize that a reach is in progress when the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach is in progress, allowing the player to focus their attention on the Daruma-san ga Koronda effect rather than the decorative symbols. Furthermore, even if an effect with a high miss rate is executed during the Daruma-san ga Koronda effect, because all decorative symbols continue to vary until the special symbol variation ends, a decrease in the player's sense of anticipation can be prevented until all decorative symbols have stopped.

In Figure 30(C) for the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance game, the two non-Oni characters 1604 are hidden, but when an ocean background is displayed, the player can recognize that the likelihood of a jackpot is low, and there is no need to create a sense of tension by not making the player aware of how far the non-Oni characters 1604 have progressed, so the two non-Oni characters 1604 may not be hidden. On the other hand, in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance game, where a desert background is displayed, the player can recognize from the desert background that the game is certain to develop into the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, so it is desirable to always hide the two non-Oni characters 1604 in Figure 30(C) in order to create a sense of tension by not making the player aware of how far the non-Oni characters 1604 have progressed. This allows the game to proceed smoothly when the two non-Oni characters 1604 are not hidden, and creates a sense of tension for the player when they are hidden.

[5. Ekiden Production]
In this chapter, the relay race presentation will be explained. The pachinko machine 1 in this chapter has a counter function that counts the total number of game balls B paid out (hereinafter, this counter function will also be referred to as the relay race counter). Specifically, for example, the relay race counter counts the total number of game balls B paid out since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on. In other words, the count value of the relay race counter is reset (i.e., to zero) when, for example, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, or when the power is turned off and then on again.

In addition, instead of counting the total number of game balls B paid out since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on, the relay counter may count the difference in the number of game balls B since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on (total number of game balls B paid out - total number of game balls B fired) (note that, for example, the total number of game balls B fired can also be determined by the total number of game balls B that entered the various winning ports (excluding the out port) - total number of game balls B detected by the out port sensor 3053), or it may count MY since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on (the value with the smallest difference in the number of game balls since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on is used as the base point (count value is zero), and the difference between this and the value with the largest difference in the number of game balls).

The count value of the ekiden counter is stored, for example, in the RAM of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, for example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may calculate and update the count value of the ekiden counter based on the number of game balls B detected by sensors installed at the various winning and outlet ports, or may calculate and update the count value of the ekiden counter based on the number of game balls B paid out indicated by a command received from the payout control board 63 and the number of game balls B detected by a sensor installed at the outlet port. The main control MPU sends a command indicating the counter value of the ekiden counter to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 executes the ekiden performance based on the count value of the ekiden counter indicated by the received command.

In a relay race presentation, the presentation display device 1600 displays a display of a runner heading towards their destination according to the count value of the relay race counter. For example, in a relay race presentation, a meter is displayed, and the runner is shown along the meter. For example, a relay race consists of sections 1 to 10, and each time the count value of the relay race counter increases by 1000, the relay race section progresses.

Specifically, for example, when the count value of the relay counter is between 0 and 1000, an effect of a runner running in the first leg of the relay race is displayed, and when the count value of the relay counter is between 1001 and 2000, an effect of a runner running in the second leg is displayed. When the relay counter value reaches 10001, the color of the meter changes and a similar relay race effect is repeated. In other words, when the count value of the relay counter is between 10001 and 11000, an effect of a runner running in the first leg of the relay race (although the meter color is different) is displayed. In this way, the color of the meter changes every time the relay counter value increases by 10000. The relay race effect can be executed simultaneously with other effects (such as variable effect, non-variable effect, and effect during jackpot play).

Figure 31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a relay race presentation. Figure 31(A) shows the state when the relay race presentation has started. In Figure 31(A), a display is displayed of a first section runner 1621 wearing a sash 1632 running on a meter 1631. As the count value of the relay race counter increases, the first section runner 1621 moves to the left of the meter 1631, and when the count value reaches 2001, the sash 1632 is passed to the second section runner, and the display on the meter 1631 changes to the display corresponding to the second section.

If the count value of the ekiden counter becomes negative, the runner 1621 of the first section may be positioned to the far right of the meter 1631, or the ekiden performance may not be displayed (i.e., the runner, meter 1631, and sash 1632 may not be displayed). When the ekiden counter counts the MY described above, the base point (zero) is the value with the smallest difference in balls, so the ekiden counter value will never become negative.

Figure 31 (B) shows the state in which the relay station performance included in the relay station performance has begun. The relay station performance begins when the count value of the relay station counter reaches a value that is a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the next section (for example, 100 points less). In Figure 31 (B), the count value of the relay station counter has reached 3900, and the relay station performance has begun, indicating whether or not the sash 1632 will be passed from the runner 1624 of the fourth section to the runner 1625 of the fifth section.

In Figure 31 (B), the runner 1624 in the fourth section is about to remove the sash 1632 and hand it to the runner 1625 in the fifth section. In Figure 31 (B), the valid operation period (e.g., 10 seconds) for the pressing operation unit 303 has begun, and a button image 1633 prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303 and a gauge 1634 indicating the remaining time in the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed.

In addition, during relay station performances, a display showing the remaining count value of the relay counter until it reaches the count value corresponding to the next section (for example, the remaining count value itself or an approximate remaining count value, etc.) may be displayed as a premonition. This allows the player to recognize the remaining count value.

If a precursory display is displayed while another effect is being executed simultaneously with the Ekiden effect, the lamp illumination effect of the other effect being executed simultaneously with the Ekiden effect will be stopped and the lamps will illuminate in a pattern corresponding to the precursory display, but the display on the effect display device 1600 for that other effect will not be stopped. However, the illumination effect associated with the precursory display may be performed using only lamps installed in a specified area (for example, the door frame or main body frame). In this case, the illumination effect using lamps installed in an area other than the specified area (for example, the game board 5) executed in that other effect may be continued or stopped.

A sound may also be output in conjunction with the premonition display (a sound indicating the remaining count value of the ekiden counter until it reaches the count value corresponding to the next section). If a premonition display is displayed while another performance is being performed simultaneously with the ekiden performance, it is desirable that the sound associated with the premonition display be output at a louder volume than the sound associated with the other performance being performed simultaneously with the ekiden performance (the volume of the other performance may be reduced or set to zero (cancelled), or the volume of the other performance may remain the same and the sound associated with the premonition display may be output at a louder volume).

Furthermore, when another effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the premonition display, if the display areas of the premonition display and the other effect overlap, the display priority of the premonition display is higher than the display priority of the other effect. This allows the player's attention to be drawn to the premonition display without interrupting the progress of the other effect, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

The warning display may be erased when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display, when the value of the ekiden counter falls below the count value corresponding to the next section by a predetermined number (e.g., 200), or when the value of the ekiden counter reaches the count value corresponding to the next section, as described below.

Figure 31(C) shows the state in Figure 31(B) where the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated during the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, or where the valid operation period has ended without the pressing operation unit 303 being operated. Also, in Figure 31(C), the count value of the relay counter has not yet reached the value (4001) corresponding to the runner 1625 of the fifth section. In Figure 31(C), a cut-in 1635 is displayed as a post-operation effect, indicating the likelihood that the count value of the relay counter will reach the value corresponding to the runner 1625 of the fifth section.

For example, when the relay station effect starts, the display mode of the cut-in 1635 is selected from multiple display modes based on whether there is a jackpot variation in either the active variation or the pending variation.

For example, when the relay station effect starts, if there is a jackpot fluctuation in either the active or pending fluctuation, or if a jackpot game is in progress, a cut-in 1635 with a display mode suggesting a breakthrough (for example, a cut-in 1635 of a predetermined color (e.g., green) displaying the message "We might break through!" as shown in FIG. 31(C)) is selected with a high probability, and a cut-in 1635 with a display mode suggesting no breakthrough (a cut-in 1635 of a predetermined color (e.g., white) displaying the message "We might not be able to break through...") is selected with a low probability. On the other hand, when the relay station effect starts, if there is no jackpot fluctuation in either the active or pending fluctuation, or if a jackpot game is not in progress, a cut-in 1635 with a display mode suggesting a breakthrough is selected with a low probability, and a cut-in 1635 with a display mode suggesting no breakthrough is selected with a high probability. The relay station effect can suggest to the player whether or not they will receive the bonus of being paid out game ball B, thereby increasing their interest.

In Figure 31(D), the count value of the ekiden counter reaches the value (4001) corresponding to the fifth section, and the section breakthrough effect is performed. In Figure 31(D), the fourth section runner 1624 is erased, and the fifth section runner 1625 is wearing the sash 1632. Also in Figure 31(D), a message is displayed indicating that the ekiden counter count value has reached the value (4001) corresponding to the fifth section ("Breakthrough!! Start of fifth section!!"). After this, the relay station effect ends, the meter 1631 changes to one corresponding to the fifth section runner 1625 (meter 1631 moving from fifth section to sixth section), and the fifth section runner 1625 moves to a position on the changed meter 1631 corresponding to the count value of the ekiden counter.

If the section breakthrough effect starts while another effect is being executed, the lamp illumination effect for that other effect may be stopped and the lamps may illuminate in a pattern corresponding to the section breakthrough effect. The illumination effect associated with the section breakthrough effect may be performed using only lamps installed in a specified area (for example, the door frame or main body frame). In this case, the illumination effect using lamps installed in an area (for example, the game board 5) different from the specified area executed in the other effect may be continued or stopped.

In addition, a sound associated with the section breakthrough effect (a sound indicating that the count value of the relay counter has reached the count value corresponding to the next section) may be output. If the section breakthrough effect is executed while another effect is being executed, it is desirable that the sound associated with the section breakthrough effect be output at a louder volume than the sound associated with the other effect being executed simultaneously with the relay effect (the volume of the other effect may be reduced or set to zero (cancelled), or the volume of the other effect may remain the same and the sound associated with the section breakthrough effect may be output at a louder volume).

The cut-in 1635 in Figure 31(C) may be erased, for example, after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since its display. The cut-in 1635 in Figure 31(C) may also remain displayed, for example, until the transition to Figure 31(D) occurs (i.e., until the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section). However, even in this case, if the count value of the relay counter falls below a predetermined number (e.g., 100) below the value at which the relay station effect is executed (3900 in the example of Figure 31(B)), it is desirable to erase the cut-in 1635 in order to avoid giving the player too much hope.

The relay effect may be constantly running, such as during fluctuations (when a reach effect is being executed and when a reach effect is not being executed), during non-fluctuating times, during jackpot play, and during non-jackpot play. By constantly running the relay effect, the player can always recognize the approximate value of the relay counter and can estimate the number of balls to be paid from the display on the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, for example, the effect of Figure 31(A) may be omitted, and only the effects of Figures 31(B) to 31(D) may be executed. In other words, the relay effect may begin (from the relay station effect) when the relay counter value reaches a value that is a predetermined number less than the value required to reach the next section (3900 in the example of Figure 31(B)), and may end once the section breakthrough effect has ended. In this case, if cut-in 1635 is erased, the relay effect may also end at the same time. By executing the relay effect from the relay station effect in this way, the relay station effect and cut-in 1635 also function as a preview effect that indicates the start of the section breakthrough effect, giving the player a sense of anticipation that the relay counter value will reach a predetermined value. Furthermore, the player will only be able to know the relay counter value when it is about to reach a round number of balls, and will be able to concentrate on effects other than the relay station effect outside of that timing.

For example, if a relay station effect starts during a jackpot game, or if a large number of game balls B enter the various winning slots after the relay station effect starts, the value of the relay counter may reach the value corresponding to the next section (4001 in the example of FIG. 31(B)) during the valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 in FIG. 31(B) (i.e., before cut-in 1635 is displayed).

In Figure 31 (B), either the first valid operation period or the second valid operation period is selected as the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303. If the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the first valid operation period, the first valid operation period is forcibly ended (even if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated). Even if the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the second valid operation period, the second valid operation period does not end and continues. Furthermore, in the post-operation performance based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 being performed during the second valid period, it is preferable to have a special cut-in (for example, a rainbow pattern) that does not appear during the first valid period appear.

Whether the first valid operation period or the second valid operation period occurs is determined, for example, according to a predetermined ratio, but because the zone breakthrough effect is more important than the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, it is desirable that the first valid operation period occur more frequently than the second valid operation period.

For example, the second valid operation period may be set to occur only during a jackpot game. If the second valid operation period were to occur only during a jackpot game, the player would be able to notice that the currently occurring valid operation period is the second valid operation period by, for example, the opening of the large prize winning opening 2005, and since the second valid operation period is not interrupted even when the value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section, the cut-in display would make it easier for such a player to recognize how much payout remains.

Furthermore, if the second valid operation period is configured to occur only during a jackpot game, not only will the frequency with which the second valid operation period occurs decrease, but the player will be able to sense a sense of rarity in the special cut-in that can only be displayed when the second valid operation period occurs. Furthermore, because the second valid operation period is not interrupted even when the value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section, the player will be able to see the special cut-in described above more easily, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Note that when the valid operation period in Figure 31 (B) occurs (for example, at the start of the relay station performance), it has already been determined whether the valid operation period will end when the relay counter value reaches the value corresponding to the next section during the valid operation period (i.e., whether the first valid operation period or the second valid operation period is occurring).

By creating a first valid operation period and a second valid operation period, when the relay counter value is reached during a valid operation period, the valid operation period may suddenly end and a section breakthrough effect may appear, giving the player a sense of surprise, or the valid operation period may continue, allowing the player to enjoy operating the pressing operation unit 303, thereby catering to a variety of player preferences.

When the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the first valid operation period, the first valid operation period ends, and the effect of FIG. 31(B) transitions to the effect of FIG. 31(D) (without going through the effect of FIG. 31(C), i.e., without displaying cut-in 1635 as a post-operation effect). In other words, in this case, the operation effect of press operation unit 303 ends. However, if the value of the relay counter does not reach a value corresponding to the next section during the first valid operation period, then cut-in 1635 is displayed as a post-operation effect, as described above.

On the other hand, even if the value of the ekiden counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section during the second valid operation period, the second valid operation period continues (i.e., in this case, the operation effect of the press operation unit 303 continues), and if the press operation unit 303 is operated during the second valid operation period, or if the second valid operation period ends without the press operation unit 303 being operated during the second valid operation period, a cut-in 1635 is displayed as the post-operation effect in FIG. 31(C), and after a predetermined time has passed, for example, the display transitions to FIG. 31(D). In other words, when the second valid operation period begins, cut-in 1635 is displayed as the post-operation effect regardless of whether the press operation unit 303 is operated or the value of the ekiden counter.

In addition, even if the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the second operation valid period, the second operation valid period continues, but the section breakthrough effect of Figure 31 (D) is executed first when the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, and if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the second operation valid period, or if the second operation valid period ends without the pressing operation unit 303 being operated during the second operation valid period, a cut-in 1635 is displayed as a post-operation effect, and the cut-in 1635 may be erased, for example, after a predetermined time has passed. At this time, if the display of cut-in 1635 begins while the section breakthrough effect of Figure 31 (D) is being displayed, it is possible for the section breakthrough effect and cut-in 1635 to be displayed simultaneously, but because the section breakthrough effect is an effect that presents more important information to the player, it is desirable that the display priority of the section breakthrough effect be higher than the display priority of cut-in 1635 in a display area where the section breakthrough effect and cut-in 1635 overlap (in other words, it is desirable that the section breakthrough effect be displayed so that at least a portion of the operation effect and cut-in during the second operation valid period are difficult to see).

Note that the display mode of the display may differ, for example, if, during the first operation valid period, the value of the ekiden counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the display indicating that the count value of the ekiden counter in FIG. 31(D) has reached a value corresponding to section 5 (4001) ("Breakthrough!! Start of section 5!!" in FIG. 31(D)) is displayed in a first mode, and if, during the second operation valid period, the value of the ekiden counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the display mode of the display may be different, for example, if the value of the ekiden counter during the second operation valid period reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the display mode of the display in FIG. 31(D) may be displayed in the second mode and then in the first mode. Furthermore, since the display of the first mode is displayed after the display of the second mode, the display of the second mode is a warning display announcing the start of the fifth section, such as "Breakthrough!! Section 5 is about to start! Wait a moment!", and the display of the first mode may be a display indicating that Section 5 has already started, such as "Breakthrough!! Section 5 starts!!" in Figure 31 (D).

When the display is displayed in the first mode, it is advisable to stop the display of other effects that are being executed simultaneously with the relay performance in order to draw the player's attention to the display. However, when the display is displayed in the second mode, it is not necessary to stop the display of other effects, even though they have a higher display priority than the display of the other effects.

Note that, during the first valid operation period, when the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 detects a press, the first valid operation period may always end and the cut-in 1635 may be displayed, or the first valid operation period may not necessarily end (i.e., the cut-in 1635 may not be displayed). During the first valid operation period, which does not necessarily end when the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 detects a press, the first valid operation period may end and the cut-in 1635 may be displayed at a predetermined rate, for example, when the pressure detection sensor 381 detects a press. As a result, even if the pressure operation unit 303 is operated during the first valid operation period, the cut-in 1635 may not necessarily be displayed, allowing the player to operate the pressure operation unit 303 with a sense of tension. However, when the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 detects a pressure during the first valid operation period, even if the first valid operation period has not ended, it is desirable to execute an in-operation effect indicating that the pressure has been detected, so as to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the pressure operation unit 303 is malfunctioning.

Regarding the second valid operation period, when the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 detects a press, the second valid operation period may always end and the cut-in 1635 may be displayed, or the second valid operation period may not necessarily end (i.e., the cut-in 1635 may not be displayed), or the second valid operation period may always end and the cut-in 1635 may be displayed. For example, if the second valid operation period is configured to occur only during a jackpot game, and the second valid operation period is configured to always end and the cut-in 1635 is displayed when the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 detects a press during the second valid operation period, the frequency with which cut-ins are displayed as post-operation effects (particularly, special cut-ins can be displayed when the second valid operation period occurs) increases, and the synergistic effect with the effects during a jackpot game can give the player a stronger sense of excitement.

When the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 detects a pressure, the presentation when the second valid operation period ends and the cut-in 1635 is displayed, and the presentation when the second valid operation period does not necessarily end (i.e., the cut-in 1635 is not displayed), are the same as those for the first valid operation period.

In addition, while the example in FIG. 31(B) prompts the player to press the pressing operation unit 303 (a so-called single press), one operation mode may be selected from multiple operation modes (e.g., single press, rapid press, and long press) when the first valid operation period is occurring, and the player may be prompted to perform the selected operation mode. However, when the second valid operation period is occurring, it is desirable that some of the multiple operation modes (e.g., rapid press and long press) are not selected (or the rate at which some of the operation modes are selected is lower than when the first valid operation period is occurring). For example, because operation modes such as rapid presses and long presses take time, the counter value of the relay counter is more likely to reach the value corresponding to the next section while the player is performing rapid presses or long presses during the first valid operation period (i.e., the first valid operation period ends more frequently before the operation ends), increasing the frequency with which the player is surprised.

The lengths of the first valid operation period and the second valid operation period may be the same, or the second valid operation period may be longer or shorter than the first valid operation period. Furthermore, the lengths of the first valid operation period and/or the second valid operation period may each be selectable from a plurality of lengths according to a predetermined distribution. In this case, the expected value (or average) of the length of the first valid operation period may be the same as the expected value (or average) of the length of the second valid operation period, or the expected value (or average) of the length of the second valid operation period may be greater or smaller than the expected value (or average) of the length of the first valid operation period. Furthermore, when the lengths of the first valid operation period and/or the second valid operation period are each selectable from a plurality of lengths, the number of options for the length of the first valid operation period may be greater than the number of options for the length of the second valid operation period.

Furthermore, during the first valid operation period and the second valid operation period, the length of the period when a predetermined operation mode (e.g., rapid tapping and long press) from among the above-mentioned multiple operation modes is prompted is desirably longer than the length of the period when an operation mode different from the predetermined total mode (e.g., single press) is prompted. Therefore, as described above, for example, if one operation mode from single press, rapid tapping, and long press is selected when the first valid operation period occurs, and rapid tapping and long press are not selected when the second valid operation period occurs, the expected value (or average) of the length of the first valid operation period will be greater than the expected value (or average) of the length of the second valid operation period.

In this way, by varying the length and expected value of the first and second valid operation periods, or by varying the number of period options, the player can be made to feel uneasy about the length of the valid period, and by observing the length of the valid period, the player can enjoy guessing whether the first or second valid operation period has occurred. For example, if the first valid operation period is selected from 3, 5, or 10 seconds, and the second valid operation period is only 5 seconds, then if the length of the valid operation period measured by the player is 3 seconds, it is determined that the first valid operation period has occurred.

The valid operation period for the press operation unit 303 may start simultaneously with the start of the relay station performance, or may start a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the relay station performance starts. If the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303 starts a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the relay station performance starts, the count value of the relay counter may reach the count value corresponding to the next section between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303.

If the count value of the relay counter reaches a count value corresponding to the next section between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the first valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 31(D) is executed without initiating the first valid operation period (i.e., without displaying button image 1633 and gauge 1634, and without performing the performance of FIG. 31(C)). On the other hand, if the count value of the relay counter reaches a count value corresponding to the next section between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the second valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, the second valid operation period is initiated, and the display of button image 1633 and gauge 1634, the performance of FIG. 31(C), and the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 31(D) are executed.

In addition, if the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303 begins a predetermined time after the start of the relay station performance, a button precursor display such as a predetermined effect may be displayed at a predetermined rate between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303. For example, if the predetermined effect is displayed between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303, a button image 1633 is displayed at the center of the effect after the effect starts to be displayed (and before the start of the valid operation period). Note that, when the second valid operation period is selected, it is desirable that the rate at which the button precursor display is displayed between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the second valid operation period of the press operation unit 303 is higher than the rate at which the button precursor display is displayed between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the first valid operation period of the press operation unit 303 when the first valid operation period is selected.

When the first valid operation period occurs, two presentation patterns may be executed in FIG. 31(B), one in which the button image 1633 and gauge 1634 are displayed and the other in which they are not displayed. However, when the second valid operation period occurs, it is desirable to execute only the presentation pattern in FIG. 31(B) in which the button image 1633 and gauge 1634 are displayed. If the first valid operation period ends frequently due to the count value of the relay counter when the player thinks that the valid operation period has not yet ended and tries to operate the pressing operation unit 303, this will increase the number of times the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, when the first valid operation period occurs, it is advisable to provide a presentation pattern in which the button image 1633 and gauge 1634 are not displayed.

Furthermore, for example, when the second operation valid period occurs, a bonus may be awarded at a predetermined rate. Specifically, for example, a win resulting in approximately 200 balls may be awarded as the bonus. In other words, when the bonus is awarded, the count value of the relay counter will almost certainly increase to the count value (4001) corresponding to Section 5. In this case, a display indicating that a bonus will be awarded may be displayed at a predetermined rate as a post-operation effect in FIG. 31 (C). However, if the count value of the relay counter reaches the count value (4001) corresponding to Section 5 during the second operation valid period (or reaches a value close to the count value corresponding to Section 5 (e.g., 3990)), it is highly likely that the section will be broken even without the bonus being awarded. Therefore, the display indicating that a bonus will be awarded may not be displayed and the awarding of the bonus may be canceled, or a display indicating that a bonus will be awarded may be displayed but the awarding of the bonus may be canceled.

Note that, for example, the condition for starting the relay station effect in which the second valid operation period is selected may further include game ball B passing through a specified area (e.g., gate unit 2003). For example, in FIG. 31, if the count value of the relay counter reaches 3900 but game ball B has not passed through the specified area, the relay station effect in which the second valid operation period occurs does not start, but when game ball B subsequently passes through the specified area and a specified time has passed, the relay station effect starts and the second valid operation period occurs.

At this time, if the count value of the relay counter reaches 4001 but gaming ball B has not passed through the specified area, the display ("Breakthrough!! Start of Section 5!!") indicating that the count value of the relay counter in FIG. 31(D) above has reached the value (4001) corresponding to Section 5 is displayed in the second mode. After that, when gaming ball B passes through the specified area and a specified time has elapsed, the relay station effect begins, and after the effects of FIG. 31(B) and FIG. 31(C), the display changes to the first display mode. In other words, if a relay station effect in which the second valid operation period is selected is selected, the display will not be displayed in the first mode until gaming ball B passes through the specified area. On the other hand, the conditions for starting a relay station effect in which the first valid operation period is selected do not include gaming ball B passing through the specified area. In other words, if a relay station effect in which the second valid operation period is selected is selected, the display can be displayed in the first mode without gaming ball B passing through the specified area.

For example, if, after the relay station performance begins, the value of the relay counter falls below the count value corresponding to the next section by more than a predetermined number without reaching the count value corresponding to the next section (for example, if the relay station counter count falls below 3800 after the relay station performance from section 4 to section 5 begins), the relay station performance ends, section 5 runner 1625 is erased, and section 4 runner 1624 wearing sash 1632 is returned to the position on meter 1631 corresponding to the count value of the relay counter.

Also, for example, if the count value of the ekiden counter decreases to a value corresponding to the upper limit of the previous section, or if it falls below the value corresponding to the upper limit of the previous section by a predetermined number (for example, if the count value of the ekiden counter exceeds 4001 and the sash 1632 is passed to the runner 1625 for the fifth section, but the count value subsequently falls below 4000 or 3800), the ekiden effect may be returned to the effect corresponding to the previous section, or the runner for the current section may be positioned at the right end of the meter (until the count value of the ekiden counter exceeds the value corresponding to the lower limit of the original section) without returning to the effect corresponding to the previous section. For example, if the ekiden effect returns from the effect corresponding to the fifth section to the effect corresponding to the fourth section, if the count value of the ekiden counter reaches 3900 again, the relay station effect from the fourth section to the fifth section will be executed again, and if the count value returns to 4001 again, the section breakthrough effect will be executed again. In other words, the relay station effect corresponding to the same count value can be executed multiple times, and the section breakthrough effect corresponding to the same count value can be executed multiple times.

Figure 32 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay performance. In the example of Figure 32, the relay performance is always performed during fluctuations (when a reach performance is being executed and when a reach performance is not being executed), non-fluctuating periods, jackpot play, and non-jackpot play. Furthermore, in the relay performance of Figure 32, unless otherwise specified below, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is always valid, and an image prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is always displayed (there are also some periods when the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not valid, and some periods when an image prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not displayed, but details will be given later).

Figure 32 (A1) shows the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303, and is similar to Figure 31 (A) except that a white single press image 1636 is displayed to encourage a single press of the pressing operation unit 303. In Figure 32 (A1), when the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 detects a press, an effect is displayed around the runner 1621, and the effect is erased after a predetermined time has passed.

Figure 32 (A2) shows the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303, and is similar to Figure 31 (A) except that a red long press image 1637 is displayed to encourage a long press of the pressing operation unit 303. In Figure 32 (A2), when the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 detects a long press (e.g., a continuous press for one second or more), an effect is displayed around the runner 1621, and the effect is erased when a predetermined time has passed since the long press was stopped.

The display switches between a state in which a single-press image 1636, such as that shown in Figure 32 (A1), is displayed and a state in which a long-press image 1637, such as that shown in Figure 32 (A2), is displayed in response to a predetermined trigger (for example, every time a predetermined time period has elapsed, or in response to a change in the game state). The relay race performance may also start from Figure 32 (A1) or from Figure 32 (A2).

In addition, when the display changes from a state in which a single press image 1636 such as in Figure 32 (A1) to a state in which a long press image 1637 such as in Figure 32 (A2) is displayed, it is preferable that audio prompting the user to perform the operation indicated by the long press image 1637 be output from the speaker 354. However, when the display changes from a state in which a long press image 1637 such as in Figure 32 (A2) to a state in which a single press image 1636 such as in Figure 32 (A1) is displayed, it is preferable that audio prompting the user to perform the operation indicated by the single press image 1636 not be output from the speaker 354.

When a single press image 1636 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed, audio (e.g., "Single press of the button will increase the runner's motivation!") urging the player to single press the press operation unit 303 (urging the operation indicated by the single press image 1636) is output from the speaker 354, and when a long press image 1637 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, audio (e.g., "Long press of the button will increase the runner's motivation!") urging the player to long press the press operation unit 303 may be output from the speaker 354. However, when a long press image 1637 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, the audio urging the player to long press the press operation unit 303 may not be output, or the audio may be output in some cases and not in other cases (for example, an effect in which the audio is output or not output may be selected according to a predetermined allocation).

Furthermore, when a single press image 1636 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed, a predetermined SE (Sound Effect) corresponding to the sound may be output from the speaker 354 along with the sound encouraging the player to single press the press operation unit 303 (encouraging the operation indicated by the single press image 1636), and this sound and SE can ensure that the player performs a single press of the press operation unit 303. Similarly, when a long press image 1637 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, a predetermined SE (Sound Effect) corresponding to the sound may be output from the speaker 354 along with the sound encouraging the player to long press the press operation unit 303 (encouraging the operation indicated by the long press image 1637), and this sound and SE can ensure that the player performs a long press of the press operation unit 303.

However, it is desirable that the SE output together with the sound urging the player to press the press operation unit 303 once (urging the operation indicated by the single press image 1636) be different from the SE output together with the sound urging the player to press and hold the press operation unit 303 (urging the operation indicated by the long press image 1637). By outputting different SEs in this way, the player can more reliably recognize whether to press the press operation unit 303 once or long. Furthermore, because a long press requires a longer operation time than a single press, in order to ensure that the player performs the long press operation of the press operation unit 303, it is desirable, for example, that the output duration of the SE output together with the sound urging the player to press the press operation unit 303 once (urging the operation indicated by the single press image 1636) be longer than the output duration of the SE output together with the sound urging the player to press and hold the press operation unit 303 (urging the operation indicated by the long press image 1637).

Furthermore, the BGM output from the speaker 354 may be different when the single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1) etc. and when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A2) etc., or some of the BGM may be the same. For example, the BGM output when the single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1) etc. is selected according to a predetermined allocation from a plurality of BGMs including a first BGM and a second BGM, and the BGM output when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A2) etc. is selected according to an allocation from a plurality of BGMs that do not include the first BGM (which may or may not include the second BGM).

In addition, when the single-press image 1636 is displayed as in Figure 32 (A1), it is desirable not to display a display indicating the BGM being output (for example, the title of the BGM), and when the long-press image 1637 is displayed as in Figure 32 (A2), it is desirable to display a display indicating the BGM being output.

The above-mentioned audio and background music allow the player to recognize the operation that they are being prompted to perform not only through the display on the effect display device 1600, but also through sound.

Note that when a predetermined time has elapsed since the state was switched to displaying the single press image 1636 as shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the single press image 1636 may be erased. Similarly, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the state was switched to displaying the long press image 1637 as shown in FIG. 32 (A2), the long press image 1637 may be erased.

In addition, when a single press image 1636 such as in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed and the lamp is emitting light in a predetermined manner (a predetermined light pattern or a predetermined color), the state may change to one in which a long press image 1637 such as in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed. At this time, in order to draw the player's attention to the long press image 1637, it is preferable that the lamp ceases emitting light in the predetermined manner before the change is made and then the change is made. On the other hand, when a change occurs from a state in which a long press image 1637 such as in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed to a state in which a single press image 1636 such as in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed, the lamp does not emit light in the predetermined manner, and even after the change to a state in which a long press image 1637 such as in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, the lamp does not emit light in the predetermined manner until the long press image 1637 is erased.

In addition, when switching between a state in which a single press image 1636 such as in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed and a state in which a long press image 1637 such as in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, the background display on the effect display device 1600 may change in accordance with the switch, so that the player can more easily recognize that the operation mode being promoted has changed. In this case, when switching from a state in which a long press image 1637 such as in FIG. 32 (A2) and the second background are displayed to a state in which a single press image 1636 such as in FIG. 32 (A1) and the first background are displayed, it is advisable to hide the long press image 1637 and the second background, then display a predetermined background for a predetermined period of time, and then display the single press image 1636 and the first background.

When the state switches from one in which a long press image 1637, such as in FIG. 32 (A2), is displayed to one in which a single press image 1636, such as in FIG. 32 (A1), is displayed, one or more display effects may be displayed that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot for the ongoing change and/or the pending change. A single press is easier than a long press, but the display of such display effects makes it less likely that the player will tire of the game.

On the other hand, when switching from a state in which a single press image 1636 such as in Figure 32 (A1) is displayed to a state in which a long press image 1637 such as in Figure 32 (A2) is displayed, one or more display effects indicating the expected jackpot probability of the ongoing variation and/or the pending variation may not be displayed until a predetermined time has passed since the switch. A long press operation takes time, and if such a display effect were displayed immediately after the switch, there is a risk that the player would be distracted by the display effect and stop the long press operation. Therefore, such a display effect is not displayed until a predetermined time has passed since the switch.

The effect display may be displayed at a predetermined rate when the press detection sensor 381 of the press operation unit 303 detects a single press while the single press image 1636 is displayed, or when the press detection sensor 381 of the press operation unit 303 detects a long press while the long press image 1637 is displayed.

The single press image 1636 and the long press image 1637 may be displayed in a display mode selected from a plurality of display modes. For example, there may be a time when the single press image 1636 in a plurality of display modes is displayed simultaneously, or a time when the long press image 1637 in a plurality of display modes is displayed simultaneously. For example, when the single press image 1636 in the first mode is displayed and a detection based on an erroneous operation is made (for example, a long press of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected), the single press image 1636 in the second mode may be additionally displayed. The long press image 1637 in the first mode may be displayed and a detection based on an erroneous operation is made (for example, a single press of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected), and the long press image 1637 in the second mode may be additionally displayed.

Figure 32 (B1) shows a state in which the relay station effect has begun when the single-press image 1636 is displayed. In other words, Figure 32 (B1) shows a state in which the count value of the relay counter has reached a value that is a predetermined number less (for example, 100 shots less) than the count value corresponding to the next section when the single-press image 1636 is displayed. In Figure 32 (B1), similar to Figure 31 (B), the count value of the relay counter has reached 1900, and the relay station effect has begun, indicating whether the sash 1632 will be passed from the runner 1621 of the first section to the runner 1622 of the second section. Also, Figure 32 (B1) differs from Figure 31 (B) in that the single-press image 1636 is displayed instead of the button image 1633 and gauge 1634. Furthermore, when a single press on the pressing operation unit 303 is detected in the state shown in Figure 32 (B1), the above-mentioned effect is displayed around the runner 1621 (there is no transition to the cut-in 1635 shown in Figure 31 (C) or the section breakthrough effect shown in Figure 32 (D)).

Figure 32 (B2) shows a state in which the relay station effect has begun when the long press image 1637 is displayed. In other words, Figure 32 (B2) shows a state in which, when the long press image 1637 is displayed, the count value of the relay counter has reached a value that is a predetermined number less (for example, 100 shots less) than the count value corresponding to the next section. In Figure 32 (B2), as in Figure 31 (B), the count value of the relay counter has reached 1900, and the relay station effect has begun, indicating whether the sash 1632 will be passed from the runner 1621 of the first section to the runner 1622 of the second section. Also, Figure 32 (B1) differs from Figure 31 (B) in that the long press image 1637 is displayed instead of the button image 1633 and gauge 1634. Furthermore, when a long press on the pressing operation unit 303 is detected in the state shown in Figure 32 (B2), the above-mentioned effect is displayed around the runner 1621 (there is no transition to the cut-in 1635 shown in Figure 31 (C) or the section breakthrough effect shown in Figure 32 (D)).

If the above-mentioned predetermined trigger is satisfied when in the state of Figure 32 (B1), the state will transition to Figure 32 (B2), and if the above-mentioned predetermined trigger is satisfied when in the state of Figure 32 (B2), the state will transition to Figure 32 (B1). In this way, by changing the operation mode prompted to the player even when the relay station performance is being performed, the player will not tire of operating the pressing operation unit 303.

In the state shown in Figure 32 (B1) (i.e., when the relay station effect in which the single press image 1636 is displayed is being executed), when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value (2001) corresponding to the next section, the effect transitions to the section breakthrough effect shown in Figure 32 (C1). In the section breakthrough effect shown in Figure 32 (C1), neither the single press image 1636 nor the long press image 1637 is displayed (i.e., the image prompting the operation of the press operation unit 303 is erased), and a message 1638 is displayed indicating that the count value has reached the next section.

In the state of FIG. 32(B2) (i.e., when the relay station effect in which long press image 1637 is displayed is being executed), when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value (2001) corresponding to the next section, the display transitions to the section breakthrough effect of FIG. 32(C2). In the section breakthrough effect of FIG. 32(C2), long press image 1637 continues to be displayed, and message 1639 (different from message 1638) indicating that the count value has reached the next section is displayed. Also, in FIG. 32(C2), the audio of the part of message 1639 that differs from message 1638 ("Breakthrough again next time!?") is output from speaker 354. Note that in FIG. 32(C2), it is preferable that the part of message 1639 that is common to message 1638 ("Breakthrough!!") is not displayed in a display area separate from message 1639. Note that after transitioning to FIG. 32(C2), it is preferable not to transition to an effect in which single press image 1636 is displayed.

When the section breakthrough effect of Figures 32 (C1) and 32 (C2) is executed, a sound dedicated to the section breakthrough effect may be output from speaker 354, but it is desirable that the output time of this dedicated sound be within a predetermined range (for example, at least 10 seconds and no more than 30 seconds). Furthermore, when the section breakthrough effect of Figures 32 (C1) and 32 (C2) is executed, a predetermined lamp may emit light in a lighting mode dedicated to the section breakthrough effect. It is desirable that the output time of the dedicated sound be set so that the output of the dedicated sound for the section breakthrough effect ends before the display of the section breakthrough effect in Figures 32 (C1) and 32 (C2) and the illumination of the lamp in the lighting mode dedicated to the section breakthrough effect end (in other words, the output of the dedicated sound ends while the display of the section breakthrough effect and the illumination of the lamp in the lighting mode continue). Unlike display effects and light-emitting effects, sound effects can be recognized by other players playing on gaming machines installed around the gaming machine in question, and since the output time of the dedicated sound is long, it will distract the other players, so it is best to set the output time of the dedicated sound in this way to a short time.

In addition, when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value (2001) corresponding to the next section in the state of Figure 32 (B2) (i.e., when the relay station performance is being executed with the long press image 1637 displayed), either Figure 32 (C1) or Figure 32 (C2) may be selected and transitioned to in accordance with a predetermined allocation, for example.

The relay race effect of FIG. 32 may start from the relay station effect of FIG. 32 (B1) or FIG. 32 (B2). In other words, the relay race effect of FIG. 32 may start when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value that is a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the next section (for example, 100 balls less), and the effects of FIG. 32 (A1) and FIG. 32 (A2) may be omitted. By executing the relay race effect from the relay station effect, the relay station effect also functions as a preview effect that indicates the start of the section breakthrough effect, giving the player a sense of anticipation that the relay race counter value will reach a predetermined value. Furthermore, the player can know the relay race counter value only when it is about to reach a round number of balls, and can concentrate on effects other than the relay race effect at other times. Furthermore, if the effects of FIG. 32 (A1) and FIG. 32 (A2) are omitted, the relay race effect may start from FIG. 32 (B1) or FIG. 32 (B2).

As with the relay performance in Figure 31, in relay station performances, a display showing the remaining count value of the relay counter until the count value corresponding to the next section is reached (for example, the remaining count value itself or an approximate remaining count value, etc.) may be displayed as a warning display. Unless otherwise specified below, the timing of displaying and erasing warning displays, the display priority of warning displays, the sound accompanying warning displays, and the lamps accompanying warning displays are the same as those described in Figure 31.

For example, if a warning display is erased a predetermined time after it is displayed, the count value of the relay counter may be a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the next section when the warning display is erased, but may not have reached the count value corresponding to the next section. In this case, the warning display may be displayed again a predetermined time after the warning display is erased. In other words, the warning display can be displayed multiple times.

When a precursor display is displayed while the single press image 1636 is displayed in FIG. 32 (B1), part or all of the precursor display is displayed in an area that overlaps with the single press image 1636, but the display priority of the precursor display in this overlapping area may be higher or lower than the display priority of the single press image 1636. On the other hand, when a precursor display is displayed while the long press image 1637 is displayed in FIG. 32 (B2), it is desirable that the display area of the precursor display and the display area of the long press image 1637 do not overlap.

In addition, whether the precursor display is displayed when the single press image 1636 is displayed in Figure 32 (B1) or when the precursor display is displayed when the long press image 1637 is displayed in Figure 32 (B2), light is emitted (in a dedicated pattern) in conjunction with the precursor display.

Note that the frequency with which the count value of the ekiden counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section in the state of Figure 32 (B2) may be higher or lower than the frequency with which the count value of the ekiden counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section in the state of Figure 32 (B1).

For example, if pachinko machine 1 has multiple general winning slots 2001 and game ball B enters a first general winning slot among the multiple general winning slots 2001, the payout based on that ball will be reflected in the count value of the relay counter, but no sound corresponding to that ball will be output; and if game ball B enters a second general winning slot among the multiple general winning slots 2001, the payout based on that ball will be reflected in the count value of the relay counter, and a sound corresponding to that ball will be output.

When game ball B enters the second general winning opening while the single press image 1636 is displayed as in Figure 32 (A1), etc., a winning sound of the first mode is output. On the other hand, when game ball B enters the second general winning opening while the long press image 1637 is displayed as in Figure 32 (B1), etc., a winning sound of the mode selected (for example, according to a predetermined allocation) from the first mode and the second mode (for example, the winning sound of the second mode is quieter and the sound is output for a shorter time than the winning sound of the first mode) is output.

Furthermore, when game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the first mode winning sound is output while the single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1), the background music being output from the speaker 354 is interrupted. On the other hand, when game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the first mode winning sound is output while the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (B1), the background music being output from the speaker 354 is interrupted. However, when game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the second mode winning sound is output while the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (B1), the background music being output from the speaker 354 continues. This allows the player's attention to be drawn to the first mode winning sound.

Furthermore, when the single press image 1636 is displayed as in Figure 32 (A1) and an audio message urging a single press of the press operation unit 303 is output from the speaker 354, and game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the winning sound of the first mode is output, the output of the audio is interrupted. On the other hand, when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in Figure 32 (A2) and an audio message urging a long press of the press operation unit 303 is output from the speaker 354, and game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the winning sound of the first mode is output, the output of the audio is interrupted. However, when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in Figure 32 (A2) and an audio message urging a long press of the press operation unit 303 is output from the speaker 354, and game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the winning sound of the second mode is output, the output of the audio continues. By doing this, the player's attention can be drawn to the first type of winning sound.

For example, when the long press image 1637 is displayed in FIG. 32 (B2), the transition to the section breakthrough effect of FIG. 32 (C1) may occur only if gaming ball B passes through a predetermined area (e.g., gate portion 2003). In other words, when the long press image 1637 is displayed in FIG. 32 (B2), if the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section without gaming ball B passing through the predetermined area, the section breakthrough effect of FIG. 32 (C2) (i.e., the section breakthrough effect in which the long press image 1637 continues to be displayed) should always be performed.

When the single press image 1636 is displayed as in Figure 32 (A1), if the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 detects a long press (an operation different from the operation prompted by the single press image 1636), a sound prompting the user to perform the operation indicated by the single press image 1636 (a single press on the pressure operation unit 303) is output from the speaker 354, and an additional single press image 1636 may be displayed, or the display time of the single press image 1636 may be extended. Similarly, when a long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A2), if the press detection sensor 381 of the press operation unit 303 detects a long press (an operation different from the operation prompted by the long press image 1637), a sound prompting the user to perform the operation indicated by the long press image 1637 (long press on the press operation unit 303) is output from the speaker 354, and another long press image 1637 may be displayed, or the display time of the long press image 1637 may be extended.

Figures 33, 34, and 35 are explanatory diagrams showing other examples of relay race presentations. In the relay race presentations of Figures 33, 34, and 35, a rival presentation is executed in which a rival 1640 participates in a relay race. For example, the pachinko machine 1 further includes a counter function that counts the payout of game balls B and is different from the relay race counter (hereinafter, this counter function will also be referred to as the rival counter). Specifically, for example, the rival counter counts the total number of game balls B paid out as a result of game balls B entering a predetermined winning slot.

In other words, payouts of game ball B obtained when game ball B enters a prize slot other than the specified prize slot are not reflected in the rival counter's count value. On the other hand, payouts of game ball B obtained when game ball B enters a prize slot other than the specified prize slot are also counted in the ekiden counter. In this way, there are payouts (wins) that are reflected in the ekiden counter but not in the rival counter.

Also, when the Ekiden Counter counts the difference in balls or MY, the count value of the Ekiden Counter may be decremented (the Ekiden Counter also counts the decrease in game ball B payouts), but the Rival Counter counts the total number of game balls B paid out as a result of game ball B entering a designated winning slot (in other words, the number of game balls B that entered the out slot or the number of game balls B that entered that designated winning slot is not decremented), so the count value of the Rival Counter is not decremented (except when it is reset to zero).

In this way, because the counting standards for the Ekiden Counter and the Rival Counter are different, any of the following situations may occur: the Ekiden Counter's count value is greater than the Rival Counter's count value (an example of a first situation); the Ekiden Counter's count value is equal to the Rival Counter's count value; the Ekiden Counter's count value is smaller than the Rival Counter's count value (an example of a second situation); the Ekiden Counter's count value overtakes the Rival Counter's count value; or the Ekiden Counter's count value is overtaken by the Rival Counter's count value. Therefore, as will be described in detail below, in the Rival Performance, it is possible to execute a "tough-to-overtake" performance, such as the Rival 1640 getting ahead of or being overtaken by the Rival's runner, or the Rival 1640 overtaking or being overtaken by the Rival's runner, thereby increasing the player's sense of tension and excitement. Furthermore, the Rival 1640 in the Rival Performance can indirectly determine the number of game balls B paid out (whether it is higher or lower than the Rival Counter's count value) through the Rival 1640.

The rival counter may, for example, count the total number of game balls B paid out due to balls entering a predetermined winning slot since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on, and the count value of the rival counter is reset (to zero) when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. The rival counter may also, for example, count the total number of game balls B paid out due to balls entering a predetermined winning slot since a predetermined effect (e.g., a rival effect) began. In this case, the count value of the rival counter is reset (to zero) when the predetermined effect ends and the next effect is executed. The rival counter may, for example, count the total number of game balls B paid out due to balls entering a predetermined winning slot since a predetermined game state began. In this case, the count value of the rival counter is reset (to zero) when the game remains in a different specific game state to which the game state was transitioned.

The rival presentation will be explained below using an example in which the rival counter counts the total number of game balls B paid out by balls entering a specified winning slot since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on.

The rival counter count value is stored, for example, in the RAM of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, for example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may calculate and update the rival counter count value based on the number of game balls B detected by a sensor installed in a specified winning slot, or may calculate and update the rival counter count value based on the number of payouts based on the entry of game balls B into a specified winning slot indicated by a command received from the payout control board 63. The main control MPU sends a command indicating the rival counter value to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 executes the rival presentation described below based on the rival counter count value indicated by the received command.

In the rival performance that is executed during the relay race performance, the performance display device 1600 displays a display of the rival 1640 heading towards the destination according to the count value of the rival counter. For example, in the rival performance, the rival 1640 is displayed along the meter 1631.

Specifically, for example, if the rival counter's count value is between 0 and 1000 when the rival effect is being executed, an effect will be produced in which the rival 1640 is running the first section, and if the rival counter's count value is between 1001 and 2000 when the rival effect is being executed, an effect will be produced in which the rival 1640 is running the second section. When either the ekiden counter's count value or the rival counter's count value reaches 10001, an effect will be produced in which the team's runner or rival reaches the finish line.

In Figure 33(A), the value of the relay counter corresponds to the second section, and the same effect as in Figure 31(A) is being performed, except that the team's own team's second section runner 1622 is displayed and the meter 1631 corresponds to the second section.

Figures 33 (B1), 33 (C1), 34 (D1), and 34 (E1) show rival effects that start when a runner from the team (e.g., runner 1622, shown in white in the figures) based on the count value of the relay counter is ahead of a rival 1640 (shown in black in the figures), which is displayed based on the count value of the rival counter (i.e., a rival effect in which the rival 1640 may overtake the runner from the team). Figures 33 (B2), 33 (C2), 34 (D2), and 34 (E2) show rival effects that start when the rival 1640 is ahead of the runner from the team (i.e., a rival effect in which the runner from the team may overtake the rival 1640). Note that when the display of the rival 1640 begins as in Figure 33 (B1), not only the rival 1640 itself is displayed, but also a cut-in of the rival 1640 may be displayed to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rival effect has developed.

First, we will explain the rival effect that starts when the player's team's runner is ahead of rival 1640. Figure 33 (B1) shows the state when the rival counter value is a value corresponding to Section 1 (0 to 1000) and the rival effect has started. In Figure 33 (B1), a message indicating that the rival effect has started ("Rival Enters the Battle!!") is displayed, and rival 1640 is displayed on meter 1631 corresponding to Section 1. The rival effect is executed, for example, in a specified game state.

When the rival performance begins, the relay performance progresses with the rival 1640 at the center (for example, the rival 1640 is always displayed, or a message about the rival 1640 is displayed, etc.). When the rival performance is being executed (or at any time in a relay performance in which the rival performance can be executed), a display showing the count value of the relay counter and/or rival counter (which may be the count value itself or an approximation of the count value) may be displayed on the performance display device 1600. For example, a display showing the count value of the relay counter is displayed below the runner on one's team, and a display showing the count value of the rival counter is displayed below the rival 1640.

However, it is desirable that the display showing the count value of the ekiden counter be erased, for example, when the ekiden counter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10001 (the value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section)). On the other hand, it is desirable that the value showing the count value of the rival counter continue to be displayed even if the display showing the count value of the ekiden counter is erased.

Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the display showing the count value of the Ekiden Counter, a display showing the remaining count value of the Ekiden Counter up to the predetermined value (which may be the remaining count value itself or an approximation of the remaining count value) may be displayed (i.e., if a win is won that is the target of the Ekiden Counter's count, the displayed value is decremented; however, if the display is an approximation, the decrement does not necessarily occur each time a win is won (for example, if the remaining count value is displayed in units of 1000 balls, the displayed value is decremented each time 1000 balls are lost)). By displaying the remaining count value instead of the display showing the Ekiden Counter's count value, the player is unable to directly recognize the balls he or she has won, which can further enhance the effect of increasing interest by suggesting the balls to be won through rival effects (effects that allow players to grasp the balls won). On the other hand, it is preferable that the remaining count value of the rival Counter not be displayed up to the predetermined value (i.e., if a win is won that is the target of the rival Counter's count, the value displayed showing the rival Counter's value is incremented). Furthermore, when displaying the remaining count value of the relay counter up to the predetermined value, the runners on the team may not be displayed.

Figure 33 (C1) shows the state when the value of the rival counter has reached the value (1001) corresponding to Section 2. In Figure 33 (C1), a section breakthrough effect for rival 1640 is executed, indicating that rival 1640 has reached the next section (Section 2). In Figure 33 (C1), a display indicating successful section breakthrough ("Breakthrough!!") and a highlight display 1641 emphasizing that the next section has been reached are displayed.

Note that the highlight 1641 has multiple display modes (for example, a display mode in which the text or color within the highlight 1641 differs for each display mode, a display mode that shows the count value corresponding to the section reached by the rival 1640, etc.), and one display mode may be selected from the multiple display modes depending on the section reached by the rival 1640, or one display mode may be selected from the multiple display modes depending on the difference between the section reached by the rival 1640 and the section in which the team's runner is located.

In this way, when the rival effect is being executed, each time the count value of the rival counter reaches one of several predetermined values (1001, 2001, ..., 9001), an effect of the rival 1640 breaking through the section is performed, and a highlight 1641 is displayed in a manner based on the section that the rival 1640 has reached.

When displaying a display showing the remaining count value up to the predetermined value of the relay counter, it is desirable that the display showing the remaining count value have a higher priority in the overlapping display area between the display showing the remaining count value and the highlight 1641 (because the rival counter's count value is indicated not only by the highlight 1641 but also by the display position of the rival 1640). When a predetermined effect (for example, an SP reach effect that has a high probability of a jackpot among reach effects and is executed in a predetermined variation pattern, or an instant win effect in which a jackpot is announced (three identical decorative symbols are displayed) without a reach state being displayed or immediately after a reach state is displayed (for example, within a predetermined time such as within 1.0 second, or without other effects being executed after a reach state is displayed)) is being executed, the rival 1640 and highlight 1641 may be hidden to focus the player's attention on the predetermined effect and create a sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, a predetermined effect movie (for example, a movie alluding to a past feud that led to the rivalry between the player's team and the rival 1640) may be displayed during the rival effect. When displaying a display showing the remaining count value up to the predetermined value on the relay counter, the display of the rival 1640 may be made invisible (or hidden) while the effect movie is being played, but the display showing the remaining count value may continue to be displayed. This creates a sense of tension for the player, as the player is temporarily unable to discern the difference between the player's runner and the rival 1640. On the other hand, some players dislike not being able to discern the difference between the player's runner and the rival 1640. Therefore, while the effect movie is being displayed, the display of the effect movie may be stopped by a predetermined trigger based on the player's operation (for example, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 or having game ball B enter a predetermined winning hole), so that the rival 1640 can be viewed again, or the display of the effect movie may end when a predetermined time has passed since the effect movie was displayed.

In Figure 34 (D1), the count value of the ekiden counter and the count value of the rival counter are both within the range corresponding to Section 2 (1001 to 2000), and the team's runner 1622 and rival 1640 are both located on meter 1631 corresponding to Section 2. Also, in Figure 34 (D1), since the count value of the rival counter is smaller than the count value of the ekiden counter, rival 1640 is displayed to the right of the team's runner 1622 in Section 2.

Note that because there are prize slots (the specified prize slots described above) that are the target of additions for both the Ekiden Counter and the Rival Counter, when a game ball B enters such prize slot while the Rival 1640 and the player's runner are simultaneously displayed, as shown in Figure 34 (D1), an addition effect is produced in which both the Rival 1640 and the player's runner move along the meter 1631. At this time, it is desirable that the sound output in conjunction with the addition effect of the player's runner takes priority over the sound output in conjunction with the Rival 1640 addition effect (the prioritized sound is output louder, or the non-prioritized sound is not output). Furthermore, if the display position of the Rival 1640 and the player's runner overlap, it is desirable that the player's runner has a higher display priority. Furthermore, it is desirable that the lamps lit in conjunction with the addition effect of the player's runner take priority over the lamps lit in conjunction with the Rival 1640 addition effect (the overlapping lamps light up according to the prioritized light pattern, or the overlapping lamps light up according to the prioritized light pattern, and the non-overlapping lamps among the non-prioritized lamps do not light up).

Note that the count value of the Ekiden counter may decrease, and the display position of the team's runner may change in response to this decrease. In other words, the display position of the team's runner may move to the right, or the team's runner may return to the previous section (or be erased).

Figure 34 (E1) shows the state when the count value of the ekiden counter reaches 10001 and the value of the rival counter is within the range corresponding to the 10th section (9001 to 10000). When the ekiden performance is being executed, if the count value of the ekiden counter or rival counter reaches 10001, a goal performance is performed. In other words, in Figure 34 (E1), a goal performance is being performed in which the team's runner 1630 in the 10th section reaches the finish line.

In addition, in Figure 34 (E1), runner 1630 of the team's 10th section has reached the finish line, and rival 1640 is positioned at meter 1631 corresponding to 10th section. Also, message 1642 ("Finish!! Let's shake hands!!"), which is an example of a special image suggesting that the finish line has been reached, is displayed. Note that message 1642 can take multiple forms (for example, a first form, "Finish!! Let's shake hands!!", and a second form, "Finish! Next time we'll win!"), but it is advisable to ensure that message 1642 in the first form, which is included in the multiple forms, is always displayed when the count value of the relay counter is greater than the count value of the rival counter, as in Figure 34 (E1), and the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the finish line.

Even when the situation shown in Figure 34 (E1) is reached, the rival 1640 may continue to move on the meter 1631 according to the rival counter's count value. However, whether the ekiden counter's count value increases or decreases during that time, the display of the runner 1630 in the 10th section and the message 1642 may continue as is. After the situation shown in Figure 34 (E1) is reached, when the rival counter's count value reaches a value (10001) corresponding to the goal of the 10th section, although the ekiden counter's count value is unknown to the player, because the ekiden counter's value has already reached a value corresponding to the goal of the 10th section, the player can recognize that he has at least once obtained game ball B with a value corresponding to the goal of the 10th section.

Furthermore, after the situation shown in Figure 34 (E1) has occurred, the rival 1640 may continue to move on the meter 1631 according to the count value of the rival counter, and when the count value of the rival counter reaches a value corresponding to the finish line of Section 10, the rival 1640 may be displayed in a specific manner, which will be described later.

For example, when a win occurs that triggers the rival counter's count value to reach a value corresponding to the finish line of Section 10, the winning sound corresponding to that win is always output, but when a win occurs that triggers the relay counter's count value to reach a value corresponding to the finish line of Section 10, the winning sound corresponding to that win may or may not be output (whether or not the sound is output may be determined, for example, according to a predetermined allocation). This creates a sense of tension for the player, for example, when the player's team's Section 10 runner 1630 and rival 1640 reach the finish line of Section 10 at almost the same time, making it difficult for the player to immediately tell which one reached the finish line first.

Note that when the count value of the ekiden counter reaches a value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section, the team's 10th section runner 1630 may be hidden immediately or after a predetermined time has passed. If the display of the team's 10th section runner 1630 continues even after the ekiden counter count value has reached a value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section, it is desirable that the display of the team's 10th section runner 1630 does not change even if the ekiden counter count value increases (i.e., no performance based on the ekiden counter count is performed), or the ekiden counter count itself may be terminated.

Next, we will explain the rival effect that starts when the team's runner is ahead of rival 1640. Figure 33 (B2) shows the state when the rival effect has started when the rival counter's count value is a value corresponding to Section 3 (2001 to 3000). In Figure 33 (B2), a message indicating that the rival effect has started ("Rival Enters the Race!!") is displayed, and rival 1640 is displayed on meter 1631 corresponding to Section 3.

Figure 33 (C2) shows a state in which the rival counter's count value has increased, but is still included in the values corresponding to Section 3 (2001-3000). In Figure 33 (C2), rival 1640 is displayed on meter 1631 corresponding to Section 3, but is located further to the left than in Figure 33 (B2).

Figure 34 (D2) shows a state in which the rival counter's count value is within the range of values corresponding to Section 3 (3001-4000), and the relay counter's count value has reached the value corresponding to Section 3 (3001). In Figure 34 (D2), a section breakthrough effect for runner 1623 is executed, indicating that the team's runner 1623 has reached the next section (Section 4). In Figure 34 (D2), a display indicating successful section breakthrough ("Breakthrough!!") is displayed, but highlighting 1641 is not displayed because the rival effect is centered on the rival. However, when the team's runner reaches the value corresponding to Section 10, a display (different from highlighting 1641) may be displayed emphasizing that the team's runner has reached Section 10 to create a sense of climax.

In Figure 34 (E2), the count value of the rival counter has reached 10001, and the value of the Ekiden counter is within the range corresponding to the 10th section (9001 to 10000). In Figure 34 (E2), a finish performance is being performed in which rival 1640 reaches the finish line. If rival 1640 reaches the finish line before the team's own runner, the display mode of rival 1640 changes to a special mode display praising rival 1640 (for example, a display in which rival 1640 is wearing crown 1643). After rival 1640 in the special mode is displayed, the position of rival 1640 does not change even if the count value of the rival counter is incremented (in fact, the increment of the count value of the rival counter may stop at a value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section), and even if a display showing the value of the rival counter is displayed, the value indicated by the special mode display will not be incremented any further once that display is displayed. The display of the specific aspect of the rival 1640 may continue as is (for example, until the count value of the ekiden counter reaches a value (10001) corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section) (if it continues as is, for example, it may be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed since the count value of the ekiden counter reached the value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section, or immediately after it is reached), or it may be hidden after being displayed for a predetermined time, or immediately after it is reached.

When the display of the rival 1640 displayed in a specific mode is erased, it is preferable to stop incrementing the count value of the rival counter during the period that the rival 1640 is erased (because if the position of the rival 1640 has changed the next time the rival 1640 is displayed, it will give the player a sense of discomfort). Furthermore, the display mode and display position of the rival 1640 when the rival 1640 in a specific mode is hidden may be different from the display of the rival 1640 when the display of the rival 1640 in a specific mode continues. For example, the display size of the rival 1640 when the display of the rival 1640 in a specific mode continues may be larger than the display size of the rival 1640 when the rival 1640 in a specific mode is hidden.

Even in the situation shown in Figure 34 (E2), the movement of the team's runner 1630 in the 10th section on the meter 1631 may continue according to the count value of the relay counter. If the rival 1640 continues to be displayed in a specific manner until the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section, the player will be made aware that the count value of the relay counter is approaching the value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation. Furthermore, by having the specific manner of the rival 1640 displayed in either a continuous manner or an immediate termination, if the display continues, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is still a possibility that game ball B will be paid out, and if the display is immediately terminated, it is possible to suggest that there is still a possibility that game ball B will be paid out, and therefore the player can be drawn to the possibility of a handshake scene with the rival even if the rival has already reached the finish line first.

Furthermore, after the situation shown in FIG. 34 (E2) has occurred, if the runner 1630 of the team's 10th section continues to move along the meter 1631 in accordance with the count value of the ekiden counter and the value of the ekiden counter reaches a value corresponding to the goal of the 10th section, message 1642 may also be displayed. As mentioned above, message 1642 can take multiple forms (for example, the first form in FIG. 34 (E1) of "Goal!! Shake hands!!" and the second form of "Goal! Next time we'll win!"), and in this case (i.e., when the rival counter's count value is greater than the ekiden counter's count value and the rival counter's value reaches a value corresponding to the goal), message 1642 in a form selected from the first and second forms (for example, according to a predetermined allocation) may be displayed.

In the example of the rival presentation described above, the rival 1640 and the player's team's runner are displayed simultaneously if the count values of the rival counter and the relay counter correspond to the same section. However, the player's team's runner may only be displayed once the relay counter count value reaches a predetermined value (for example, a value obtained by subtracting 500 from the value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section). This creates a sense of tension because the player cannot tell whether the rival 1640 or the player's team's runner is ahead until just before the finish line.

Furthermore, with regard to the rival 1640, each time there is a win that is counted by the rival counter (each time the rival counter is incremented), the position of the rival 1640 on the meter 1631 may be moved to a value corresponding to the rival counter's count value, and with regard to the player's team's runner, each time the ekiden counter's count value increases by a predetermined number (for example, each time it increases by 100), the position of the player's team's runner on the meter 1631 may be moved to a value corresponding to the ekiden counter's count value (i.e., the position on the meter 1631 may not change even if the ekiden counter is incremented). This creates a sense of tension because, when the ekiden counter and rival counter count values are close, the player cannot tell which of the ekiden counter or rival counter count value is higher just by looking at the display.

Figure 35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reversal suggestion effect executed in the rival effect. The reversal suggestion effect suggests that the rival 1640 is about to be caught up by the runner on your team, or that the rival 1640 is about to catch up with the runner on your team. The reversal suggestion effect is executed, for example, when the count value of the rival counter is greater than the count value of the ekiden counter and the difference between the count value of the rival counter and the count value of the ekiden counter is within a predetermined value (for example, within 900), or when the count value of the rival counter is smaller than the count value of the ekiden counter and the difference between the count value of the rival counter and the count value of the ekiden counter is within a predetermined value.

Furthermore, in order to give the player a sense of tension at the climax of the race between one's own team's runner and rival 1640, the reversal suggestion effect may be executed only when one's own team's runner reaches the starting point of Section 10. Specifically, for example, the reversal suggestion effect may be executed when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (9001) corresponding to the starting point of Section 10, the count value of the rival counter is greater than the count value of the relay counter, and the difference between the count value of the rival counter and the count value of the relay counter is within a predetermined value, or when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (9001) corresponding to the starting point of Section 10, the count value of the rival counter is smaller than the count value of the relay counter, and the difference between the count value of the rival counter and the count value of the relay counter is within a predetermined value.

In addition, because the count value of the relay counter may decrease, the reversal suggestion effect can be executed multiple times. This allows players to experience the tension of the reversal suggestion effect multiple times.

Figure 35(A) shows a state in which a reversal suggestion effect is being performed when rival 1640 is ahead of the team's runner. Figure 35(A) shows a state in which the rival counter's count value has reached the value corresponding to the fourth section (3001), the Ekiden counter's value is within the range corresponding to the third section (2001-3000), and the difference between the rival counter's count value and the Ekiden counter's count value is within a predetermined value (within 900).

In Figure 35 (A), the rival 1640 and the team's runner 1623 are positioned on the meter 1631 at positions corresponding to the count values of the rival counter and the relay counter, respectively.

In addition, in Figure 35 (A), a reversal suggestion effect and a rival 1640 section breakthrough effect are performed simultaneously. Because rival 1640 is ahead of the player's team's runner 1623, the display mode of the highlight 1641 for the rival 1640 section breakthrough effect is different from that in Figure 33 (C1). In addition, in the reversal suggestion effect, a message 1644 is displayed indicating that the positions of rival 1640 and the player's team's runner are about to be reversed.

To more strongly impress upon the player the possibility of a reversal and create a sense of tension, if there is an overlapping display area between message 1644 and highlight 1641, it is desirable that the display priority of message 1644 be higher than the priority of highlight 1641. It is also desirable that the display time of message 1644 be longer than the display time of highlight 1641.

It is also desirable that the sound output in conjunction with message 1644 takes priority over the sound output in conjunction with highlighting 1641 (the prioritized sound is output louder, or the non-prioritized sound is not output). It is also desirable that the lamps lit in conjunction with message 1644 take priority over the lamps lit in conjunction with highlighting 1641 (the overlapping lamps light up according to the prioritized lighting pattern, or the overlapping lamps light up according to the prioritized lighting pattern, and the non-overlapping lamps among the non-prioritized lamps do not light up).

Figure 35(B) shows a state in which a reversal suggestion effect is being performed when rival 1640 is ahead of the team's runner. Figure 35(B) shows a state in which the rival counter's count value has reached the value corresponding to the fourth section (3001), the Ekiden counter's count value is greater than the rival counter's count value, and the difference between the rival counter's count value and the Ekiden counter's count value is within a predetermined value (within 900).

In Figure 35 (B), the rival 1640 is located on the meter 1631 at a position corresponding to the count value of the rival counter. Furthermore, the team's runner has already reached the next section, so he is not displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in Figure 35 (B), a reversal suggestion effect and a section breakthrough effect for rival 1640 are being displayed simultaneously. Because rival 1640 is ahead of his team's runner 1623, the display mode of the section breakthrough effect highlight 1641 for rival 1640 is the same as in Figure 33 (C1). Also in Figure 35 (B), message 1644 is displayed.

In addition, if the reversal suggestion effect is executed only when the team's runner reaches the starting point of the 10th section, message 1644 may suggest that the team's runner has reached the final section (the remaining count value until the finish line on the relay counter), for example, by saying, "It's the last section, but a reversal is possible!"

Note that a subtraction counter that is different from both the Ekiden counter and the rival counter and that can only perform subtraction may also be provided. For example, the count value of this subtraction counter is set to a predetermined value when a predetermined game state is entered, and the count value is subtracted based on game ball B entering a predetermined winning slot (which may be some or all of the winning slots included in the winning slots that are the target of the Ekiden counter payout and/or the winning slots that are the target of the rival counter payout, or it may be a winning slot other than these winning slots). Note that it is desirable that the count value of the subtraction counter is not necessarily subtracted when a ball enters the predetermined winning slot, but rather, is subtracted at a predetermined rate when the ball enters the predetermined winning slot. Counting by the subtraction counter ends when the count value reaches zero (or when a predetermined time has passed since it reached zero), or when a transition is made to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state.

During the relay race performance, a display showing the count value of the subtraction counter is further displayed, thereby displaying the count values of up to three counters, allowing the player to determine whether the game ball B is smoothly entering the various winning slots. The trigger for displaying the display showing the count value of the subtraction counter may be independent of the trigger for displaying the count values of the relay counter and the rival counter. This may result in a situation where only the subtraction counter display is displayed, a situation where a display showing the count value of the subtraction counter and a display showing the count value of the relay counter are displayed, a situation where a display showing the count value of the subtraction counter and a display showing the count value of the rival counter are displayed, or a situation where a display showing the count value of the subtraction counter, a display showing the count value of the relay counter, and a display showing the count value of the rival counter are displayed. The display showing the count value of the subtraction counter is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the count value indicated by the display reaches zero. Furthermore, if a predetermined performance is executed while the display showing the count value of the subtraction counter is displayed, the display may be temporarily suspended and then resumed when the predetermined performance is completed.

Note that, unlike the Ekiden counter and the rival counter, an addition counter may also be provided that is only capable of incrementing and is reset to zero upon a predetermined trigger. This addition counter, for example, indicates the number of times game ball B has entered a predetermined winning slot (this may be some or all of the winning slots included in the winning slots that are the target of the Ekiden counter payout and/or the winning slots that are the target of the rival counter payout, or it may be a different winning slot. It may also be the same winning slot as the winning slot corresponding to the ball that triggers the decrement of the decrement counter, or it may be a different winning slot). It is desirable that this addition counter and the decrement counter described above are not displayed simultaneously. Therefore, in the Ekiden presentation, the count values of up to three counters (the addition counter or one of the decrement counters described above, the Ekiden counter, and the rival counter) are displayed.

The rival 1640 running on the meter 1631 may be displayed together with a dedicated background image (a background image that can only be displayed when the rival 1640 running on the meter 1631 is displayed) (for example, even when the rival effect is not being executed). This allows the player to recognize the count value of the rival counter (even when the rival effect is not being executed). If the rival 1640 running on the meter 1631 is displayed together with the dedicated background image, for example, the dedicated background image and the rival 1640 running on the meter 1631 may be hidden after a predetermined time has passed.

For example, when a rival effect is being performed, it is advisable to execute an effect of the team's runner breaking through a section or an effect of the team's runner reaching a goal only when game ball B passes through a specified area (for example, gate portion 2003).

Figure 36 is a diagram showing another example of the relay station effect and section breakthrough effect included in the relay effect. In the example of Figure 36, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a movable body 311 resembling a sash (the movable body 311 may be attached inside the game board 5 or outside the game board 5, such as on a door frame). When the movable body 311 moves from its initial position, part or all of it may overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 (when overlapping, the movable body 311 is located in front of the effect display device 1600). Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the section breakthrough effect in Figure 31, and will omit explanations of similar points as appropriate.

In Figure 36(A), the same effect as in Figure 31(A) is performed. Note that in Figure 36(A), the movable body 311 is located in the initial position. In the example of Figure 36(A), when the movable body 311 is located in the initial position, the movable body 311 does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600, but when the movable body 311 is located in the initial position, part or all of the movable body 311 may overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Figure 36(B) shows the state when the relay station effect, which is part of the relay effect, has begun. Figure 36(B) is the same as Figure 31(B) except that the movable body 311 moves downward from its initial position and then overlaps with the top of the effect display device 1600, performing a provocative motion (a provocative motion that suggests the possibility of a section breakthrough effect, described below, occurring), and that the button image 1633 and gauge 1634 are not displayed.

In addition, in Figure 36 (B), a provocation effect display (for example, an aura may be displayed in a display area corresponding to the periphery of the movable body 311 performing the provocation) may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 along with the provocation action of the movable body 311. Also, in Figure 36 (B), the runner 1624 of Section 4 and the runner 1625 of Section 5 may be displayed in close-up (enlarged more than the runner 1624 displayed in Figure 36 (A)). Note that the provocation action of the movable body 311 ends after continuing for a predetermined period of time. By performing the provocation action of the movable body 311 in this way, the player can look forward to the execution of the completion action of the movable body 311, which will be described later.

In Figure 36 (C1), an effect is shown in which the handover of the sash 1632 fails. For example, if the count value of the relay counter fails to reach the value (4001) corresponding to the fifth section within a predetermined time (while the tilting motion of the movable body 311 continues) after the start of the relay station effect, or if the relay station effect starts but the value of the relay counter falls below the value corresponding to the next section by a predetermined value or more (e.g., 200 or more), an effect in which the handover of the sash 1632 fails, as shown in Figure 36 (C1). In Figure 36 (C1), a display is displayed indicating that the handover of the sash 1632 from the fourth section runner 1624 to the fifth section runner 1625 has failed, and the tilting motion of the movable body 311 has ended and it is in the process of returning to its initial position (it will eventually return to its initial position). When the performance of failing to hand over the sash 1632 in Figure 36 (C1) is performed, the relay station performance ends, and the runner 1624 of the fourth section is displayed at a position on the meter 1631 corresponding to the count value of the relay counter.

For example, if the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (4001) corresponding to the fifth section within a predetermined time (while the tilting motion of the movable body 311 continues) after the relay station performance begins, the performance will transition to either the section breakthrough performance shown in Figure 36 (C2) or Figure 36 (C3) according to a predetermined allocation.

In Figure 36 (C2), a section breakthrough effect is being performed. In Figure 36 (C2), in addition to the same effect as in Figure 36 (D), the tilting motion of the movable body 311 is interrupted and a completion motion (moving body 311 moves to the maximum movement position) is performed. By performing the completion motion of the movable body 311 in conjunction with the section breakthrough effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration at breaking through the section. Note that part or all of the movable body 311 that has moved to the maximum movement position in the completion motion may overlap with a message that suggests section breakthrough (the count value of the relay counter has reached the value corresponding to the next section), saying "Breakthrough! Start of Section 5!!".

In addition, as the movable body 311 performs the completion movement, a completion effect display (for example, an aura different from the teasing effect may be displayed in the display area corresponding to the periphery of the movable body 311 performing the completion movement), or the teasing effect may be displayed, or no effect may be displayed at all. If the display area for the completion effect overlaps with the display area for the message "Breakthrough! Start of Section 5!!", the display priority of the teasing effect may be higher or lower than the display priority of the message.

After performing the completion operation, the movable body 311, for example, stops at the maximum operation position for a predetermined period of time and then returns to its initial position. For example, when the movable body 311, which has performed the completion operation, begins to return to its initial position (or has completely returned to its initial position), the section breakthrough effect and relay station effect end.

In Figure 36 (C3), a section breakthrough effect is performed, and the tilting motion of the movable body 311 continues. In Figure 36 (C3), the center position of movement and the amount of up and down movement of the movable body 311 continuing the tilting motion may be the same as in Figure 36 (B), or may be different (in the example of Figure 36 (C3), the center position of movement of the movable body 311 performing the tilting motion has moved downward compared to Figure 36 (B)).

In addition, in Figure 36 (C3), the same display as in Figure 36 (B) continues for the fourth section runner 1624, the fifth section runner 1625, and the sash 1632, and a message is displayed suggesting that the section has been broken (the count value of the relay counter has reached the value corresponding to the next section), saying "We may break through!!" Note that while a message is displayed in both Figure 36 (C2) and Figure 36 (C3), the content of the message (display format) differs. Also, in Figure 36 (C3), part or all of the movable body 311 continuing the prodding motion may temporarily or permanently overlap the message "We may break through!!"

In addition, in Figure 36 (C3), a provocative effect display (for example, an aura may be displayed in a display area corresponding to the periphery of the movable body 311 performing the provocative action) may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 along with the provocative action of the movable body 311. This effect display may be displayed continuously from Figure 36 (B), or may start from Figure 36 (C3). In addition, when an effect display is displayed in Figure 36 (B), the effect display may end in Figure 36 (C3). Note that if the display area for the provocative effect and the display area for the message "We might break through!!" overlap, the display priority of the provocative effect may be higher or lower than the display priority of the message.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect in Figure 36 (C3) (i.e., since the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to breaking through the section), the effect transitions to that in Figure 36 (C2). Even after the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section, the player can be made to feel tense by continuing the tilting motion of the movable body 311 as in Figure 36 (C3). Furthermore, by continuing the tilting motion of the movable body 311 along with the message "We might break through!!" in Figure 36 (C3), the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation as if they are gaining a chance to break through the section. Furthermore, instead of the message "We might break through!!" in Figure 36 (C3), a message such as "Breakthrough confirmed?!" may be displayed. This allows a player whose tension has been building up due to the tilting motion of the movable body 311 to feel a sense of relief quickly, thereby easing the tension and creating a sense of surprise.

When transitioning from the presentation of FIG. 36(B) to the presentation of FIG. 36(C2) or FIG. 36(C3) (when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section), the display presentation of the presentation display device 1600 may interrupt the presentation of FIG. 36(B) and execute the presentation of FIG. 36(C2) or FIG. 36(C3). In other words, the display pattern being executed in the presentation of FIG. 36(B) may be interrupted (terminated) even if it is midway, and the transition may be made to the display presentation of the display pattern of FIG. 36(C2) or FIG. 36(C3).

Furthermore, when transitioning from the effect of Figure 36 (B) to the effect of Figure 36 (C2) or Figure 36 (C3) (when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section), if a light-emitting effect is being performed by lamps in association with the movement of movable body 311, the light emission by at least some of the lamps that emit light in that light-emitting effect may be interrupted, and at least some of those lamps may perform a light-emitting effect in association with the display of the message of Figure 36 (C2) or Figure 36 (C3).

Furthermore, when transitioning from the presentation of Figure 36 (B) to the presentation of Figure 36 (C2) or Figure 36 (C3) (when the count value of the ekiden counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section), if a sound (e.g., a sound effect) accompanying the movement of the movable body 311 is being output from the speaker 354, the sound accompanying the movement of the movable body 311 may be interrupted and a dedicated notification sound may be output indicating that the count value of the ekiden counter has reached the next section.

In addition, in Figure 36 (B), when an effect indicating that a bonus will be awarded to the player is being executed, if the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section and the game transitions to Figure 36 (C3), the effect will continue to be executed without interruption, but since the player will already have a sense of elation from completing the section, it is possible not to award the bonus corresponding to the effect.

In addition, since the movable body 311 is performing a tilting motion in Figure 36(B) or Figure 36(C3), the movable body 311 can transition from any position in the motion pattern of the tilting motion to the completion motion of Figure 36(C2). Note that when transitioning from Figure 36(B) or Figure 36(C3) to Figure 36(C2), the movable body 311 performing the tilting motion may first move to a predetermined position (for example, the motion center position of the tilting motion) before transitioning to the completion motion.

Also, instead of completing the movement of the movable body 311 in Figure 36 (C2), the movement of the movable body 311 may be stopped (by interrupting the tilting movement) at the position when transitioning from Figure 36 (B) or Figure 36 (C3) to Figure 36 (C2).

The movable body 311 has multiple motion patterns, including the tilting motion, completion motion, and motion returning to the initial position described above. However, it is desirable that there are more motion patterns that can be interrupted among the multiple motion patterns, so that the tilting motion is interrupted when transitioning from Figure 36 (B) or Figure 36 (C3) to Figure 36 (C2) (the completion motion is a motion pattern that cannot be interrupted).

A lamp may be provided on the movable body 311. The lamp on the movable body 311 emits light in a light pattern that corresponds to the operation pattern of the movable body 311, for example. That is, when the movable body 311 is performing a tilting operation, the lamp emits light in a pattern that corresponds to the tilting operation, and when the movable body 311 is performing a completion operation, the lamp may emit light in a pattern that corresponds to the completion operation, or the lamp may not emit light (may be turned off). Also, for example, when the movable body 311 returns to its initial position, the lamp may emit light in a pattern that corresponds to the operation of returning to the initial position, or the lamp may not emit light (may be turned off).

In addition, one or more lighting patterns for the lamp may be defined to correspond to each operation pattern of the movable body 311. For example, during the inciting operation of Figure 36 (B), it is unclear whether the count value of the relay counter will be able to reach the value corresponding to the next section, so the lamp may be illuminated in blue, and during the inciting operation of Figure 36 (C3), the count value of the relay counter has reached the value corresponding to the next section, so the lamp may be illuminated in red.

In Figure 36(B), when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section while the movable body 311 is performing a waving motion, there are cases where the display on the performance display device 1600 does not continue to be displayed (the runner, sash 1632, and message all change), as in the case of a transition to Figure 36(C2), or where at least a portion of the display on the performance display device 1600 continues to be displayed, as in the case of a transition to Figure 36(C3) (in Figure 36(C3), the display of runner 1624, runner 1625, and sash 1632 continues, but all displays may continue).In Figure 36(B), the movable body 311 may perform a movement pattern different from the waving motion, but it is desirable that when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section while performing the different movement pattern, there is always a transition to Figure 36(C2) (the display on the performance display device 1600 does not continue to be displayed). By changing the display pattern of the effect display device 1600 according to the movement pattern in this way, the player can enjoy predicting the upcoming effects from the movement of the movable body 311.

Note that while Figure 36 illustrates an example in which one movable body 311 operates, multiple movable bodies (e.g., including movable body 311 and a second movable body (not shown)) may also be operable. For example, in a relay station performance, if movable body 311 operates and the above-mentioned promotional effect is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the effect display associated with the movement of movable body 311 may be hidden. Also, for example, if the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section when the second movable body operates and the effect display associated with that operation is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the effect display may be hidden, or the message in Figures 36 (C2) and 36 (C3) may continue to be displayed with some of the display area overlapping, selected, for example, according to a predetermined allocation.

For example, among the winnings that result in a payout and are counted by the relay counter, a winning sound corresponding to a winning entry into the first winning entry slot may not be output at all, but if a winning entry into the second winning entry slot occurs when the movable body 311 is performing the tilting motion, a winning sound corresponding to that winning entry may be output, and if a winning entry into the third winning entry slot occurs when the movable body 311 is performing the completion motion, a winning sound corresponding to that winning entry may be output, etc. In this way, by outputting the winning sound at different times for each winning entry slot, players can enjoy playing by targeting different winning entries in order to hear the winning sounds.

When there is a transition from Figure 36(B) to Figure 36(C2) and from Figure 36(B) to Figure 36(C3), that is, when the value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section and movable body 311 continues to operate, it is advisable to output a special alarm sound indicating that the value corresponding to the next section has been reached. On the other hand, when there is a transition from Figure 36(B) to Figure 36(C1), that is, when the value of the relay counter does not reach the value corresponding to the next section and the operation of movable body 311 is interrupted and returns to the initial position, it is advisable to output a specific alarm sound (different from the special alarm).

For example, when movable body 311 is performing the flapping motion in FIG. 36(B), the flapping motion of FIG. 36(C3) may be continued only if game ball B passes through a predetermined area (e.g., gate portion 2003). In other words, when movable body 311 is performing the flapping motion in FIG. 36(B), if game ball B does not pass through the predetermined area and the relay counter value reaches the value corresponding to the next section, the section breakthrough effect of FIG. 36(C2) (i.e., a section breakthrough effect in which movable body 311 performs a completion motion) should always be performed.

Figures 37 and 38 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of a relay performance. In the examples of Figures 37 and 38, the game state (during non-jackpot play) includes a normal state and a high-probability state that is advantageous to the player. The high-probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special lottery is higher than in the normal state. For example, special lottery results that award jackpot play include a jackpot with high probability and a jackpot without high probability, and after the jackpot play obtained through a high-probability jackpot ends, the game transitions to the high-probability state.

In the examples of Figures 37 and 38, the pachinko machine 1 also has a lever (not shown) which is an operation unit different from the pressing operation unit 303. This lever is equipped with, for example, a sensor that can detect the operation of the lever (a predetermined operation by the player). The lever is also equipped with a vibration motor, which vibrates when the earthquake effect described below is being performed, causing the lever to vibrate. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail below, when the lever is operated in a high probability state (i.e., when detection is performed by a sensor attached to the lever), the game state falls from the high probability state to the normal state.

Figures 37 and 38 illustrate an example of a performance in which a high probability state falls to a normal state when a relay race performance is being performed. Figure 37(A) shows a high probability state, and the performance is the same as that of Figure 31(A), except that a mountain background 1645, an example of a background image displayed during a high probability state, is displayed.

Figures 37 (B1), 37 (C1), and 37 (D1) show examples of presentations in which the gaming state falls from a high-probability state to a normal state after an earthquake presentation. Figures 37 (B2), 37 (C2), and 37 (D2) show examples of presentations in which the gaming state falls from a high-probability state to a normal state without an earthquake presentation.

First, we will explain an example of a presentation in which the game state falls from a high probability state to a normal state after an earthquake presentation. Figure 37 (B1) shows a state in which the relay station presentation has begun while the game state remains high probability. In Figure 37 (B1), the count value of the relay counter has reached a value that is a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the 9th section (for example, 100 shots less). In Figure 37 (B1), a relay station presentation has begun, which indicates whether the sash 1632 will be passed from the 8th section runner 1628 to the 9th section runner 1629. Also, in Figure 37 (B1), the mountain background 1645 continues to be displayed.

Figure 37 (C1) shows a state in which an earthquake effect has started during a relay station effect. The earthquake effect is executed at a predetermined rate, for example, when a relay station effect is executed. When the earthquake effect starts, the lever vibrates. Also, when the earthquake effect starts, a hole appears in the meter 1631 at the feet of the runner 1628 who is about to pass the sash, creating the impression that the runner 1628 is about to fall. Also, when the earthquake effect starts, a message is displayed urging the player not to move the vibrating lever (because if the sensor attached to the lever detects this, the lever will fall back to its normal state). If the sensor attached to the lever detects this, the game state will fall back to its normal state, so the player can enjoy the operation of trying to hold down the vibrating lever and stop it from moving.

For example, if a predetermined time passes after the earthquake effect in Figure 37 (C1) starts without any detection by the sensor attached to the lever, the earthquake effect will end (i.e., the vibration of the lever will stop, the hole on the meter 1631 will be closed, and the runner 1628 will return to the meter 1631).

In Figure 38 (D1), the lever is operated in Figure 37 (C1), causing the game state to fall from the high probability state to the normal state. In Figure 38 (D1), an effect is produced in which the runner falls and returns to the fourth section. At this time, the count value of the relay counter may be updated to a value included in the range corresponding to the fourth section. Also, in Figure 38 (D1), the background image changes from a mountain background 1645 to a road background 1646, which is an example of a background image corresponding to the normal state. Also, in Figure 38 (D1), the background image may not be displayed (or a monochrome background image may be displayed) to avoid adding to the player's disappointment due to the fall to the normal state.

Also, when transitioning to Figure 38 (D1), the mountain background 1645 may be faded out in the upward direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and then the road background 1646 may be displayed by fading in from the top to the bottom of the effect display device. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the runner 1628 has fallen.

In addition, when transitioning to Figure 38 (D1), a sound associated with lever operation (i.e., a sound announcing that the gaming state has fallen from a high probability state to a normal state) may be output, or a lamp may light up in a lighting pattern associated with lever operation (i.e., a lighting pattern announcing that the gaming state has fallen from a high probability state to a normal state).

In addition, in Figure 38 (D1), decorative patterns and hold displays may be hidden to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game state has fallen back to normal (to make it easier to recognize the road background 1646, etc.).

Next, we will explain an example of a game state that falls from a high probability state to a normal state without going through an earthquake effect. For example, even if the lever is not operated in a high probability state, the game state will fall from a high probability state to a normal state when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section (for example, at a predetermined rate when the value corresponding to the next section is reached).

In Figure 37 (B2), the count value of the relay counter reaches the value (8001) corresponding to the 9th section, and the section breakthrough effect is performed in the relay station effect. In Figure 37 (B2), the runner 1629 in the 9th section is wearing a sash 1632. Also, in Figure 37 (B2), the game state is in a high probability state, so a mountain background 1645 is displayed.

In Figure 37 (C2), while the runner 1629 in the ninth section is running on the meter 1631, a cumulonimbus cloud 1647 is displayed, which is an example of a precursor display suggesting a fall to the normal state (a change in the game state). It is also advisable to output a sound (for example, a sound different (and lower volume) from the sound output in conjunction with the fall to the normal state in Figure 38 (D1)) in conjunction with the display of the cumulonimbus cloud 1647, or to light up a lamp in a lighting pattern (for example, a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern emitted in conjunction with the fall to the normal state in Figure 38 (D1)) in conjunction with the display of the cumulonimbus cloud 1647.

In Figure 37 (B2), the trigger for the game state to fall from the high probability state to the normal state has been met (the count value of the relay counter has reached the value corresponding to the 9th section), but in Figure 37 (C2), the game state remains in the high probability state, and after a predetermined time has passed, the game state will fall from the high probability state to the normal state.

In other words, when the lever is operated as shown in Figure 38 (D1), the sensor attached to the lever detects the game state and causes it to fall from the high probability state to the normal state at the time of detection (the ongoing presentation is interrupted and a transition to Figure 38 (D1) occurs). However, if it is determined that the game state will fall from the high probability state to the normal state based on the count value of the relay counter reaching a value corresponding to the next section, the game state will not fall from the high probability state to the normal state when the trigger is met (i.e., the ongoing presentation continues uninterrupted), but will fall after a predetermined time has passed. In this way, the game state may fall immediately or not, creating a sense of tension for the player.

Even when it is determined that the game state will fall from the high-probability state to the normal state when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, for example, a case in which the game state falls from the high-probability state to the normal state when the trigger is met, or a case in which the fall occurs after a predetermined time has passed, may be selected according to a predetermined allocation. In this way, even when it is determined that the game state will fall from the high-probability state to the normal state when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the game state may fall either immediately or not, further enhancing the effect of creating tension for the player. Even when it is determined that the game state will fall from the high-probability state to the normal state when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, and the game state falls from the high-probability state to the normal state when the trigger is met, it is desirable that the effect shown in FIG. 37 (C2) be executed (i.e., the game state may fall immediately to the normal state even when the cumulonimbus cloud 1647 is displayed).

It is desirable that cumulonimbus cloud 1647 has a higher display priority than other effect images (for example, effect images that have been continuously displayed since before cumulonimbus cloud 1647 was displayed). For example, in the example of Figure 37 (C2), cumulonimbus cloud 1647 is an important display that suggests a fall back to the normal state (a change in the game state), so although the display areas of cumulonimbus cloud 1647 and runner 1629 partially overlap, cumulonimbus cloud 1647 has a higher display priority.

In Figure 38 (D2), a predetermined time has passed since the count value of the relay counter reached the value (8001) corresponding to the 9th section, and the game state has fallen from the high probability state to the normal state (without operating the lever). In Figure 38 (D2), a display is displayed in which lightning 1648, which indicates the fall to the normal state (a display that is not displayed in Figure 38 (D1), where the state has fallen to the normal state by operating the lever), directly hits the runner 1629.

In addition, in Figure 38 (D2), the mountain background 1645 is not displayed (no background image is displayed) because the state has fallen back to the normal state. Note that in Figure 38 (D2), when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section, causing the state to fall back to the normal state, a background image different from the mountain background 1645 and the road background 1646 may be displayed to make it easier for the player to recognize that the state has fallen back to the normal state due to that event.

Furthermore, when transitioning to Figure 38 (D2), a sound may be output to notify that the gaming state has fallen back to the normal state, or a lamp may light up in a lighting pattern to notify that the gaming state has fallen back to the normal state.

It is desirable that the sound announcing that the game state has fallen back to normal when transitioning to Figure 38 (D1) is always output for at least a predetermined time, but it is desirable that the sound announcing that the game state has fallen back to normal when transitioning to Figure 38 (D2) is only output for that predetermined time. This makes it easier for a player who has operated the lever to recognize that the game state has fallen back to normal.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the lamp continue to illuminate in a light pattern indicating that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to Figure 38 (D1), and that the lamp continue to illuminate in a light pattern indicating that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to Figure 38 (D2), until a predetermined condition is met (for example, a transition to the high probability state has occurred again, operation of a predetermined operation unit has been detected, or the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been turned off). Furthermore, the predetermined condition may be different when transitioning to Figure 38 (D1) and when transitioning to Figure 38 (D2).

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 may be equipped with multiple lamps, including movable lamps, but it is desirable that the movable lamps be turned off when the lamps are lit in the light-emitting pattern indicating that the game state has fallen back to the normal state when transitioning to Figure 38 (D1), and when the lamps are lit in the light-emitting pattern indicating that the game state has fallen back to the normal state when transitioning to Figure 38 (D2). This is because if the movable lamps were to operate in the lit state, the player could mistakenly believe that they had become advantageous, even though the game state has fallen back to the normal state.

Note that some of the lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 can, for example, perform a light-emitting effect by illuminating in one of multiple modes during fluctuations, including a specific mode (e.g., illuminating in red) and a special mode (e.g., illuminating in white) that has a lower probability of awarding a more advantageous bonus to the player than the specific mode. However, when illuminating the lamps in a light-emitting pattern that notifies that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to Figure 38 (D1), and when illuminating the lamps in a light-emitting pattern that notifies that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to Figure 38 (D2), it is possible to illuminate lamps different from the selected lamps in the special mode, but it is preferable not to illuminate them in the specific mode. This is because if the different lamps were illuminated in the specific mode, there is a risk that the player may mistakenly believe that the game state has become advantageous to them, even though it has fallen to the normal state.

As mentioned above, at least some of the presentation aspects differ between Figure 38 (D1) and Figure 38 (D2). In other words, at least some of the presentation aspects that notify the player of a fall to normal state differ depending on the trigger for the fall. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the trigger for the fall to normal state.

In the example above, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the count value of the relay counter reached the value corresponding to the next section, the game state falls back to the normal state and the effect of Figure 38 (D2) is performed. However, it is also possible to have the game state fall back to the normal state and the effect of Figure 38 (D2) be performed when the series of effects currently being performed ends when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section. This increases the player's interest without unnaturally interrupting the series of effects currently being performed.

Even if an earthquake effect is not performed, if the lever is operated during a high-probability state, the game state will fall from the high-probability state to the normal state. In other words, when the lever is operated at any of the times shown in Figures 37(A), 37(B1), 37(B2), 37(C1), and 37(C2), the game state will fall from the high-probability state to the normal state and transition to the effect shown in Figure 38(D1). Also, when the lever is operated at the time shown in Figure 38(D2), the game state will remain in the normal state, but it is desirable to transition to the effect shown in Figure 38(D1). In particular, when the lever is operated at the time shown in Figure 37(C2), after the precursor display cumulonimbus cloud 1647 is displayed, an effect can be executed that notifies of a fall to the normal state using the effect shown in Figure 38(D1), rather than an effect that notifies of a fall to the normal state using the effect shown in Figure 38(D2).

Furthermore, in Figures 37 (C1) and 37 (C2), when game ball B passes through a predetermined area (e.g., gate portion 2003), the game state may fall from a high probability state to a normal state, for example, at a predetermined rate (when falling from Figure 37 (C1), it transitions to Figure 38 (D1), and when falling from Figure 37 (C2), it transitions to Figure 38 (D2)).

For example, as shown in Figure 38 (D1), when the game state falls to the normal state as a result of lever operation (or detection based on such), a still image is displayed, and as shown in Figure 38 (D2), when the game state falls to the normal state as a result of the count value of the relay counter reaching a predetermined value, the display may be either a moving image or a still image. In particular, by displaying a still image when the game state falls to the normal state as a result of lever operation, the player is made to strongly recognize that the game state has fallen due to their operation, and the player will be more careful not to operate the lever in high-probability states from the next time onwards.

For example, if a specified operation unit other than a lever is operated in a high-probability state (i.e., if detection is detected by a sensor attached to the specified operation unit), the game state will not fall from the high-probability state to the normal state, but a prompt message can be displayed urging the player to stop operating the specified operation unit (i.e., an operation that will cause detection by the sensor attached to the specified operation unit to stop). This allows the player to recognize that they should not carelessly operate any operation unit in a high-probability state. Note that if the display area of the prompt message overlaps with the display area of another effect image, it is desirable that the display priority of the prompt message be higher than the display priority of the other effect images.

In addition, if the specified operating unit other than a lever includes a first operating unit and a second operating unit, the display size of the prompt displayed when the first operating unit is operated and the sound output in conjunction with the prompt displayed, and the lighting pattern of the lamp that lights up in conjunction with the prompt displayed may be different when the second operating unit is operated in a high probability state.

For example, during a high probability state, the game state may fall back to the normal state and transition to the presentation of FIG. 38 (D1) only if the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section and game ball B passes through a predetermined area (e.g., gate section 2003). In other words, during a high probability state, if the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section without game ball B passing through the predetermined area, the presentation of FIG. 37 (C2) will be performed, but it is desirable that the game state not fall back to the normal state and transition to the presentation of FIG. 38 (D2).

[6. Basic specifications for production]
This chapter explains the various effects that are performed during fluctuation and non-fluctuating periods.

[6-1. Basic specifications for the production of this chapter]
39 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of a fluctuation pattern table. The fluctuation pattern table 390 is stored, for example, in the ROM built into the main control. In the above example, an example was explained in which different fluctuation pattern tables were referenced depending on whether the jackpot flag and the reach flag were set, but all of the fluctuation patterns when the jackpot flag and the reach flag are set, the fluctuation patterns when the jackpot flag is not set but the reach flag is set, and the fluctuation patterns when the jackpot flag and the reach flag are not set are defined in the fluctuation pattern table 390 of FIG.

The fluctuation pattern table 390 indicates, for example, a fluctuation pattern number 3901, a fluctuation pattern name 3902, whether or not there is a pseudo consecutive win 3903, an expected level 3904, a reach effect as a win/lose effect 3905, a final stopping pattern for the middle symbol 3906, allocation at the time of win 3907, allocation for losses (other than Hold 4) 3908, and allocation for losses (Hold 4) 3909.

The fluctuation pattern number 3901 is a number that identifies the fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern name 3902 indicates the name of the fluctuation pattern. Note that the "reduced fluctuation" and "normal fluctuation" fluctuation patterns are not selected during a jackpot, and no reach effects are executed when these fluctuation patterns fluctuate. Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the "reduced fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (for example, approximately 1 to 5 seconds) is shorter than the fluctuation time of the "normal fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (for example, approximately 10 to 15 seconds).

When the variation pattern "normal reach" changes, a "normal reach" is executed as a reach effect, and when the variation pattern "normal long reach" changes, a "normal long reach" is executed as a reach effect. A "normal reach" as a reach effect is a reach effect that does not involve switching the background display on the effect display device 1600, while a "normal long reach" as a reach effect is a reach effect that involves switching the background display on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, the execution time of a "normal long reach" as a reach effect is longer than that of a "normal reach" as a reach effect, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher.

When the variation patterns "SP Reach 1," "SP Reach 2," and "SP Reach 3" change, an SP Reach is executed as the reach effect. An SP Reach is a reach that involves switching the background display on the effect display device 1600, and is a reach that has a higher chance of resulting in a jackpot than the "Normal Reach" and "Normal Long Reach" reach effects. The shooting gallery reach, shark fishing reach, ring toss reach, goldfish scooping reach, dart reach, bell toss reach, and final battle reach are all examples of SP reaches.

Pseudo consecutive hits 3903 indicates whether or not pseudo consecutive hits will be performed during the variation of the corresponding variation pattern, and if pseudo consecutive hits are performed, the number of pseudo consecutive hits that will be performed during that variation. "No pseudo" in pseudo consecutive hits 3903 indicates that pseudo consecutive hits will not be performed, and "Pseudo 2" and "Pseudo 3" indicate that two consecutive pseudo consecutive hits and three consecutive pseudo consecutive hits will be performed, respectively.

The pseudo consecutive effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns are changed and the action of ending the decorative pattern change is executed multiple times during a single change of the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device. "Ending the decorative pattern change" refers to, for example, a mode in which some or all of the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped, a mode in which the player is made to perceive that the decorative pattern change has temporarily ended, or a mode in which a pseudo consecutive pattern (a pattern that, when stopped, confirms that a pseudo consecutive effect will be executed) stops on some of the decorative patterns.

A pseudo-consecutive effect in which the action is performed N times (N is a natural number greater than or equal to 1) is called an N-consecutive pseudo-consecutive effect, and the Mth decorative pattern change (M is a natural number greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to N) in an N-consecutive pseudo-consecutive effect is called the Mth pseudo-consecutive effect. Furthermore, an effect that suggests to the player that the action may be performed again during a single change of the first special pattern display or second special pattern display, but in which the action is not actually performed again, is also called a "pseudo-fake effect."

When a pseudo consecutive display occurs or continues, that is, when it is determined that the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the decorative pattern change will be executed again during a single change of the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device, the peripheral control MPU may stop a pseudo consecutive pattern (for example, a pattern indicated by text such as "Continued!") on at least one of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern.

For example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, the left decorative symbol, center decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are all odd numbers or all even numbers, and no reach has occurred) may be considered a pseudo consecutive symbol. A pseudo false effect may be executed, for example, when the effect outline is "normal variation." Furthermore, even in a variation pattern in which "Pseudo 2" is executed, for example, a pseudo false effect may be executed that suggests the occurrence of a third pseudo consecutive effect in "Pseudo 3."

When a variation pattern that allows pseudo consecutive effects to be executed is selected, the content of the pseudo consecutive effects is selected so that the occurrence rate is No pseudo > Pseudo 2 > Pseudo 3, and the expected probability of a jackpot is No pseudo < Pseudo 2 < Pseudo 3. Hereinafter, pseudo consecutive effects will also be simply referred to as pseudo consecutive effects.

Expectation level 3904 indicates the likelihood of a jackpot in a variation pattern in which a reach effect is executed, with the greater the number of stars, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. Reach effect 3905, as a win/loss effect, indicates a reach effect that ultimately notifies a win or loss in a variation pattern in which a reach effect is executed.

The SP reaches that can be executed in variation pattern "SP Reach 1," namely the shooting reach, shark fishing reach, and ring toss reach, all have the same jackpot expectation of 3 stars. Furthermore, for the SP reaches that can be executed in variation pattern "SP Reach 2," they are selected in the following order of occurrence: Goldfish scooping reach (2 stars) > Dart reach (4 stars) > Bell toss reach (5 stars), with jackpot expectation rates of Goldfish scooping reach (2 stars) < Dart reach (4 stars) < Bell toss reach (5 stars). In other words, in variation patterns "SP Reach 1" and "SP Reach 2," the fewer stars an SP reach has, the higher its appearance rate, and the more stars it has, the higher its expectation rate.

For example, even with Dart Reach (4 stars), the jackpot expectation may change depending on whether or not a pseudo-link is used, or the number of times. For example, the jackpot expectation may be higher when Dart Reach (4 stars) is selected with Pseudo 2 than when Dart Reach (4 stars) is selected without a pseudo-link. However, although the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether or not a pseudo-link is used, or the number of times, it is preferable for the jackpot expectation to be displayed as 4 stars when the Dart Reach (4 stars) title is displayed (in other words, it is not influenced by the preview displayed before the Dart Reach (4 stars) is executed). However, there are multiple ways in which the Dart Reach (4 stars) title is displayed, each with a different jackpot expectation, and the number of stars may be changed to correspond to the way the mode selected from the multiple ways is displayed.

In addition, the Bell Throw Reach (5 stars) in the variation pattern "SP Reach 2" may be selectable only during a jackpot variation; in other words, when the Bell Throw Reach (5 stars) is executed, it is confirmed that a jackpot has been won. In addition, the variation pattern of "SP Reach 3", whose expected degree 3904 is 4.5 stars, may also be selectable only during a jackpot variation; in other words, when the Final Battle Reach (4.5 stars) is executed, it is confirmed that a jackpot has been won.

The final stopping pattern 3906 of the middle symbol indicates the middle decorative symbol that stops at the end of the fluctuation of the corresponding fluctuation pattern. The "non-reach symbol combination," which is the final stopping pattern of the middle symbol in the "shortened fluctuation" and "normal fluctuation" fluctuation patterns, indicates that the decorative symbol stops without forming a reach state. The "±1 symbol" included in the final stopping pattern of the middle symbol in a fluctuation pattern in which a reach effect is executed indicates that after the decorative symbol stops in a reach state, the middle decorative symbol that continues to fluctuate until the end stops after passing one reach state decorative symbol or one before the reach state decorative symbol (the stopping pattern when missing).

The "same pattern" included in the final stopping pattern of the middle pattern in a variation pattern in which a reach effect is executed indicates that after the decorative pattern stops in a reach state, the middle decorative pattern that continues to change until the end will stop with the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the reach state (the pattern that stops when a jackpot occurs). Note that in a variation in which "same pattern" is selected, the decorative pattern that continues to change until the end may appear to have passed one decorative pattern in the reach state or stopped just before it, and then the decorative pattern may stop with the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the reach state.

Allocation at hit 3907 indicates the allocation of the fluctuation pattern selected in a fluctuation where the jackpot flag is set. Allocation for misses (other than hold 4) 3908 indicates the allocation of the fluctuation pattern selected in a fluctuation where the number of reserved memories of special random numbers has not reached the upper limit (4) at the start of the fluctuation and the jackpot flag is not set. Allocation for misses (hold 4) 3909 indicates the allocation of the fluctuation pattern selected in a fluctuation where the number of reserved memories of special random numbers has reached the upper limit (4) at the end of the previous fluctuation and the jackpot flag is not set.

[6-2. Overview of reach effects]
Below, we will explain each of the reach effects 3905 as winning or losing effects.

[6-2-1. Normal Reach]
In a normal reach, two seconds after the reach state is formed by the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, a symbol that is -3 relative to the reach symbol is temporarily stopped as a center decorative symbol (for example, if the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol form a reach state with "7", the center decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at "4" (=7-3)). After that, the center decorative symbol is slowly fluctuated and stopped at a symbol ±1 relative to the reach symbol (in the case of a miss fluctuation) or the same symbol (in the case of a jackpot fluctuation).

In addition, in a variation in which any of the SP reaches is executed, it is preferable that a normal reach is executed first, and that normal reach develops into the SP reach. Specifically, for example, in the slow fluctuation of the middle decorative symbol in the normal reach, the display on the effect display device 1600 is whited out without stopping the middle decorative symbol at a +1 symbol relative to the reach symbol.

Then, during this whiteout, each decorative pattern changes into a reach decorative pattern and moves to the top left or top right of the display area of the effect display device 1600, after which the whiteout is released, the reach title of the selected SP reach is displayed, and the SP reach effect is executed. Note that non-reach decorative patterns are, for example, composed of a decorative display including a character and numbers displayed superimposed on the decorative display, and reach decorative patterns are, for example, composed of a decorative display without a character and numbers displayed superimposed on the decorative display.

Note that an overview of each SP reach, such as the shooting reach, will be provided later, but in the explanation of the overview of the SP reach below, the explanation of the presentation leading up to the display of the SP reach title will be omitted.

[6-2-2. Normal long reach]
In a normal long reach, similar to a normal reach, two seconds after a reach state is formed by the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, a symbol that is -3 relative to the reach symbol is temporarily stopped as a middle decorative symbol, and then the middle decorative symbol is slowly fluctuated and temporarily stopped at a symbol that is +1 relative to the reach symbol. Then, the middle decorative symbol is rapidly fluctuated, and the background on the performance display device 1600 is changed to a background for a long reach. Two seconds after the background on the performance display device 1600 is changed to a background for a long reach, a symbol that is -3 relative to the reach symbol is temporarily stopped as a middle decorative symbol. Then, the middle decorative symbol is slowly fluctuated and stopped at a symbol that is ±1 relative to the reach symbol (in the case of a miss fluctuation) or the same symbol (in the case of a jackpot fluctuation).

[6-2-3. Shooting Reach]
In a shooting reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in which a character loads a cork into a shooting gun and shoots at it. In addition, in a shooting reach during a jackpot variation, an effect is displayed in which the target hit by the fired cork falls, and in a shooting reach during a miss variation, an effect is displayed in which the target hit by the fired cork does not fall.

A specific example of a shooting range reach effect will be explained. First, the effect display device 1600 displays a platform on which two (or more) corks have been placed, and an effect is performed in which a character loads one of the two corks into a shooting range gun. The two corks placed on the platform can be a combination of a white cork and a red cork, a combination of a red cork and a red cork, or a combination of a red cork and a gold cork. The appearance rates of the two corks placed on the platform are as follows: a combination of a white cork and a red cork > a combination of a red cork and a red cork > a combination of a red cork and a gold cork. Furthermore, the selection rates of the corks loaded into the shooting range gun by the character are white > red > gold, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the corks loaded into the shooting range gun is white < red < gold.

After the character has loaded one of the corks into the shooting gun, a target scope is displayed, for example, to select one of two (or more) targets displayed on the display device 1600. The two targets that appear are either a combination of a white target (heavy) and a red target (light), a combination of red targets and red targets, or a combination of a red target and a gold target (even lighter than the red target). The appearance rates of the two targets are as follows: white target and red target combination > red target and red target combination > red target and gold target combination. The selection rates of the final target are white > red > gold, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the selected target is white < red < gold.

Once a target is selected, the effect display device 1600 displays a close-up of the trigger of the shooting gun and an effect of the character pulling the trigger. A cork is then fired, hitting the selected target, and an effect is performed to tease whether the target will fall. After a predetermined time has passed since the start of the teasing effect, an effect is performed in which the target falls or does not fall. Note that an effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the teasing effect, and an effect in which the target falls or does not fall may be executed when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without any operation being detected.

[6-2-4. Shark Fishing Reach]
In the shark fishing reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect is produced in which a character fishes up one of two shark dolls on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the shark fishing reach in a jackpot variation, an effect is produced in which, when the piece of paper placed in the mouth of the fished shark doll is opened, it becomes recognizable that the word "first prize" is written, and in the shark fishing reach in a loss variation, an effect is produced in which, when the piece of paper placed in the mouth of the fished shark doll is opened, it becomes recognizable that the word "loss" is written.

A specific example of the shark fishing reach effect will be explained below. First, the effect display device 1600 displays a display showing two (or more) shark dolls placed on the ground, and an effect is performed in which the character decides to reel in one of the two shark dolls. The two shark dolls that appear are either a combination of a white shark doll and a red shark doll, a combination of a red shark doll and a red shark doll, or a combination of a red shark doll and a gold shark doll. The appearance rates of these two shark dolls are as follows: a combination of a white shark doll and a red shark doll > a combination of a red shark doll and a red shark doll > a combination of a red shark doll and a gold shark doll. Furthermore, the selection rates of shark dolls that the character reels in are white > red > gold, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the shark dolls reeled in by the character is white < red < gold.

Once the shark figurine that the character will catch has been decided, the character will fish it out and take out the folded piece of paper that was in the shark figurine's mouth. The piece of paper will be displayed in either white, red, or gold (multiple colors). The selection rate of the pieces of paper is white > red > gold, and the expected probability of winning indicated by the pieces of paper is white < red < gold.

Next, a fanning effect is performed in which the character slowly opens the folded piece of paper. After a predetermined time has passed since the fanning effect began, a fanning effect is performed in which the words "First Prize" and "Loser" are recognizable on the unfolded piece of paper. Note that a valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the fanning effect, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without any operation being detected, a fanning effect may be performed in which the words "First Prize" and "Loser" are recognizable on the unfolded piece of paper.

[6-2-5. Quoits Reach]
In a quoits reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect in which a character throws a quoit is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In a quoits reach in a jackpot variation, an effect in which a ring is passed through a target stick is displayed, and in a quoits reach in a loss variation, an effect in which the ring falls to the ground without being passed through the target stick is displayed.

A specific example of a ring toss reach effect will be explained. First, a table with two (or more) rings placed on it is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an effect is performed in which a character selects one of the two rings. The two rings placed on the table will be a combination of small and large rings, a combination of large and large rings, or a combination of large and extra-large rings. The appearance rates of the two rings placed on the table are in the order of small and large rings > large and large rings > large and extra-large rings. Furthermore, the order of ring selection rates by characters is small rings > large rings > extra-large rings, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the ring selected by the character is small rings < large rings < extra-large rings.

After the character selects one of the rings, a target scope is displayed, for example, to select one of two (or more) targets (sticks standing on a platform) displayed on the effect display device 1600. The two targets that appear are either a combination of a thick stick and a thin stick, a combination of a thin stick and a thin stick, or a combination of a thin stick and an extra-thin stick. The appearance rates of the two targets are in the order of a combination of a thick stick and a thin stick > a combination of a thin stick and a thin stick > a combination of a thin stick and an extra-thin stick. The selection rate of the final target that is determined is in the order of a thick stick > a thin stick > an extra-thin stick, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined target is in the order of a thick stick < a thin stick < an extra-thin stick.

Once one ring and one target have been selected, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect in which the character throws the selected ring at the selected target. After that, a provocative effect is displayed in which the ring spins around at the end of the target pole. After a predetermined time has passed since the start of the provocative effect, an effect is displayed in which the ring is threaded through the target pole, or the ring falls to the ground without being threaded through the target pole. Note that an effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the provocative effect, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without any operation being detected, an effect in which the ring is threaded through the target pole, or the ring falls to the ground without being threaded through the target pole may be executed.

[6-2-6. Goldfish scooping reach]
In a goldfish scooping reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect in which a character scoops up goldfish is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in a goldfish scooping reach in a jackpot variation, an effect is displayed in which the goldfish scooped by the character falls into a cup, and in a goldfish scooping reach in a loss variation, an effect is displayed in which the goldfish scooped by the character falls back into the tank without falling into the cup.

A specific example of the Goldfish Scooping Reach effect will be described. First, the effect display device 1600 displays a table on which two (or more) poi are placed, and an effect is performed in which a character selects one of the two poi. The two poi placed on the table are either a combination of a paper poi and a monaka poi, a combination of a monaka poi and a monaka poi, or a combination of a monaka poi and a thick monaka poi. The appearance rates of the two poi placed on the table are: a combination of a paper poi and a monaka poi > a combination of a monaka poi and a monaka poi > a combination of a monaka poi and a thick monaka poi. Furthermore, the selection rates of the poi by the character are: paper poi > monaka poi > thick monaka poi, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the poi selected by the character is: paper poi < monaka poi < thick monaka poi.

After the character selects one of the poi, a target scope is displayed, for example, to determine one of two (or more) goldfish in the tank displayed on the display device 1600. The two goldfish that appear are either a black goldfish (large Demekin) and a red goldfish (small goldfish), a red goldfish and a red goldfish, or a red goldfish and a goldfish (smaller than the red goldfish). The appearance rates of the two goldfish are as follows: black goldfish and red goldfish > red goldfish and red goldfish > red goldfish and gold goldfish. The selection rate of the final goldfish is black goldfish > red goldfish > gold goldfish, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined goldfish is black goldfish < red goldfish < goldfish.

Once one scoop and one goldfish have been selected, the display device 1600 displays an effect in which a character uses the selected scoop to dramatically scoop up the selected goldfish from the tank, causing the goldfish to fly high into the air. A stirring effect is then displayed to see if the falling goldfish will land in the cup. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the stirring effect began, an effect is displayed in which the goldfish enters the cup, or returns to the tank without entering the cup. Note that an effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the stirring effect, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without any operation being detected, an effect in which the goldfish enters the cup, or returns to the tank without entering the cup, may be displayed.

[6-2-7. Dart Reach]
In a dart reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect in which a character throws darts is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in a dart reach during a jackpot variation, an effect is displayed in which the dart thrown by the character hits the center area of the dartboard, and in a dart reach during a miss variation, an effect is displayed in which the dart thrown by the character hits an area away from the center area of the dartboard.

A specific example of a dart reach effect will be described. First, the effect display device 1600 displays a table on which two (or more) darts are placed, and an effect is performed in which a character selects one of the two darts. The two darts placed on the table are either a combination of a thick-tipped dart and a thin-tipped dart, a combination of a thin-tipped dart and a thin-tipped dart, or a combination of a thin-tipped dart and a very thin-tipped dart. The appearance rates of these two darts are as follows: a combination of a thick-tipped dart and a thin-tipped dart > a combination of a thin-tipped dart and a thin-tipped dart > a combination of a thin-tipped dart and a very thin-tipped dart. The selection rates of the darts ultimately determined are thick-tipped darts > thin-tipped darts > very thin-tipped darts, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined darts is thick-tipped darts < thin-tipped darts < very thin-tipped darts.

After the character selects one of the darts, a target scope is displayed, for example, to select one of the two (or more) dartboards displayed on the effect display device 1600. The two dartboards that appear are either a combination of a dartboard with a small central region and a dartboard with a large central region, a combination of a dartboard with a large central region and a dartboard with a large central region, or a combination of a dartboard with a large central region and a dartboard with an extra-large central region. The appearance rates of the two dartboards are as follows: a combination of a dartboard with a small central region and a dartboard with a large central region > a combination of a dartboard with a large central region and a dartboard with a large central region > a combination of a dartboard with a large central region and a dartboard with an extra-large central region. Furthermore, the selection rate of the dartboards that are ultimately determined is in the order of dartboards with a small central area > dartboards with a large central area > dartboards with an extra-large central area, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined dartboards is in the order of dartboards with a small central area < dartboards with a large central area < dartboards with an extra-large central area.

Once one dart and one dartboard have been selected, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect in which a character throws the selected dart at the selected dartboard. Then, a strong wind causes the thrown dart to gradually drift away from the center, followed by a provocative effect in which the dart temporarily stops. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the provocative effect began, an effect is displayed in which the dart lands in the center of the dartboard, or in an area off the center of the dartboard. Note that an effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the provocative effect, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without any operation being detected, an effect in which the dart lands in the center of the dartboard, or in an area off the center of the dartboard, may be executed.

[6-2-8. Bell Throw Reach]
In a bell throw reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect of a character throwing a bell into a ring is performed on the effect display device 1600. In a bell throw reach during a jackpot variation, an effect is performed in which the bell thrown by the character enters the ring, and in a bell throw reach during a loss variation, an effect is performed in which the bell thrown by the character flies out of the ring and falls to the ground.

A specific example of the presentation of a bell-throwing reach will be explained below. First, the presentation display device 1600 displays a table with two (or more) bells placed on it, and a presentation is presented in which a character selects one of the two bells. The two bells placed on the table will be a combination of a white bell and a red bell, a combination of a red bell and a red bell, or a combination of a red bell and a gold bell. The appearance rates of these two bells are as follows: white bell and red bell > red bell and red bell > red bell and gold bell. The final selection rates for the bells are white bell > red bell > gold bell, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the selected bells is white bell < red bell < gold bell.

After the character selects one of the bells, a target scope is displayed, for example, to determine one of two (or more) rings displayed on the display device 1600. The two rings that appear are either a combination of small and large rings, a combination of large and large rings, or a combination of large and extra-large rings. The appearance rates of these two rings are as follows: a combination of small and large rings > a combination of large and large rings > a combination of large and extra-large rings. The selection rates of the final rings are small rings > large rings > extra-large rings, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined rings is small rings < large rings < extra-large rings.

Once one bell and one ring have been selected, the effect display device 1600 will display an effect in which a character throws the selected bell into the selected ring. After that, a provocative effect will be displayed in which the thrown bell spins inside the ring and looks as if it is about to fly out. After a predetermined time has passed since the start of the provocative effect, an effect will be displayed in which the bell enters the ring, or the bell flies out of the ring and falls to the ground. Note that an effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the provocative effect, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without any operation being detected, an effect in which the bell enters the ring, or the bell flies out of the ring and falls to the ground may be executed.

[6-2-9. Final Battle Reach]
In a final battle reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect is produced in which an ally character battles an enemy character on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in a final battle reach in a big win variation, an effect is produced in which the enemy character is blown away by an attack by the ally character, and in a final battle reach in a loss variation, an effect is produced in which the enemy character withstands the attack by the ally character without being blown away.

A specific example of the final battle reach effect will be described. First, the effect display device 1600 performs an effect to determine the enemy character that will be the opponent of the ally character. In this effect, a weak enemy character is displayed for one second, a medium enemy character is displayed for one second, and a strong enemy character is displayed for one second, after which the display quickly switches between the weak enemy character, the medium enemy character, and the strong enemy character, and finally stops on the display of one of the enemy characters, determining the enemy character that will be the opponent of the ally character. The selection rate of the determined enemy characters is strong enemy character > medium enemy character > weak enemy character, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined enemy characters is strong enemy character < medium enemy character < weak enemy character.

Once the enemy character has been determined, the effect display device 1600 transitions to an attack scene of the ally character, in which the ally character launches an attack on the enemy character that has been determined from among weak, medium, and strong attacks. The attack selection rates determined are weak attack > medium attack > strong attack, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined attacks is weak attack < medium attack < strong attack.

When an ally character attacks, an effect is shown in which the enemy character endures the attack. After that, a provocative effect is shown in which the display is temporarily paused. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the provocative effect, an effect is shown in which the enemy character is blown away, or an effect in which the enemy character endures without being blown away. Note that an effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the provocative effect, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without any operation being detected, an effect in which the enemy character is blown away, or an effect in which the enemy character endures without being blown away may be executed.

In the attack scene of the final battle reach, an ally character will attack an enemy character using a weapon. If the reach execution preview effect described below is executed before the final battle reach, the weapon that the ally character will use in the final battle reach will be announced in advance in the reach execution preview effect. However, if the reach execution preview effect is not executed before the final battle reach, the player will only be able to recognize the weapon that the ally character will use when the attack scene switches to that scene.

[6-3. Presentation pattern when SP Reach variation pattern is selected]
Below, we will explain the presentation patterns when the variation pattern "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", or "SP Reach 3" is selected. When the variation pattern "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", or "SP Reach 3" is selected, it is allocated to execute one of the presentation patterns of the basic pattern, rare pattern, or retry pattern according to a predetermined allocation.

As a general rule, the preview effect corresponding to the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" is the Reach selection preview effect described below, the preview effect corresponding to the variation pattern "SP Reach 2" is the Reach promotion preview effect described below, and the preview effect corresponding to the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is the Reach execution preview effect described below.

When a basic pattern is selected, a preview effect corresponding to the determined variation pattern is performed, and then a reach effect is executed as a win/loss effect for that variation pattern, or a reach effect is executed as a win/loss effect for that variation pattern without a preview effect corresponding to the determined variation pattern being performed.

When a rare pattern is selected, a preview effect corresponding to the determined variation pattern and a preview effect different from the preview effect corresponding to that variation pattern are displayed in each of the two divided display areas (for example, a display area divided into two, top and bottom) of the effect display device 1600 (with at least a portion of the display periods of the two preview effects overlap), and then a reach effect is executed as a win/lose effect for that variation pattern.

Details will be given later, but for example, if a rare pattern is selected when it has been decided that variation pattern "SP Reach 1" will be executed, the reach selection preview effect, which is a preview effect corresponding to variation pattern "SP Reach 1," and either the reach promotion preview effect or reach execution preview effect, which are preview effects corresponding to variation pattern "SP Reach 2" or variation pattern "SP Reach 3," will be displayed and the preview effects will be executed (two preview effects will be displayed), but after the execution of the two displayed preview effects has finished, the preview effect that does not correspond to the decided reach effect (in this case, the reach selection preview effect) will be hidden, and the reach effect selected by the reach selection preview effect, which is a preview effect corresponding to variation pattern "SP Reach 1," will be executed.

When a retry pattern is selected, an SP reach effect of one of the variation patterns "SP Reach 1," "SP Reach 2," or "SP Reach 3" is executed, and a retry effect is executed during the reach effect, after which the SP reach effect (a reach effect as a win/lose effect) for the determined variation pattern is executed.

For example, if the "SP Reach 1" variation pattern has been determined as the reach effect for the win/loss effect and a retry pattern is selected, the SP reaches in the "SP Reach 2" variation pattern, such as the Goldfish Scooping Reach (2 stars), Dart Reach (4 stars), or Bell Throwing Reach (5 stars), or the SP reaches in the "SP Reach 3" variation pattern, such as the Final Battle Reach (4.5 stars), may be executed partway through, and after the retry effect is executed, one of the reach effects (all 3 stars) may be executed as the win/loss effect in the "SP Reach 1" variation pattern. In other words, the reach effect as the win/loss effect may have fewer stars indicating the likelihood of a jackpot than the SP reach effect that was executed partway through (i.e., the player may perceive the likelihood of a jackpot as having decreased partway through the effect).

Below, we will explain examples of the effects for each of the basic pattern, rare pattern, and retry pattern.

[6-3-1. Basic Pattern]
The effects of the basic pattern when the variable pattern "SP Reach 1" is selected will be explained. In this case, first, whether or not to execute a reach selection notice effect is determined by lottery based on a predetermined allocation. If it is decided not to execute a reach selection notice effect, a determined number of pseudo consecutive wins are executed, and then one of the reach effects as a winning/losing effect corresponding to "SP Reach 1" is executed via the same effects as normal reach. Note that which of the shooting reach, shark fishing reach, or ring toss reach, which is the reach effect as a winning/losing effect when the reach selection notice effect is not executed, is executed, for example, by lottery based on equal allocation.

If it is decided to execute a reach selection notice performance, the determined number of pseudo consecutive wins will be executed, and then the reach selection notice performance will be executed. As will be explained in more detail below, the reach performance to be executed as a winning or losing performance is selected in the reach selection notice performance (selectable by the player): shooting reach, shark fishing reach, or ring toss reach. Once the reach selection notice performance has ended, the reach performance to be executed as a winning or losing performance selected in the reach selection notice performance will be executed.

We will now explain the basic pattern presentation when the variation pattern "SP Reach 2" is selected. In this case, first, the reach presentation used to determine whether to win or lose is a goldfish scooping reach, a dart reach, or a bell throwing reach, which will be executed by lottery based on a predetermined allocation (this allocation is determined so that the expected probability of a jackpot is goldfish scooping reach < dart reach < bell throwing reach, and so that the appearance rates are goldfish scooping reach > dart reach > bell throwing reach).

Next, a lottery based on a predetermined allocation determines whether or not to execute a reach promotion preview effect. If it is decided not to execute a reach promotion preview effect, a determined number of pseudo consecutive wins are executed, and then the same effects as a normal reach are executed, followed by the reach determined as the reach effect for the winning or losing effect.

If it is decided to execute a reach promotion notice effect, the decided number of pseudo consecutive wins will be executed, and then the reach promotion notice effect will be executed. Note that, as will be explained in detail later, the presentation pattern of the reach promotion notice effect differs depending on the reach decided as the reach effect for the win/loss effect (if it is decided that a goldfish scooping reach will be executed, the reach promotion notice effect will be executed in a 4-second presentation pattern; if it is decided that a dart reach will be executed, the reach promotion notice effect will be executed in a 5-second presentation pattern; and if it is decided that a bell throwing reach will be executed, the reach promotion notice effect will be executed in a 6-second presentation pattern). Once the reach promotion notice effect has ended, the reach decided as the reach effect for the win/loss effect will be executed.

The following explains the basic pattern presentation when the variable pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected. First, a lottery based on a predetermined allocation determines whether or not to execute a reach execution notice presentation. If it is decided not to execute a reach execution notice presentation, a determined number of pseudo consecutive hits are executed, then a presentation similar to a normal reach is followed by a final battle reach presentation, which is a reach presentation that corresponds to "SP Reach 3" and determines whether or not a win occurs.

In the final battle reach, which will be described in more detail below, an ally character selected from multiple characters battles an enemy character equipped with head armor selected from multiple head armors, body armor selected from multiple body armors, foot armor selected from multiple foot armors, and a weapon selected from multiple weapons (silver sword, gold sword, and rainbow sword). In the final battle reach when the reach execution preview effect is not executed, the ally character selected by lottery based on equal allocation is equipped with head armor, body armor, and foot armor determined by lottery based on equal allocation. In the final battle reach when the reach execution preview effect is not executed, the weapon equipped by the ally character is determined by lottery based on a predetermined allocation (the allocation is set so that the expected probability of a jackpot is silver sword < gold sword < rainbow sword, and the appearance rate is silver sword > gold sword > rainbow sword).

If it is decided to execute a reach execution preview performance, the decided number of pseudo-consecutive hits will be executed, and then the reach execution preview performance will be executed. As will be explained in more detail below, in the reach execution preview performance, the player can select the ally character that will appear in the final battle reach, as well as the head armor, body armor, and foot armor that will be equipped by that ally character. Also, in the reach execution preview performance, the weapon that will be equipped by that ally character in the final battle reach is determined by lottery based on a predetermined allocation (for example, the same as the weapon allocation in the final battle reach when the reach execution preview performance is not executed). After the reach execution preview performance ends, the final battle reach is executed, using the ally character, head armor, body armor, foot armor, and weapon determined in the reach execution preview performance.

Note that a reach execution notice effect may also be displayed in a variation pattern in which a final battle reach is not executed. Specifically, for example, when the variation pattern "normal long reach" is selected upon a miss, and pseudo 2 or pseudo 3 is selected, a reach execution notice effect is displayed with a predetermined probability. In this case, the reach execution notice effect begins, for example, when the number of pseudo consecutive wins selected from pseudo 2 or pseudo 3 ends. Also, in this reach execution notice effect, the player can select the ally character and the head armor, body armor, and foot armor equipped by that ally character, but if "X" is forcibly selected as the weapon, the game does not progress to a final battle reach, and a normal long reach is executed as a reach for a win/lose effect. Note that the normal long reach ends 19 seconds after the number of pseudo consecutive wins selected from pseudo 2 or pseudo 3 ends. Furthermore, when a reach selection preview or reach promotion preview is displayed, it will always develop into an SP reach preview; in other words, so-called false previews that do not develop into SP reach previews will not be executed during reach selection previews or reach promotion previews.

In addition, in the reach execution preview performance when variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected, it may be possible to select "X" as the weapon, but it is desirable that the weapon allocation be determined so that if "X" is selected as the weapon, a jackpot is guaranteed or the outcome is extremely hot (at least the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than when the silver sword is selected as the weapon). In the reach execution preview performance when variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected, if "X" is selected as the weapon, for example, a display is made on the performance display device 1600 showing the selected ally character saying the line "My bare hands are enough!", and then a final battle reach is executed in which the ally character attacks the enemy character with their bare hands.

[6-3-2. Rare Pattern]
The rare pattern presentation when the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" is selected will be explained. First, it is determined according to a predetermined allocation whether to execute a reach selection notice presentation and a reach promotion notice presentation, or to execute a reach selection notice presentation and a reach execution notice presentation, as the two notice presentations (that is, the reach selection notice presentation, which is the notice presentation corresponding to the variation pattern "SP Reach 1", is always executed). Note that in the rare pattern when the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" is selected, the two notice presentations, the reach promotion notice presentation and the reach execution notice presentation, which are notice presentations that do not correspond to "SP Reach 1", are never determined.

Next, after the determined number of pseudo-consecutive wins have been performed, the timing to start displaying the two determined preview effects is determined. Specifically, for example, it is determined according to a predetermined allocation whether the display of the two determined preview effects will start simultaneously, whether one of the two preview effects will start displaying first (for example, the other preview effect will start displaying one second after the first preview effect has started), or whether the other of the two preview effects will start displaying first (for example, the one preview effect will start displaying one second after the other preview effect has started displaying).

The two preview performances are then displayed on the performance display device 1600 in accordance with the determined start timing. Each of the two preview performances is displayed, for example, in a display area that divides the display area of the performance display device 1600 in half (for example, a display area divided into two, top and bottom), with at least a portion of the display period of the two preview performances overlapping. For the preview performance that ends first of the two preview performances, the display at the time of its end may continue to be displayed until the preview performance that ends later has ended, or a predetermined loop display may continue to be displayed until the preview performance that ends later has ended.

When the two preview performances have ended, the display area in which the reach selection preview performance is displayed is expanded to fill the entire area of the performance display device 1600, thereby hiding the display of the preview performances that are not reach selection preview performances. After that, a reach performance is executed as the winning/losing performance selected in the reach selection preview performance.

The following explains the rare pattern effects when the variation pattern "SP Reach 2" is selected. First, a predetermined allocation is used to determine whether the two preview effects to be executed are a reach selection preview effect and a reach promotion preview effect, or a reach promotion preview effect and a reach execution preview effect (in other words, the reach promotion preview effect, which is the preview effect that corresponds to the variation pattern "SP Reach 2," is always executed). Note that in rare patterns when the variation pattern "SP Reach 2" is selected, the two preview effects, a reach selection preview effect and a reach execution preview effect, which are preview effects that do not correspond to "SP Reach 2," are never determined.

Next, after the determined number of pseudo-consecutive wins have been performed, the timing to start displaying the two determined preview effects is determined. Specifically, for example, it is determined according to a predetermined allocation whether the display of the two determined preview effects will start simultaneously, whether one of the two preview effects will start displaying first (for example, the other preview effect will start displaying one second after the first preview effect has started), or whether the other of the two preview effects will start displaying first (for example, the one preview effect will start displaying one second after the other preview effect has started displaying).

The two preview performances are then displayed on the performance display device 1600 in accordance with the determined start timing. Each of the two preview performances is displayed, for example, in a display area that divides the display area of the performance display device 1600 in half (for example, a display area divided into two, top and bottom), with at least a portion of the display period of the two preview performances overlapping. For the preview performance that ends first of the two preview performances, the display at the time of its end may continue to be displayed until the preview performance that ends later has ended, or a predetermined loop display may continue to be displayed until the preview performance that ends later has ended.

When the two preview effects have ended, the display area in which the reach promotion preview effect is displayed is expanded to fill the entire area of the effect display device 1600, thereby hiding the display of the preview effects that are not reach promotion preview effects. After that, a reach effect is executed as the winning or losing effect notified in the reach promotion preview effect.

The following explains the rare pattern effects when the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected. First, a predetermined allocation is used to determine whether the two preview effects to be executed are a reach selection preview effect and a reach execution preview effect, or a reach promotion preview effect and a reach execution preview effect (in other words, the reach execution preview effect, which is the preview effect that corresponds to the variation pattern "SP Reach 3," is always executed). Note that in rare patterns when the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected, the two preview effects, a reach selection preview effect and a reach promotion preview effect, which are preview effects that do not correspond to "SP Reach 3," are never determined.

Next, after the determined number of pseudo-consecutive wins have been performed, the timing to start displaying the two determined preview effects is determined. Specifically, for example, it is determined according to a predetermined allocation whether the display of the two determined preview effects will start simultaneously, whether one of the two preview effects will start displaying first (for example, the other preview effect will start displaying one second after the first preview effect has started), or whether the other of the two preview effects will start displaying first (for example, the one preview effect will start displaying one second after the other preview effect has started displaying).

The two preview performances are then displayed on the performance display device 1600 in accordance with the determined start timing. Each of the two preview performances is displayed, for example, in a display area that divides the display area of the performance display device 1600 in half (for example, a display area divided into two, top and bottom), with at least a portion of the display period of the two preview performances overlapping. For the preview performance that ends first of the two preview performances, the display at the time of its end may continue to be displayed until the preview performance that ends later has ended, or a predetermined loop display may continue to be displayed until the preview performance that ends later has ended.

When the two preview performances have ended, the display area where the reach execution preview performance is displayed is expanded to fill the entire area of the performance display device 1600, thereby hiding the display of the two preview performances that are not reach promotion preview performances. After that, a final battle reach using the character, head armor, body armor, foot armor, and weapon determined in the reach execution preview performance is executed as a reach performance to determine whether the result is achieved or not.

[6-3-3. Retry Pattern]
Regardless of which of the variation patterns "SP Reach 1,""SP Reach 2," and "SP Reach 3" is selected, the following effects will be executed. First, it is determined by lottery based on a predetermined allocation which variation pattern of "SP Reach 1,""SP Reach 2," or "SP Reach 3" the SP Reach effect to be executed first (the SP Reach effect executed halfway) will be executed in, and whether the basic pattern or the rare pattern will be executed for the variation pattern of the SP Reach effect to be executed first.

Next, the preview effect described above is executed according to the basic pattern or rare pattern determined for the variation pattern of the SP reach effect to be executed first (or without executing the preview effect), and the determined (first to be executed) SP reach effect is started. When a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the SP reach effect is hidden (ended), and a retry effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined time.

Next, a lottery based on a predetermined allocation determines whether a basic pattern or a rare pattern will be executed for the selected variation pattern (a reach effect as a win/lose effect). The preview effect described above is executed according to the basic pattern or rare pattern determined for the selected variation pattern (or no preview effect is executed), and an SP reach effect is executed for the selected variation pattern. Note that because the number of pseudo consecutive wins determined for the selected variation pattern is executed before the basic pattern or rare pattern effect determined for the previously executed SP reach variation pattern, no pseudo consecutive wins will be executed until the retry effect ends and the basic pattern or rare pattern effect determined for the selected variation pattern is executed.

Therefore, in a replay pattern, a reach promotion preview effect may be executed after a reach selection preview effect, a reach selection preview effect may be executed after a reach promotion preview effect, a reach execution preview effect may be executed after a reach promotion preview effect, a reach execution preview effect may be executed after a reach execution preview effect, a reach promotion preview effect may be executed after a reach selection preview effect, or a reach execution preview effect may be executed after a reach execution preview effect. In this way, the player can see multiple preview effects with a single change, which increases the excitement.

In addition, in a retry pattern, a reach selection preview effect may be executed after a reach selection preview effect has been executed, a reach promotion preview effect may be executed after a reach promotion preview effect has been executed, or a reach execution preview effect may be executed after a reach execution preview effect has been executed. In this way, by showing the player the same preview effect multiple times in one variation, it is possible to leave a strong impression on the player of one preview effect.

In the above example, in the retry pattern, one SP reach effect is executed first, and then one retry effect is executed, but multiple SP reach effects and multiple retry effects may be executed. Specifically, for example, when variation pattern "SP Reach 1" is selected, the SP reach effect of a variation pattern selected from variation patterns "SP Reach 1," "SP Reach 2," or "SP Reach 3" may be executed partway through, followed by a retry effect, after which a predetermined SP reach effect is executed partway through, followed by a second retry effect, after which the SP reach effect of "SP Reach 1" may be executed.

In addition, in the example above, when the retry effect is displayed, the SP reach effect that was previously being executed (up until just before the retry effect was displayed) is made invisible. However, even after the retry effect is displayed, the display of the SP reach effect may continue to progress in, for example, a display area in a corner of the effect display device 1600 (for example, a rectangular display area that includes the bottom right corner of the effect display device 1600 and has an area of 1/10 or less of the entire area of the effect display device 1600), while the retry effect, the reach selection notice effect after the retry effect, the reach promotion notice effect, or the reach execution notice effect are displayed. Furthermore, the size of the display of the retry effect may be made smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device 1600 without changing the size of the display of the SP reach effect, so that the displayed SP reach effect can be recognized.

Therefore, the Smart Ball Croon effect (details will be described later) is an effect that can be displayed as a reach-time chance-up effect during an SP reach effect, and the Smart Ball Croon effect can be displayed as a reach-time chance-up effect in the SP reach effect displayed in the display area in the corner of the effect display device 1600. In this way, the player can see the reach effect that was displayed earlier, which increases their interest.

In addition, when the Smart Ball Croon effect, which is displayed as a reach chance up effect that can be executed during the SP reach effect, is being executed, preview effects including reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, or reach execution preview effect may be executed multiple times (the same preview effect may be executed multiple times, or different preview effects may be executed). However, after the display of the Smart Ball Croon effect has ended, reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, and reach execution preview effect will not be executed.

When a specified reach performance is being executed, it may be possible to display a reach selection preview performance but not a reach promotion preview performance, or it may be possible to display a reach selection preview performance but not a reach promotion preview performance. Also, when a specified reach performance is being executed, it may be possible to display a reach promotion preview performance but not a reach execution preview performance, or it may be possible to display a reach promotion preview performance but not a reach execution preview performance. Also, when a specified reach performance is being executed, it may be possible to display a reach execution preview performance but not a reach selection preview performance, or it may be possible to display a reach execution preview performance but not a reach selection preview performance.

In the above example, the lottery to determine each effect to be executed in the basic pattern, rare pattern, and replay pattern is executed immediately before the start of each effect, but all lotteries to determine each effect may be executed, for example, at the start of the variation.

[6-4. Winning Performance]
The winning effect will be explained. The winning effect is executed when game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (hereinafter, these will be collectively referred to as "start ports"). However, if game ball B enters the first start port 2002 when the number of reserved memories for the first special random number has reached its upper limit, or if game ball B enters the second start port 2004 when the number of reserved memories for the second special random number has reached its upper limit (entry of game ball B into a start port in these cases is also referred to as an over-entry), the winning effect will not be executed.

When game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-entry), a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a winning effect based on the winning result (obtained from advance determination information) based on the ball's entry, the variation pattern selected for the variation corresponding to the entry (obtained from advance determination information), and a predetermined probability.

Even when game ball B enters the starting slot when a special symbol variation is not being performed, a winning effect is executed with a predetermined probability based on the judgment information (lottery results and variation pattern information obtained in the start judgment process when the special symbol variation corresponding to the ball entry is initiated) rather than the pre-determination information. The probability of the winning effect being executed may vary depending on the number of reserved special random numbers, or may be the same regardless of the number of reserved special random numbers, or may differ for only some reserved numbers (for example, the probability of the winning effect being executed when numbers 1 to 3 are reserved (the first to third special random numbers are reserved), but the probability of the winning effect being executed only when number 4 is reserved (the fourth special random number is reserved) is high or low). Although a winning effect can be executed if game ball B does not result in an over-entry when it enters the starting slot, if the lottery results (pre-determination information and the pre-determination information) based on game ball B entering the starting slot prior to the ball entry indicate a jackpot, the winning effect will not be executed when the ball enters.

For example, the winning effect can only be executed when a ball lands corresponding to a variation selected as the variation pattern: "Normal Long Reach," "SP Reach 1," "SP Reach 2," or "SP Reach 3." For example, if the lottery result based on game ball B landing in the starting hole (excluding over-entries) is a miss, the winning effect will be executed with a probability of 0/256 if "Normal Long Reach" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the ball lands, with a probability of 40/256 if "SP Reach 1" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the ball lands, with a probability of 60/256 if "SP Reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the ball lands, and with a probability of 80/256 if "SP Reach 3" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the ball lands.

Also, for example, if the lottery result based on game ball B entering the starting hole (excluding over-entries) is a jackpot, the winning effect will be executed with a probability of 10/256 if "Normal Long Reach" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the ball entering, with a probability of 64/256 if "SP Reach 1" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the ball entering, with a probability of 96/256 if "SP Reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the ball entering, and with a probability of 128/256 if "SP Reach 3" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the ball entering. Therefore, even if a winning effect has been performed, if a normal long reach is executed in the variation that was the target of the winning effect, a jackpot is confirmed. In this way, a jackpot is confirmed when the winning effect and normal long reach effect are executed, but it is also possible to apply other reach effects instead of the normal long reach effect, or to confirm a win when the winning effect and a predetermined preview effect different from the winning effect are executed, rather than the winning effect and a predetermined reach effect.

In other words, whether "Normal Long Reach," "SP Reach 1," "SP Reach 2," or "SP Reach 3" is selected as the variation pattern, the probability that a winning effect will be executed is equal to or lower than the probability that a winning effect will not be executed. Furthermore, the jackpot expectancy for a variation corresponding to a ball entering a ball that results in a winning effect being executed is higher than the jackpot expectancy for a variation corresponding to a ball entering a ball that does not result in a winning effect being executed. Specifically, for example, the jackpot expectancy for an SP Reach 3 (Final Battle Reach) that results in a winning effect being executed is higher than the jackpot expectancy for an SP Reach 3 that does not result in a winning effect being executed.

The winning effect may, for example, illuminate the light guide plate provided on the pachinko machine 1 in a predetermined manner, output a special winning sound, vibrate a predetermined operation unit equipped with a vibration speaker, and/or display a special display on the effect display device 1600 (for example, a zone display that is displayed from the start of the winning effect until the variation corresponding to the winning starts, or an effect display that starts displaying from the start of the winning effect and can be hidden until the variation corresponding to the winning starts). The winning effect indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the variation corresponding to the winning. The effect may continue to be displayed or output until a predetermined timing even after the variation corresponding to the winning effect starts, or some of the effects (for example, the illumination of the light guide plate) may end before the variation corresponding to the winning effect starts, while a different effect (for example, a special display on the effect display device 1600) may continue even after the variation corresponding to the winning effect starts.

[6-5. Notice performance for SP reach performance]
Below, we will explain specific examples of preview effects (reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, and reach execution preview effect) for SP reach effects when the variation pattern ``SP Reach 1,'' ``SP Reach 2,'' or ``SP Reach 3'' is selected.

[6-5-1. Reach selection notice]
The reach selection notice effect, which is an example of the first special effect, will be described below. In the reach selection notice effect, the title display of three reach effects with the same expected jackpot probability (shooting reach, shark fishing reach, and ring toss reach, all of which are reach effects with a three-star rating) is switched in sequence. The reach effect of the title displayed when a predetermined time (e.g., 8.5 seconds) has elapsed since the reach selection notice effect began is executed after the reach selection notice effect ends.

In the reach selection preview performance, the reach title display can be switched by operating the pressing operation unit 303, but the reach performance title display also switches every time a predetermined time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has passed, regardless of whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated and when. In this way, while the player can manually switch the title display, the title display also switches automatically.

Therefore, while it is possible for a player to operate the pressing operation unit 303 at the right time so that the reach title display that appears when a predetermined time (e.g., 8.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the reach selection preview performance becomes the title display of the reach performance desired by the player (in other words, the reach performance that is executed after the reach selection preview performance becomes the reach performance desired by the player), it is not easy.

In this way, the reach selection notice effect can provide a game element that forces the player to consider when and how many times they should operate the pressing operation unit 303 to execute the desired reach effect, and by having the player perform such operations, the player can exercise and refresh their mind. In particular, although all of the reach effects that can be selected in the reach selection notice effect indicate the same likelihood of winning, the game element allows the player to enjoy selecting a reach effect, and they can also enjoy the reach effect that they were able to select through their own operation.

Figure 40 shows an example of a timing chart for the reach selection preview effect. The timing chart shown in Figure 40 is a timing chart for when the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the reach selection preview effect.

From 0 seconds to 1 second into the reach selection preview performance, the title "Shooting Reach" is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From 1 second to 1.5 seconds into the performance display device 1600, a slide display is displayed that switches from the title display of "Shooting Reach" to the title display of "Shark Fishing Reach."

While the slide display is being executed, at least a portion of the display of the reach title before the slide and at least a portion of the display of the reach title after the slide are displayed on the performance display device 1600. In other words, during the slide display from 1 second to 1.5 seconds after the start, at least a portion of the display of the title for the shooting reach and at least a portion of the display of the title for the shark fishing reach are displayed.

From 1.5 seconds to 2.5 seconds into the game, the title "Shark Fishing Reach" is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From 2.5 seconds to 3 seconds into the game, a slide display is displayed on the performance display device 1600, sliding from the title display of "Shark Fishing Reach" to the title display of "Quoits Reach." In this case, as with the above, two reach titles are displayed (the title display of "Shark Fishing Reach" and the title display of "Quoits Reach").

From 3 seconds to 4 seconds into the game, the title "Quoits Reach" is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From 4 seconds to 4.5 seconds into the game, a slide display is displayed on the performance display device 1600, sliding from the title display of "Quoits Reach" to the title display of "Shooting Reach." In this case, as with the above, two reach titles are displayed (title display of "Quoits Reach" and title display of "Shooting Reach"). From 4.5 seconds into the game, the title of "Shooting Reach" is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the same display as from 0 seconds into the game is repeated. In other words, the reach selection preview performance displays a periodic cycle of 4.5 seconds per cycle.

By repeating the periodic display, it becomes easier for players to recognize the displays included in the periodic display, and these displays are more likely to leave an impression on the player. In other words, it becomes easier for players to recognize the displays of each reach title and each slide in the reach selection preview performance.

In this way, the reach title display is displayed for 1 second, and then the slide display to the next reach title is displayed for 0.5 seconds, and this display is repeated until 8.5 seconds have passed since the reach selection preview performance began. Note that the 8.5 seconds from the start of the reach selection preview performance is the valid period for operation of the pressing operation unit 303.

As shown in the example of Figure 40, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the reach selection preview performance, the title of the quoits reach will be displayed on the performance display device 1600 8.5 seconds after the reach selection preview performance begins (at the end of the valid operation period), and therefore the quoits reach will be selected as the reach performance to be executed after the reach selection preview performance ends.

From 8.5 seconds until 9.5 seconds into the reach selection preview performance, the performance display device 1600 displays a confirmation display of the reach performance selected as the reach performance to be executed after the reach selection preview performance ends (in the example of Figure 40, a confirmation display of quoits reach). From 9.5 seconds into the reach selection preview performance, the reach performance selected in the reach selection preview performance (quoits reach in the example of Figure 40) is executed.

Figures 41 and 42 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a reach selection preview effect. Figures 41 and 42 show an example of an effect when the press operation unit 303 is not operated during the reach selection preview effect. Figure 41 (A) shows the state when the reach selection preview effect has started. From the start of the reach selection preview effect until the reach to be executed is decided (in other words, from the start of the reach selection preview effect until 8.5 seconds have passed since the start of the reach selection preview effect, which is also the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303), the effect display device 1600 displays a reach title display frame 1651 inside which displays the reach title (and stars indicating the expected level of that reach), a button image 1633 that prompts operation of the press operation unit 303, and a gauge 1634 that indicates the remaining time in the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303.

In Figure 41 (A), the title of "Shooting Reach," an example of a first special display, and stars indicating the expected level are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651. Note that the display area on the performance display device 1600 for displaying the area defined by the reach title display frame 1651 and the interior of the reach title display frame 1651 is an example of a special area that is part of the display area of the performance display device 1600.

In Figure 41 (B), a slide display is displayed within the reach title display frame 1651, from the title display of Shooting Reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation) to the title display of Shark Fishing Reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation). In the slide display, the reach title before the slide appears to disappear to the left of the reach title display frame 1651, and the reach title after the slide appears to appear from the right of the reach title display frame 1651. Also, as mentioned above, during the slide display period, at least a portion of the reach title before the slide and at least a portion of the reach title after the slide are visible. Note that from Figure 41 (A) to Figure 42 (G) described below, the amount of gauge 1634 decreases according to the remaining time of the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303. Note that the shape (outline) and size of the reach title display frame 1651 do not change while this slide display or the slide display described below is being performed.

In Figure 41 (C), the slide display in Figure 41 (B) has ended, and the title of Shark Fishing Reach, an example of a second special display, and stars indicating the level of expectation are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651. Even if the reach title displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651 changes (the same applies to Figure 41 (E) described below), the shape (outer lines) and size of the reach title display frame 1651 do not change. Note that the reach title display frame 1651 may be made up of straight lines only, as shown in Figure 41 etc., or may be made up of straight lines and curves, or may be made up of curves only.

In Figure 41 (D), a slide display is displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651, from the title display of Shark Fishing Reach to the title display of Quoits Reach. In Figure 41 (E), the slide display of Figure 41 (D) has ended, and the title of Quoits Reach and stars indicating the degree of expectation are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651. In Figure 41 (F), a slide display is displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651, from the title display of Quoits Reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation) to the title display of Shooting Reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation).

In Figure 42(G), the slide display in Figure 41(F) has ended, and the title of Quoits Reach and stars indicating the expected probability are displayed inside the Reach title display frame 1651. In Figure 42(G), the display has returned to the same as in Figure 41(A), except for the remaining time of the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, indicated by the gauge 1634. As mentioned above, until 8.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the Reach selection preview performance, the same performances as in Figures 41(A) to 41(F) are repeated (however, the remaining time of the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, indicated by the gauge 1634, decreases).

Figure 42 (H) shows the state 8.5 seconds have passed since the start of the reach selection preview performance, i.e., the state when the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 has ended. As mentioned above, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the reach selection preview performance, the title of the Quintessential Win Reach and stars indicating the expected probability are displayed when the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 ends, and the Quintessential Win Reach is selected as the reach performance for the win/loss performance.

In Figure 42 (H), the decision display for the Quintessential Winnings Reach is displayed across the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. In this decision display, the title of the Quintessential Winnings Reach and stars indicating the expected probability are enlarged, and the Reach title display frame 1651 is hidden (the button image 1633 and gauge 1634 are hidden when the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 ends, i.e., when the decision display is displayed). When one second has passed since the Quintessential Winnings Reach decision display began to be displayed, the Reach selection preview display ends and the Quintessential Winnings Reach is executed.

In the above example, while operation of the press operation unit 303 is always valid during the reach selection preview performance, there may be a period during which operation of the press operation unit 303 is not valid. For example, operation of the press operation unit 303 may not be valid until a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of FIG. 41(A) begins, or the title of the reach selection preview performance may be displayed for a predetermined time at the start of the reach selection preview performance, and operation of the press operation unit 303 may not be valid during the title display period. Furthermore, the valid operation period for operation of the press operation unit 303 may end immediately before the end of the reach selection preview performance (e.g., when 0.5 seconds remain).

Figure 43 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a reach selection preview effect. Figure 43 shows an example of a performance when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the reach selection preview effect. Figure 43 (B2) shows a state in which a performance similar to that of Figure 41 (B) is being performed, that is, a slide display is displayed within the reach title display frame 1651 from the title display of Shooting Reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation) to the title display of Shark Fishing Reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation).

Figure 43 (C2) shows the state in Figure 43 (B2) where the press operation unit 303 has been operated. If the press operation unit 303 is operated during the valid operation period of the reach selection preview performance, a new slide display will be performed whether the reach title is being displayed or a slide display is being displayed.

In Figure 43 (B2), a slide display is being performed from the title display of the shooting reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation) to the title display of the shark fishing reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation), and when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated at this time, a slide display is initiated in Figure 43 (C2) to the title display of the ring toss reach, which is displayed next to the title display of the shark fishing reach (the title display after the slide in the slide display).

Figure 43 (D2) shows a state in which the slide display to the Quoits Reach title display continues as a result of operating the pressing operation unit 303. Note that in the slide display as a result of operating the pressing operation unit 303, in Figure 43 (C2) at least a portion of the title display for the Shooting Reach and at least a portion of the title display for the Shark Fishing Reach are displayed, and in Figure 43 (D2) at least a portion of the title display for the Shark Fishing Reach and at least a portion of the title display for the Quoits Reach are displayed, but there are also cases in which at least a portion of the title display for the Shooting Reach, at least a portion of the title display for the Shark Fishing Reach, and at least a portion of the title display for the Quoits Reach are displayed simultaneously. Specifically, if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated immediately after a slide display has started, a new slide display will start, and in such a case three reach titles will be displayed. Note that, for example, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly, three or more reach titles may be displayed simultaneously, or, to prevent three or more reach titles from being displayed simultaneously, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 may be considered valid but not reflected in the presentation.

Note that the slide display that is executed in response to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 begins, for example, when the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected, and continues for 0.5 seconds from the start time.

Figure 43 (E2) shows the state where the slide display to the Quoits Reach title display has ended as a result of operating the pressing operation unit 303, and the Quoits Reach title display (and the display of stars indicating the expected level) is displayed, with the same presentation as in Figure 41 (E) being performed (except for the remaining time of the valid operation period indicated by the gauge 1634).

If a slide display is being displayed 8.5 seconds after the start of the reach selection preview performance (the end of the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303), the reach performance corresponding to the reach title that was scheduled to be displayed immediately after the end of the slide display will be selected as the reach performance for the win/loss performance. In other words, for example, if the slide display of Figure 43 (B2) is being displayed 8.5 seconds after the start of the reach selection preview performance, the shark fishing reach will be selected as the reach performance for the win/loss performance, and if the slide display of Figure 43 (C2) or Figure 43 (D2) is being displayed 8.5 seconds after the start of the reach selection preview performance, the ring toss reach will be selected as the reach performance for the win/loss performance.

In the examples of Figures 41 to 43, the reach selection notice performance is executed while the decorative symbols are in a reach state, but the reach selection notice performance may also be executed while the decorative symbols are not in a reach state (for example, it may be before the reach state is formed, or it may be a state where the reach state is formed but the left and center decorative symbols that form the reach state are not visible). If the reach selection notice performance is executed while the decorative symbols are in a reach state, the player can enjoy the reach selection notice performance with growing anticipation, and if the reach selection notice performance is executed while the decorative symbols are not in a reach state, the player can concentrate on the reach selection notice performance without being distracted by the reach state.

In addition, in the examples of Figures 41 to 43, the reach selection preview effect is executed while a pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and a pending display corresponding to the pending change are displayed, but the reach selection preview effect may be executed while only one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is displayed, or the reach selection preview effect may be executed while neither is displayed.

If a reach selection preview effect is executed while a pending display corresponding to an ongoing change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach selection preview effect while recognizing the expected degree of expectation for that change indicated by the pending display. If a reach selection preview effect is executed while a pending display corresponding to a pending change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach selection preview effect for the ongoing change while looking forward to the next or subsequent change.

Furthermore, if the reach selection preview effect is executed while at least one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is not displayed, the player can concentrate on the reach selection preview effect without being distracted by at least one of the pending displays.

An example of an expectation effect that indicates the expected jackpot probability of the ongoing fluctuations, but is different from the reach selection preview effect, is a display of a flowing shooting star (different from the star indicating the expected probability displayed along with the reach title, and displayed in a different display format from the star indicating the expected probability) as a background display on the effect display device 1600. The flowing shooting star display can also be executed while the reach selection preview effect is being executed. By executing the flowing shooting star display during the execution of the reach selection preview effect, the sense of anticipation during the reach selection preview effect can be increased. The reach selection preview effect may also be executed while the flowing shooting star display is being displayed.

In addition, when the reach selection notice performance is being executed, a predetermined movable body among the multiple movable bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 may be operable, and for example, when the predetermined movable body operates, the chances of winning increase (i.e., when the predetermined movable body operates, the likelihood of winning a jackpot increases).

It is desirable that when the display of the reach title displayed within the reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection preview performance changes (for example, when the sliding display changes from the Shooting Reach title to Shark Fishing Reach, and/or when a sliding display is being performed (such as in Figure 41 (B))), no sound corresponding to the change is output. If a sound corresponding to the change were to be output, there is a risk that the player will be given unnecessary anticipation even though there is no change in the likelihood of a jackpot when the display of the reach title displayed within the reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection preview performance changes.

However, a specified sound may be output when the Shooting Reach title is displayed in the Reach title display frame 1651 during the Reach selection preview performance. In the Reach selection preview performance, a cycle display is performed in which three Reach titles are repeatedly displayed, and since Shooting Reach is the first display in the cycle display, outputting a specified sound when the Shooting Reach title is displayed allows the player to recognize that the cycle has completed one cycle (or that the cycle has started).

Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a star change effect executed during a reach selection notice effect. As mentioned above, a winning effect can be executed when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning). However, when game ball B enters the starting hole during a reach selection notice effect (excluding over-winning), not only a winning effect but also a star change effect, which is an example of a second special effect (an effect including a display of decreasing black stars and a display of rotating black stars), can be executed. Note that, as mentioned above, the reach selection notice effect may be executable when the decorative symbols are not in a reach state, and therefore the star change effect that can be executed during a reach selection notice effect may also be executable when the decorative symbols are not in a reach state.

When game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice performance (excluding over-winning), whether the variation for which the reach selection notice performance is being performed is a jackpot variation or a miss variation, and whether the star change performance will be performed is determined by a lottery based on a predetermined allocation.

For example, during the reach selection notice effect that is executed during a jackpot variation, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the star change effect will be executed with a distribution of 64/256, and will not be executed with a distribution of 192/256. Also, for example, during the reach selection notice effect that is executed during a miss variation, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the star change effect will be executed with a distribution of 255/256, and will not be executed with a distribution of 1/256.

Therefore, when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice performance (excluding over-entry), if the star change performance is executed, the expected jackpot probability of the fluctuation during execution is 0.08%, and if the star change performance is not executed, the expected jackpot probability of the fluctuation during execution is 37.65%. In other words, if the star change performance is not executed during the reach selection notice performance, the expected jackpot probability of the fluctuation during execution is higher when the star change performance is not executed than when the star change performance is executed.

Since the rate of miss variations is much higher than that of jackpot variations, and since the star change effect is executed with an extremely high probability when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice performance in a miss variation (excluding over-winning), the star change effect is executed with an extremely high probability when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice performance (excluding over-winning).

Details will be provided later, but during the star change effect, the number of displayed black stars decreases and the displayed black stars rotate. Therefore, if the star change effect is not executed when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection preview effect (excluding over-entry), that is, if the number of displayed black stars does not decrease and the displayed black stars do not rotate, this indicates a high probability of a jackpot.

Figure 44 (A) shows the state where 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the reach selection notice performance and the pressing operation unit 303 has not been operated, and the same performance as in Figure 41 (C) is being performed. Figure 44 (B) shows the state where, in the state shown in Figure 44 (A), game ball B has entered the starting hole (not an over-entry), so it has been decided that a star change performance will be performed, and the star change performance is being performed.

In the star change effect, the number of displayed black stars, which indicate the expected probability of a reach effect, is reduced by one. Specifically, in Figure 44 (B), an effect is displayed on the black star displayed on the far right side within the reach title display frame 1651, and then the black star changes to a white star.

Furthermore, in the star change effect, a rotating display is displayed of black stars (except those that have been changed to white stars) that indicate the degree of expectation of a reach effect. As shown in Figure 44(B), a rotating display is displayed of black stars displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651 (note that although semicircular arrows are drawn around the black stars in Figures 44(B) to 44(D), this is to clearly show that the black stars are rotating toward or away from the effect display device 1600, and the arrows are not actually displayed on the effect display device 1600). Note that the reach selection preview effect continues even while the star change effect is being performed.

In Figure 44 (C), the star change effect has progressed further, and the black star indicating the likelihood of a reach effect has rotated further. In Figure 44 (D), the star change effect has progressed further, and the black star indicating the likelihood of a reach effect has rotated further, completing exactly one rotation (i.e., the black star has returned to its original display).

In addition, the rotation of the black stars in the star change effect continues even after the black stars have rotated once. In other words, the star change effect includes a cyclic display that is repeated periodically. This cyclic display makes it easier for players to recognize the display of black stars after the number of stars in the star change effect has changed (i.e., the expected level after the change).

As mentioned above, the confirmation display for the selected reach is displayed 8.5 seconds after the reach selection preview performance begins. However, if this confirmation display is displayed while the star change performance is being executed, it is recommended that the black star (cycle display) rotating in the star change performance be hidden (before the reach performance indicated by the confirmation display begins), and then the star indicating the expectation level be restored to the state it was in before the star change performance began. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the reach title indicated by the confirmation display.

On the other hand, even when the confirmation display is displayed while the star change effect is being executed, the rotating black star in the star change effect may be displayed, and when the reach effect indicated by the confirmation display begins, the rotating black star may be made semi-transparent and hidden. In other words, the rotating black star may be displayed even when the reach effect is being executed.

Also, even if the confirmation display is displayed while the star change effect is being executed, the black star in the star change effect may be displayed in a rotating manner, and the rotating black star may be hidden when the reach effect indicated by the confirmation display begins.

The star change effect may also be displayed until the end of the ongoing variation. In this case, the reach effect may be performed while shrinking all of the display inside the reach title display frame 1651 and displaying it in a corner of the effect display device 1600 (for example, a display area including the bottom right corner of the effect display device 1600, a rectangular display area having an area of 1/10 or less of the entire area of the effect display device 1600), or the reach effect may be performed while shrinking only the rotating black star display inside the reach title display frame 1651 and displaying it in a corner of the effect display device 1600. In either pattern, the display size may not change but the display position may change, or the display size may not change but the display position may change.

The rotation period (one cycle) of the black stars is, for example, 4.5 seconds, the same as one cycle in the reach selection announcement performance as a cyclical display. In this way, if the length of one cycle is the same, it can make the player think that there may be some connection between the cyclical rotation of the black stars and the cyclical display of the reach selection announcement, increasing interest. Furthermore, the rotation period (one cycle) of the black stars may be, for example, longer or shorter than one cycle in the reach selection announcement performance as a cyclical display.

If one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cycle display is longer, the player can concentrate on selecting the reach performance, and if the rotation period (one cycle) of the black star is longer, the player can more easily notice that the black star is rotating. However, regardless of whether the rotation period (one cycle) of the black star or one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cycle display is longer, it is preferable that the longer cycle (one cycle) is shorter than the shorter cycle (two cycles).

In addition, in the star change effect, there may be multiple display modes for the stars indicating the likelihood of a reach effect, and the likelihood of a jackpot may differ depending on the display mode selected from the multiple display modes. For example, the multiple display modes may include multiple display modes in which the rotating stars are the same color but rotate at different speeds, multiple display modes in which the rotating stars are the same rotation speed but different colors, or multiple display modes in which the stars are different colors and rotate at different speeds, indicating the likelihood of a reach effect.

As shown in Figures 44(B) to 44(D), in the star-changing performance, the black star rotates towards or away from you on the performance display device 1600 (more precisely, this is to display what appears to be a three-dimensional rotation on a two-dimensional display surface), so while this rotation is occurring (i.e., during the cycle display), the outline (shape) of the black star displayed on the performance display device 1600 changes (for example, the outline of the star becomes squashed vertically or returns to its original shape).

Note that pending displays corresponding to changes that are currently being performed and pending displays corresponding to changes that have been put on hold may also be dynamically cycled, with a predetermined time period as one cycle (for example, these pending displays may rotate), but unlike the rotating black star display in the star change performance, the outline of these pending displays may not change even while the cycling display is being performed, or, like the rotating black star display in the star change performance, the outline of the pending displays may also change while the cycling display is being performed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the reach selection preview effect may be executable when the hold display is displayed, the star change effect that can be executed during the reach selection preview effect may also be executable when the hold display is displayed. Therefore, the black star in the star change effect and the hold display may be displayed simultaneously and both may be displayed in a cyclic display with a changing outer line, or the black star in the star change effect and the hold display may be displayed simultaneously, but the black star in the star change effect may be displayed in a cyclic display with a changing outer line and the hold display may be displayed in a cyclic display with an unchanged outer line.

As described above, the rotation (cyclic display) of the black star in the star change effect occurs inside the reach title display frame 1651, which eliminates the need for the player to move their gaze from the reach title display frame 1651. The rotation (cyclic display) of the black star in the star change effect may be displayed both inside and outside the reach title display frame 1651, or may be displayed outside the reach title display frame 1651. For example, the rotation (cyclic display) of the black star in the star change effect may be highlighted outside the reach title display frame 1651 (for example, by enlarging the rotation (cyclic display) of the black star, or by displaying the rotation (cyclic display) of the black star for one or more revolutions), and then returning to the inside of the reach title display frame 1651 for display, or it may be highlighted only outside the reach title display frame 1651 (without returning to the inside). This type of highlighting effect can highlight the rotation of the black star to the player.

Even after the number of black stars displayed, indicating the likelihood of a reach effect, has changed from three to two due to the star change effect, when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice effect (excluding over-entry), a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the star change effect, and if it is decided that the star change effect will be executed, an effect is executed in which the number of black stars displayed, indicating the likelihood of a reach effect, is changed from two to one in the star change effect. After the number of black stars displayed, indicating the likelihood of a reach effect, has changed to one due to the star change effect, no lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the star change effect, even if game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice effect, i.e., the star change effect is not executed.

In the example of the star change effect described above, the number of displayed black stars indicating the likelihood of a reach effect decreases by one (the black stars change to white stars), but in the star change effect, the number of displayed black stars indicating the likelihood of a reach effect may also increase by one (the white stars change to black stars). In this case, only the stars that change from white to black in the star change effect may undergo the periodic rotation described above (i.e., their outer lines change). Specifically, for example, if star 3 changes to star 4 in the star change effect, the fourth white star from the left changes to a black star, and only the changed star rotates.

In addition, if the fourth white star from the left during a star change effect changes to a black star (i.e., the expected level of the reach effect changes from 3 stars to 4 stars) and it is decided to execute another star change effect when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-entry) while the changed fourth star from the left is rotating, a new star change effect will be executed while the star is rotating. In other words, while the fourth black star from the left is rotating, the fifth white star from the left changes to a black star (i.e., the expected level of the reach effect changes from 4 stars to 5 stars), and the changed fifth star from the left also rotates cyclically as described above (i.e., the outline changes).

At this time, it is desirable that the rotation cycle of the fifth black star from the left that rotates in the star change effect that starts later be displayed so that it matches the rotation cycle of the fourth black star from the left that rotates in the star change effect that started earlier (i.e., the cycles of these two stars are not out of sync). This makes it easier for the player to recognize that both of the rotating stars have been changed by the star change effect, and makes it easier for them to recognize that the original expectation level was 3 stars. Note that in a single fluctuation in the star change effect, a decrease from a black star to a white star and an increase from a white star to a black star do not occur. Furthermore, when an increase from a white star to a black star occurs, the star that indicates the original expectation level may also be displayed in a rotational (cyclical) display.

When the aforementioned redo pattern is selected, if game ball B enters the starting hole while the reach selection notice effect is being executed first (excluding over-winning), the star change effect begins and the rotating display (cycle display) of black stars begins. Even after the reach selection notice effect ends and the redo effect begins, the rotating display (cycle display) of black stars in the star change effect continues to be displayed, and even when the reach selection notice effect executed again after the redo effect begins, the rotating display (cycle display) of black stars in the star change effect continues to be displayed. In this way, even after the reach selection notice effect executed first ends, the rotating display of black stars in the star change effect continues, allowing the player to recognize that the "redo pattern" has been selected.

In a retry pattern, when a reach selection notice is executed again after a retry, the position of the spinning black star in the star change effect may continue to be displayed without changing (from the position where the black star was displayed when the previous reach selection notice was executed before the retry), or the spinning black star may be hidden. By continuing to display the black star but not changing its display position, the appearance of the continuously displayed black star improves. Furthermore, if a retry is executed multiple times in one variation, an appropriate combination of continuing to display/not displaying the spinning black star at the end of the first reach selection notice, and continuing to display/not displaying the spinning black star at the end of the second reach selection notice may be executed.

If you win the lottery to determine whether or not to execute a winning effect (and that winning effect has not yet been executed), and you win the lottery with the following specified probability under the following conditions, that winning effect will be canceled. The lottery to determine whether or not to cancel the winning effect and the cancellation process will be carried out, for example, after the lottery to determine whether or not to execute a star change effect.

Specifically, for example, if the current variation is a losing variation and the lottery result is that the star change effect will be executed, the winning effect will be canceled with a probability of 0/256 (which may also be 1/256, i.e., there is a possibility that the winning effect will be canceled); if the current variation is a losing variation and the lottery result is that the star change effect will not be executed, the winning effect will be canceled with a probability of 128/256; if the current variation is a jackpot variation and the lottery result is that the star change effect will be executed, the winning effect will be canceled with a probability of 256/256 (which may also be 255/256, i.e., there is a possibility that the winning effect will not be canceled); and if the current variation is a jackpot variation and the lottery result is that the star change effect will not be executed, the winning effect will be canceled with a probability of 256/256 (which may also be 255/256, i.e., there is a possibility that the winning effect will not be canceled).

In other words, if the current variation is a losing variation and the lottery result is that a star change effect will be executed, if the lottery result is that a winning effect will be executed, the winning effect will be executed without being canceled. In this way, if the above lottery result is obtained during a losing variation, the winning effect will be executed in addition to the star change effect, which can sufficiently heighten the player's sense of anticipation even in the case of a losing variation.

Also, if the current variation is a losing variation and the lottery result is that the star change effect will not be executed, when the lottery result is that a winning effect will be executed, the winning effect may or may not be executed. If the star change effect is not executed during a losing variation, the player's expectations are not high, and the winning effect may be executed, which can increase the player's expectations, or the winning effect may not be executed, which allows the game to proceed calmly without unnecessarily increasing the player's expectations. In other words, the player's expectations can be balanced.

In addition, if the variation currently in progress is a jackpot variation, regardless of the lottery result on whether or not a star change effect will be executed, if the lottery result indicates that a winning effect will be executed, the winning effect will be canceled (not executed). In a jackpot variation, there is a high possibility that numerous effects that heighten the player's sense of anticipation and tension will be executed for a long period of time, so by canceling the winning effect in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of anticipation and tension from increasing too much.

[6-5-2. Reach promotion notice]
The following describes the reach promotion notice effect, which is an example of the first specific effect. Figure 45 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart for the reach promotion notice effect. Specifically, Figures 45(A), 45(B), and 45(C) are each an example of a timing chart for the reach promotion notice effect when a goldfish scooping reach, a dart reach, or a bell throwing reach is selected as the reach effect for the winning or losing effect. Note that the execution timing of the first specific effect can be executed at various times before the reach effect is executed, such as simultaneously with the start of fluctuation, between the start of fluctuation and the execution of a pseudo-consecutive hit, between pseudo-consecutive hits, or during a normal reach.

First, we will explain the timing chart in Figure 45 (A), i.e., the timing chart for the reach promotion preview effect when the goldfish scooping reach is selected as the reach effect for the win/loss effect. From 0 seconds to 1 second after the start of the reach promotion preview effect, a blackout display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. From 1 second to 2 seconds after the start, a reach title fade-in display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, in which the blackout display gradually brightens and the reach title gradually becomes visible (for example, the fade-in ends at 2 seconds after the start). Note that here, a reach title fade-in display of the goldfish scooping reach title is displayed.

From 2 seconds to 3 seconds into the event, the reach title for Goldfish Scooping Reach is displayed on the effect display device 1600. From 3 seconds to 4 seconds into the event, a confirmation display for Goldfish Scooping Reach, which is the reach effect selected as the reach effect to be executed after the reach promotion notice effect ends, is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the reach promotion notice effect ends 4 seconds into the event. When the reach promotion notice effect ends, the Goldfish Scooping Reach, which is the reach effect indicated by the confirmation display, is executed.

Next, we will explain the timing chart in Figure 45(B), i.e., the timing chart for the reach promotion preview effect when Dart Reach is selected as the reach effect for the win/loss effect. From 0 seconds until 3 seconds into the reach promotion preview effect, the same effect as in Figure 45(A) is performed.

From 3 seconds to 4 seconds into the event, the reach title for Dart Reach is displayed on the effect display device 1600; in other words, the title of a reach with a higher expectation level than Goldfish Scooping Reach is displayed (it has been promoted to a reach with a higher expectation level). From 4 seconds to 5 seconds into the event, the decision display for Dart Reach, which is the reach effect selected as the reach effect to be executed after the reach promotion notice effect has ended, is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the reach promotion notice effect ends 5 seconds into the event. When the reach promotion notice effect has ended, Dart Reach, the reach effect indicated by the decision display, is executed.

When changing from the display of the reach title for the goldfish scooping reach to the display of the reach title for the dirt reach, the change may be made by displaying a specified effect display etc. superimposed on the display of the reach title for the goldfish scooping reach before the change, or the change may be made without displaying a specified effect display etc. When a specified effect display etc. is performed, it may also be displayed so that it superimposes on the display of the reach title for the dirt reach after the change. It is preferable that the time during which the reach title and effect for the goldfish scooping reach before the change are displayed is shorter (although it can be longer) than the time during which only the reach title for the goldfish scooping reach before the change is displayed. It is also preferable that the time during which the reach title and effect for the dirt reach after the change are displayed is shorter (although it can be longer) than the time during which only the reach title for the dirt reach after the change is displayed.

Next, we will explain the timing chart of Figure 45 (C), i.e., the timing chart of the reach upgrade notice effect when the bell throw reach is selected as the reach effect for the win/loss effect. From 0 seconds until 4 seconds into the reach upgrade notice effect, the same effect as in Figure 45 (B) is displayed. Note that when changing from the display of the goldfish scooping reach title to the display of the dart reach title, the display and display time of the aforementioned effect display, etc. may also be applied.

From 4 seconds to 5 seconds into the event, the reach title for Bell Throw Reach is displayed on the effect display device 1600; in other words, the title of a reach with a higher expectation than Dart Reach is displayed (it has been promoted to a reach with a higher expectation). From 5 seconds to 6 seconds into the event, a confirmation display for Bell Throw Reach, the reach effect selected as the reach effect to be executed after the reach promotion notice effect ends, is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the reach promotion notice effect ends 6 seconds into the event. Once the reach promotion notice effect ends, the reach effect indicated by the confirmation display is executed, Bell Throw Reach. Note that when changing from the display of the reach title for Dart Reach to the display of the reach title for Bell Throw Reach, the display and display time of the aforementioned effect displays may be applied.

In this way, in the reach promotion preview performance, after a blackout display, a fade-in display occurs, and first the title of the Goldfish Scooping Reach performance, which has the lowest chance of winning (among the reach performances selected as the winning/losing performances in the variation pattern "SP Reach 2"), is displayed. However, as the title display changes, a more exciting reach performance (a reach performance with a higher chance of winning) is executed. Therefore, the player watches the reach promotion preview performance while wishing, "The title display will change!", which increases the player's interest.

Furthermore, the aforementioned reach selection notice effect is displayed when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is enabled, but the reach promotion notice effect is displayed when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not enabled. This increases the variety of effects, allowing players to enjoy a variety of effects. Note that the reach promotion notice effect may also be displayed when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is enabled.

Figures 46 and 47 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a reach promotion notice effect. Figure 46 (A) shows the state when the reach promotion notice effect has started, with a blackout display being displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that in Figure 46 (A), even when the blackout display is being displayed, decorative patterns, pending displays corresponding to ongoing changes, and pending displays corresponding to pending changes are still displayed, but the decorative patterns may also be blacked out and hidden, or at least one of the pending displays corresponding to ongoing changes and pending changes may also be blacked out and hidden.

In the example of Figure 46(A), when the reach promotion notice effect starts, a blackout display is suddenly displayed on the effect display device 1600, but it is also possible to gradually change to the state of Figure 46(A) (gradually decreasing the brightness of the effect display device 1600 until a blackout display is finally displayed), or a whiteout display or a shutter closing display may be used instead of a blackout display. In addition, if a whiteout display or a shutter closing display is used instead of a blackout display, the reach title fade-in display in Figure 46(B) described below will be a display corresponding to that.

In Figure 46(B), a reach title fade-in display is being performed. In Figure 46(B), the blackout gradually brightens, gradually making the reach title display frame 1652 and the title of the Goldfish Scooping Reach displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652 and the stars indicating the expectation level visible. Note that if the decorative symbols, the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change, and the pending display corresponding to the pending change were hidden at the stage of Figure 46(A), the reach title fade-in display may gradually make the decorative symbols, the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change, and the pending display corresponding to the pending change visible, or may make only a portion of them visible (for example, the decorative symbols and the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change gradually become visible, while the pending display corresponding to the pending change remains hidden). Furthermore, the display area on the performance display device 1600 for displaying the area defined by the reach title display frame 1652 and the interior of the reach title display frame 1652 is an example of a specific area that is part of the display area of the performance display device 1600.

The reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion preview performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance described above may be displayed in the same position, and may also have the same display size. This prevents the player from missing the reach title display frame 1651 and the reach title display frame 1652. The reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion preview performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance described above may be displayed in different positions while having the same display size, or may have different display sizes and display positions. At least a portion of the display position of the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion preview performance may overlap with at least a portion of the display position of the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance described above, or they may not overlap. Additionally, the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion preview performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance described above may be displayed in an area encompassed by an area in which the other is displayed.

In Figure 46 (C), the Goldfish Scooping Reach title display is being performed; that is, the title of the Goldfish Scooping Reach, which is an example of the first specific display, and stars indicating the expected probability are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652.

If the goldfish scooping reach is selected as the reach effect for the win/loss effect, the display will transition from Figure 46 (C) to Figure 47 (D2). In Figure 47 (D2), a confirmation display for the goldfish scooping reach is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the confirmation display, the title of the confirmed reach and stars indicating the expected level are enlarged, and the reach title display frame 1652 is hidden. When one second has passed since the start of the confirmation display for the goldfish scooping reach in Figure 47 (D2), the reach promotion preview display ends and the goldfish scooping reach is executed.

If a Dart Reach or Bell Throw Reach is selected as the reach effect for the win/loss effect, the display transitions from Figure 46 (C) to Figure 47 (D1). In Figure 47 (D1), the Dart Reach title is displayed; that is, the title of Dart Reach, an example of a second specific display, and stars indicating the expected level are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652. If a Dart Reach is selected as the reach effect for the win/loss effect, the display transitions from Figure 47 (D1) to Figure 47 (E2). In Figure 47 (E2), the decision display for the Dart Reach is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When one second has elapsed since the decision display for the Dart Reach began in Figure 47 (E2), the reach promotion preview effect ends and the Dart Reach is executed.

When the bell throw reach is selected as the reach effect for the win/loss effect, the display transitions from Figure 47 (D1) to Figure 47 (E1). In Figure 47 (E1), the bell throw reach title is displayed; that is, the title of the bell throw reach and stars indicating the expected level are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652. In Figure 47 (F), the bell throw reach confirmation display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When one second has passed since the start of the bell throw reach confirmation display in Figure 47 (F), the reach promotion preview display ends and the bell throw reach is executed.

In the examples of Figures 46 and 47, the reach promotion preview effect is executed while the decorative symbols are in a reach state, but the reach promotion preview effect may also be executed when the decorative symbols are not in a reach state (for example, before a reach state is formed, or when a reach state is formed but the left and center decorative symbols that form the reach state are not visible).

If the Reach Promotion Notice is executed when the decorative symbols are in a Reach state, the player can enjoy the Reach Promotion Notice with a sense of anticipation. If the Reach Promotion Notice is executed when the decorative symbols are not in a Reach state, the player can concentrate on the Reach Promotion Notice without being distracted by the Reach state.

In addition, in the examples of Figures 46 and 47, the reach promotion preview effect is executed while a pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and a pending display corresponding to the pending change are displayed, but the reach promotion preview effect may be executed while only one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is displayed, or the reach promotion preview effect may be executed while neither is displayed.

If a reach promotion preview effect is executed while a pending display corresponding to an ongoing change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach promotion preview effect while recognizing the expected degree of expectation for that change indicated by the pending display. If a reach promotion preview effect is executed while a pending display corresponding to a pending change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach promotion preview effect for the ongoing change while looking forward to the next or subsequent change.

Furthermore, if the reach promotion preview effect is executed while at least one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is not displayed, the player can concentrate on the reach promotion preview effect without being distracted by at least one of the pending displays.

The aforementioned display of flowing shooting stars as an expected effect (an expected effect different from the reach promotion preview effect) can also be executed while the reach promotion preview effect is being executed. By displaying the flowing shooting stars while the reach promotion preview effect is being executed, the sense of anticipation during the reach promotion preview effect can be increased. Furthermore, the reach promotion preview effect may be executed while the display of flowing shooting stars is being displayed.

When a reach selection notice is being executed, a specific movable body among the multiple movable bodies provided on the pachinko machine 1 is operable, and when the specific movable body moves, the chances increase; however, when a reach promotion notice is being executed, it is desirable that the specific movable body is unable to move. The reach promotion notice is an effect that itself increases the level of expectation, so there is no need to increase the chances by the movement of a movable body, but in a reach selection notice, one of the reach effects with the same level of expectation is selected, so a chance increase effect caused by the movement of a movable body will increase the player's sense of expectation.

It is also possible to make it impossible to operate the specified movable body when a reach selection preview performance is being executed, but to make it possible to operate the specified movable body when a reach promotion preview performance is being executed, or to make it possible or impossible to operate the specified movable body when both a reach selection preview performance and a reach promotion preview performance are being executed.

In addition, if the movement of a specified movable body is enabled, the movement of the specified movable body may be started when the reach selection preview performance or reach promotion preview performance is being executed, or the specified movable body may be operated before the reach selection preview performance and/or reach promotion preview performance is executed, and the reach selection preview performance or reach promotion preview performance may be started when the specified movable body is operating.

As mentioned above, when the reach title displayed within reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection preview performance changes (for example, when it changes from the title Shooting Reach to the title Shark Fishing Reach), it is desirable that a sound corresponding to the change not be output. However, when the reach title displayed within reach title display frame 1652 during the reach promotion preview performance changes (for example, when it changes from the title Goldfish Scooping Reach to the title Dart Reach), it is desirable that a sound corresponding to the change be output.

In the reach promotion preview performance, when the reach title displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652 changes, the likelihood of a jackpot increases, and the sound in question allows the player to more reliably recognize that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased, giving them a sense of elation. However, it is also possible to prevent the sound corresponding to the change from being output at the time of the change; in that case, only the player can detect it (other players cannot tell from the sound), which has the effect of providing enjoyment only to the player currently playing (reducing the embarrassment of missing).

It should be noted that during the reach promotion announcement performance, the star rotation performance described below may be executed. In the star rotation performance executed during the reach promotion announcement performance, the stars indicating the expectation level displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652 are displayed in the same manner as the star change performance executed during the reach selection announcement performance (however, the effect of decreasing the number of black stars (indicating a decrease in the expectation level) is not executed).

In other words, in the star rotation effect, a black star displayed within the reach title display frame 1652 is cycled, with or without an accompanying effect display (the outline of the black star changes while it is rotating). However, the cycle of the black star's cycle display in the star rotation effect (i.e., the time it takes for the black star to complete one rotation) is, for example, 2.0 seconds, the same as the display period of each reach title display in the reach promotion preview effect (goldfish scooping reach title display, dart reach title display, and bell throw reach title display).

The cycle of the cyclical display of black stars in the star rotation effect is the same as the display period of each reach title display in the reach promotion preview effect, so the reach title display changes every time the cyclical display of black stars completes exactly one revolution, and the reach effect is ultimately executed when exactly one revolution has been completed. This allows the player to understand the timing of the change in the reach title display and the timing of the reach effect execution, thereby reducing the player's sense of tension.

The cycle of the cyclical display of black stars in the spinning star effect may be longer or shorter than the display period of each reach title display in the reach promotion preview effect. If the cycle of the cyclical display of black stars in the spinning star effect is longer than the display period of each reach title display in the reach promotion preview effect, the cyclical display of black stars in the spinning star effect will continue for at least one cycle during the display period of each reach title display, thereby reducing the player's sense of tension regarding the reach effect.

On the other hand, if the cycle of the black stars in the spinning star effect is shorter than the display period of each reach title in the reach promotion preview effect, the cycle of the black stars in the spinning star effect will last for less than one cycle, which can increase the player's sense of tension regarding the reach effect.

As mentioned above, the confirmation display for the selected reach is displayed 3 seconds (if Goldfish Scooping Reach is selected), 4 seconds (if Dart Reach is selected), or 5 seconds (if Bell Throwing Reach is selected) after the reach promotion preview effect begins. However, if the confirmation display is displayed while a star spinning effect is being executed, it is recommended that the black stars (cycle display) spinning in the star spinning effect be hidden (before the reach effect indicated by the confirmation display begins), and then the stars indicating the degree of expectation be restored to the state they were in before the star spinning effect began. This makes it easier for players to recognize the reach title indicated by the confirmation display.

On the other hand, even if the confirmation display is displayed while the star rotation effect is being executed, the black star in the star rotation effect may be displayed rotating, and when the reach effect indicated by the confirmation display begins, the rotating black star may be made semi-transparent and hidden. In other words, the spinning black star may be displayed even when the reach effect is being executed.

In addition, even when the confirmation display is displayed while the star spinning effect is being executed, the black stars in the star spinning effect may be displayed rotating, and the black stars displayed rotating may be hidden when the reach effect indicated by the confirmation display begins. The star spinning effect may also be displayed until the end of the current variation. By displaying the star spinning effect even when the reach effect is being executed, the player can be informed of the likelihood of a jackpot even during the reach effect.

The star rotation effect is an example of a second specific effect. Below, among the effects performed in the star rotation effect and lotteries related to star rotation, explanations of those that are similar to the star change effect will be omitted as appropriate.

As mentioned above, the pending displays corresponding to changes that are currently being performed and the pending displays corresponding to changes that have been put on hold may also be dynamically cycled, with a predetermined time period as one cycle (for example, these pending displays may rotate), but unlike the rotating black star display in the rotating star effect, the outer lines of these pending displays may not change even while the cycling display is being performed, or, like the rotating black star display in the rotating star effect, the outer lines of the pending displays may change while the cycling display is being performed.

Also, as mentioned above, since the reach promotion preview effect may be executable when the hold display is displayed, the star rotation effect that can be executed during the reach promotion preview effect may also be executable when the hold display is displayed. Therefore, the black star in the star rotation effect and the hold display may be displayed simultaneously and both may be displayed in a cyclic display with a changing outer line, or the black star in the star rotation effect and the hold display may be displayed simultaneously, but the black star in the star rotation effect may be displayed in a cyclic display with a changing outer line, and the hold display may be displayed in a cyclic display with an unchanged outer line.

As mentioned above, the reach promotion preview effect may be executable when the decorative symbols are not in a reach state, and therefore the star rotation effect that can be executed during the reach promotion preview effect may also be executable when the decorative symbols are not in a reach state.

When game ball B enters the starting hole during a reach promotion notice performance (excluding over-entry), whether the variation for which the reach promotion notice performance is being performed is a jackpot variation or a miss variation, and whether a star rotation effect will be performed is determined by a lottery based on a predetermined allocation.

For example, during a reach promotion notification effect being executed in a jackpot variation, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the star rotation effect is executed with a distribution of 65/256, and the star change effect is not executed with a distribution of 191/256. Also, for example, during a reach promotion notification effect being executed in a miss variation, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the star rotation effect is executed with a distribution of 254/256, and the star rotation effect is not executed with a distribution of 2/256. Therefore, during a reach promotion notification effect, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the expected jackpot probability for that variation is 0.08% when the star rotation effect is executed, and the expected jackpot probability for that variation is 37.65% when the star rotation effect is not executed. In other words, during the reach promotion preview effect, the chances of a jackpot due to fluctuations during the effect are higher if the star rotation effect is not executed than if the star rotation effect is executed.

Because the rate of miss fluctuations is significantly higher than that of jackpot fluctuations, and because the star rotation effect is executed at an extremely high rate when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach promotion preview effect during a miss fluctuation (excluding over-winning), the star rotation effect is executed at an extremely high rate when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach promotion preview effect (excluding over-winning). In the star rotation effect, as mentioned above, the black star display rotates. Therefore, if the star rotation effect is not executed when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach promotion preview effect (excluding over-winning), in other words, if the black star display does not rotate, this suggests a high probability of a jackpot.

As described above, in the star rotation effect executed during the reach promotion announcement effect, the black stars indicating the degree of expectation displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652 are displayed in a cyclical rotation with or without effects. Note that in the star rotation effect, there may be multiple display modes for the stars indicating the degree of expectation for the reach effect, and the expected degree of a jackpot may differ depending on the display mode selected from the multiple display modes.

For example, the multiple display modes may include multiple display modes in which the stars indicating the degree of expectation (e.g., three stars when the degree of expectation is three stars) are the same color but have different rotation speeds, multiple display modes in which the stars indicating the degree of expectation of a reach effect are different colors but have the same rotation speed, or multiple display modes in which the stars indicating the degree of expectation of a reach effect are different colors and have different rotation speeds.

The rotation (cyclic display) of the black stars in the star rotation effect takes place inside the reach title display frame 1652, as described above, so that the player does not have to move their gaze from the reach title display frame 1652. The rotation (cyclic display) of the black stars in the star rotation effect may be displayed so as to straddle both the inside and outside of the reach title display frame 1652, or may be displayed outside of the reach title display frame 1652.

In addition, for example, the spinning black star (cyclic display) in the star spinning effect may be highlighted outside the reach title display frame 1652 (for example, by enlarging the spinning black star (cyclic display) or by displaying the spinning black star (cyclic display) more than once), and then returning to the inside of the reach title display frame 1652, or the highlighting may only be displayed outside the reach title display frame 1652 (without returning to the inside). Such highlighting effects can make the spinning black star more appealing to the player.

When the aforementioned retry pattern is selected, if game ball B enters the starting hole while the reach promotion preview effect is being executed first (excluding over-winning), the star rotation effect begins, and the rotating display of black stars (cycle display) begins. Even if the reach promotion preview effect ends and the retry effect begins, the rotating display of black stars (cycle display) in the star rotation effect continues to be displayed, and even if the reach promotion preview effect executed again after the retry effect begins, the rotating display of black stars (cycle display) in the star rotation effect continues to be displayed. In this way, even if the reach promotion preview effect executed first ends, the rotating display of black stars in the star rotation effect continues, allowing the player to recognize that the "retry pattern" has been selected.

In a retry pattern, when a reach promotion preview effect is executed again after a retry effect, the position of the spinning black star in the star rotation effect may continue to be displayed without changing (from the position where the black star was displayed when the previous reach promotion preview effect before the retry effect was executed), or the spinning black star may be hidden. By not changing the display position of the black star even when it continues to be displayed, the appearance of the continuously displayed black star improves. Furthermore, if a retry effect is executed multiple times in one variation, an appropriate combination of continuing to display/not displaying the spinning black star at the end of the first reach promotion preview effect and continuing to display/not displaying the spinning black star at the end of the second reach promotion preview effect may be executed.

If you win the lottery to determine whether or not to execute a winning effect (and that winning effect has not yet been executed), and you win the lottery with the following specified probability under the following conditions, that winning effect will be canceled. The lottery to determine whether or not to cancel the winning effect and the cancellation process will be carried out, for example, after the lottery to determine whether or not to execute a star change effect.

Specifically, for example, if the current variation is a losing variation and the lottery result is that the star change effect will be executed, the winning effect will be canceled with a probability of 0/256 (which may also be 1/256, i.e., there is a possibility that the winning effect will be canceled); if the current variation is a losing variation and the lottery result is that the star change effect will not be executed, the winning effect will be canceled with a probability of 128/256; if the current variation is a jackpot variation and the lottery result is that the star change effect will be executed, the winning effect will be canceled with a probability of 256/256 (which may also be 255/256, i.e., there is a possibility that the winning effect will not be canceled); and if the current variation is a jackpot variation and the lottery result is that the star change effect will not be executed, the winning effect will be canceled with a probability of 256/256 (which may also be 255/256, i.e., there is a possibility that the winning effect will not be canceled).

In other words, if the current variation is a losing variation and the lottery result is that a star change effect will be executed, if the lottery result is that a winning effect will be executed, the winning effect will be executed without being canceled. In this way, if the above lottery result is obtained during a losing variation, the winning effect will be executed in addition to the star change effect, which can sufficiently heighten the player's sense of anticipation even in the case of a losing variation.

[6-5-3. Reach execution notice effect]
The following describes a reach execution notice effect, which is an example of the first predetermined effect. The reach execution notice effect is an effect that suggests that the game will develop into a final battle reach. In the reach execution notice effect, an effect is performed in which a character and equipment for the character are selected.

If the character's equipment is complete during the reach execution preview, a final battle reach performance will be performed, which has a high chance of resulting in a big win. However, if there is incomplete equipment (armor is selected but no weapon is), the character will not be able to defeat the enemy and will likely lose (a miss).

As mentioned above, in the reach execution preview performance, the character who will battle in the final battle reach and that character's equipment can be customized (the player can select their favorite character and equip that character with their favorite armor), so even if the character does not have a weapon in the reach execution preview performance (i.e., even if defeat (a miss) is likely), it can distract the player.

Figure 48 shows an example of a timing chart for the reach execution notice effect. From 0 seconds until 1 second into the reach execution notice effect, the weapon collection start effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. From 1 second until 3 seconds into the effect, a character selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, allowing the player to select one character from multiple characters. From 3 seconds until 4 seconds into the effect, a character decision display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, indicating the one selected character.

From 4 seconds to 6 seconds into the game, a headgear selection display is displayed on the display device 1600, allowing the player to select one piece of headgear from multiple pieces of headgear. From 6 seconds to 7 seconds into the game, a headgear decision display is displayed on the display device 1600, indicating the selected piece of headgear.

From 7 seconds to 9 seconds into the game, a body armor selection display is displayed on the display device 1600, allowing the player to select one piece of body armor from multiple pieces of body armor. From 9 seconds to 10 seconds into the game, a body armor decision display is displayed on the display device 1600, indicating the selected piece of body armor.

From 10 seconds to 12 seconds into the game, a foot equipment selection display is displayed on the display device 1600, allowing the player to select one piece of foot equipment from multiple pieces of foot equipment. From 12 seconds to 13 seconds into the game, a foot equipment decision display is displayed on the display device 1600, indicating the selected piece of foot equipment.

From 13 seconds to 15 seconds into the game, a weapon selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, allowing one weapon to be selected from multiple weapons (the player cannot select the weapon). From 15 seconds to 16 seconds into the game, a weapon decision display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, indicating the selected weapon. Note that in the weapon selection display, a weapon may not be selected (an "X" is selected). In this case, the weapon decision display will display a message indicating that a weapon could not be selected.

From 16 seconds to 19 seconds after the start, a result display showing the selected head gear, body gear, and foot gear, as well as the selected weapon, is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the reach execution preview effect ends 19 seconds after the start. Once the reach execution preview effect ends, a display corresponding to the result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (an indication that it will or will not develop into a final battle reach is displayed, and if it develops into a final battle reach, an effect of the selected character equipped with the selected head gear, body gear, and foot gear, as well as the selected weapon, is displayed).

Note that while the time intervals for the silhouettes of multiple pieces of armor to fill in are the same, it is also possible to have the silhouettes not fill in at regular intervals, such as displaying the head armor selection for 3 seconds and the foot armor selection for 1 second, or the time from when the relatively earlier (first) character silhouette fills in until the foot armor silhouette fills in after the body armor silhouette fills in relatively later (later) may be longer than the time from when the relatively earlier (first) character silhouette fills in until the head armor silhouette fills in, or the time from when the relatively later (last) body armor silhouette fills in until the foot armor silhouette fills in may be shorter than the time from when the relatively earlier (first) character silhouette fills in until the head armor silhouette fills in.

In addition, during the reach execution preview performance, when each selection display (character selection display, head armor selection display, body armor selection display, leg armor selection display, and weapon selection display) is displayed, it is the effective operation period for the press operation unit 303, and the total length of these effective operation periods is 10 seconds. On the other hand, during the reach selection preview performance described above, the effective operation period for the press operation unit 303 is from the start to 8.5 seconds, i.e., the length of the effective operation period for the press operation unit 303 is 8.5 seconds.

In other words, the length of the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303 differs between the reach execution preview performance and the reach selection preview performance (the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303 in the reach execution preview performance is longer). Because the reach execution preview performance is executed in a variable pattern with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach selection preview performance, the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303 in the reach execution preview performance is longer, allowing the player to enjoy operating the press operation unit 303 for a longer period of time in the reach execution preview performance.

The length of the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 may be the same for the reach execution preview performance and the reach selection preview performance, or the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 in the reach selection preview performance may be longer than the (total) effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 in the reach execution preview performance.

As mentioned above, during the reach execution preview performance, when each selection display (character selection display, head armor selection display, body armor selection display, foot armor selection display, and weapon selection display) is displayed, operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is valid; however, when each decision display (character decision display, head armor decision display, body armor decision display, foot armor decision display, and weapon decision display) is displayed, operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is invalid.

Figures 49, 50, and 51 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of reach execution preview effects. Figure 49 (A) shows the state in which the reach execution preview effect has started, with the weapon collection start effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 displaying the message "Collect weapons and defeat the enemy!".

In Figure 49 (B), the character selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From the start of the character selection display until partway through the result display, the performance display device 1600 displays a selected equipment display frame 1653. The selected characters and equipment are displayed inside the selected equipment display frame 1653 (unselected characters and equipment are displayed, for example, as silhouettes). Note that the display area on the performance display device 1600 for displaying the area defined by the selected equipment display frame 1653 and the inside of the selected equipment display frame 1653 is an example of a predetermined area that is part of the display area of the performance display device 1600.

The selected equipment display frame 1653 may consist of straight lines only, as shown in Figure 49, or may consist of straight lines and curves, or may consist of curves only. It is also desirable that the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution notice performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection notice performance described above have the same display size but different display positions. This prevents the player from missing the reach title display frame 1651 and the selected equipment display frame 1653.

Furthermore, the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution preview performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance described above may be displayed in the same display size and the same display position, or they may be different display sizes and display positions. Furthermore, at least a portion of the display position of the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution preview performance and at least a portion of the display position of the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance described above may overlap, or may not overlap. Furthermore, the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution preview performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance described above may be displayed in an area encompassed by an area in which the other is displayed.

It is also desirable that the display size of the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution preview performance and the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion preview performance described above are the same, but are displayed in different positions. This prevents the player from missing the reach title display frame 1652 and the selected equipment display frame 1653.

Furthermore, the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution preview performance and the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion preview performance described above may be displayed in the same display size and the same display position, or they may be different display sizes and display positions. Furthermore, at least a portion of the display position of the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution preview performance and at least a portion of the display position of the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion preview performance described above may overlap, or may not overlap. Furthermore, the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution preview performance and the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion preview performance described above may be displayed in an area encompassed by an area in which the other is displayed.

In addition, in the character selection display, multiple characters (male and female characters) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and a flashing aura is displayed around one of the multiple characters. The character for which the aura is displayed changes every time a predetermined time elapses.

When the character selection display begins, the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 begins, and this valid operation period ends when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or when two seconds have passed since the start of this valid operation period (the same timing as when the display of the character selection display ends). When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during this valid operation period, the character whose aura is displayed is selected.

In addition, in each of the character selection display, head armor selection display, body armor selection display, foot armor selection display, and favorite selection display, from the start of the selection display until the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 for that selection display ends, a button image 1633 prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 and a gauge 1634 indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period are displayed.

In Figure 49 (C), the character selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the character selection display, the character selected in the character selection display is highlighted for approximately 0.2 seconds outside the equipment display frame 1653 (such as by displaying the selected character flashing or an effect), and then moves toward the silhouette of the character in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over the course of 0.3 seconds, and once the movement is complete, the silhouette changes to color (the selected character). Note that if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the character selection display, the movement display will not occur, and the character displayed in the selected equipment display frame 1653 will remain as a silhouette.

In Figure 49 (D), a head gear selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the head gear selection display, multiple head gear pieces (blue head gear, green head gear, red head gear, and yellow head gear) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and a flashing aura is displayed around one of the multiple head gear pieces. The head gear piece that displays the aura changes every time a predetermined time elapses. Note that while multiple head gear pieces have been described as having the same shape but different colors, multiple pieces of gear with different outlines may also be displayed. This also applies to multiple body armor pieces, leg armor pieces, and weapons, which will be described later.

When the headgear selection display begins, the effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 begins, and this effective operation period ends when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or when two seconds have passed since the effective operation period began (the same timing as when the headgear selection display ends). When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during this effective operation period, the headgear for which the aura is displayed is selected.

In Figure 49 (E), the head gear selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the head gear selection display, the head gear selected in the head gear selection display is highlighted for approximately 0.2 seconds outside the equipment display frame 1653 (for example, by flashing the selected head gear or displaying an effect), and then moves toward the silhouette of the head gear in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over the course of 0.3 seconds, and once this movement is complete, the silhouette changes to color (the selected head gear). Note that if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the head gear selection display, the movement display does not occur, and the head gear displayed in the selected equipment display frame 1653 remains as a silhouette.

In Figure 49 (F), a body armor selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the body armor selection display, multiple body armor pieces (blue body armor, green body armor, red body armor, and yellow body armor) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and a flashing aura is displayed around one of the multiple body armor pieces. The body armor piece that displays the aura changes every time a predetermined time elapses.

When the body armor selection display begins, the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 begins, and this valid operation period ends when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or when two seconds have passed since the start of this valid operation period (the same timing as when the display of the body armor selection display ends). When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during this valid operation period, the body armor with the aura displayed is selected.

In Figure 50 (G), the body armor selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the body armor selection display, the body armor selected in the body armor selection display is highlighted for approximately 0.2 seconds outside the equipment display frame 1653 (such as by flashing the selected body armor or displaying an effect), and then moves toward the silhouette of the body armor in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over the course of 0.3 seconds, and once this movement is complete, the silhouette changes to color (the selected body armor). Note that if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the body armor selection display, the movement display does not occur, and the body armor displayed in the selected equipment display frame 1653 remains as a silhouette.

In Figure 50 (H), a foot armor selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the foot armor selection display, multiple pieces of foot armor (blue foot armor, green foot armor, red foot armor, and yellow foot armor) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and a flashing aura is displayed around one of the multiple pieces of foot armor. The foot armor for which the aura is displayed changes every time a predetermined time elapses. In Figure 50 (H), the display in which a weapon and foot armor are displayed in silhouette inside the selected equipment display frame 1653 is an example of a first predetermined display.

When the foot armor selection display begins, the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 begins, and this valid operation period ends when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or when two seconds have passed since the valid operation period began (the same timing as when the display of the foot armor selection display ends). When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during this valid operation period, the foot armor with the aura displayed is selected.

In Figure 50 (I), the foot gear selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the foot gear selection display, the foot gear selected in the foot gear selection display is highlighted for approximately 0.2 seconds outside the equipment display frame 1653 (for example, by flashing the selected foot gear or displaying an effect), and then moves toward the silhouette of the foot gear in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over the course of 0.3 seconds, and once this movement is complete, the silhouette changes to color (the selected foot gear). Note that if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the foot gear selection display, the movement display does not occur, and the foot gear displayed in the selected equipment display frame 1653 remains as a silhouette.

In Figure 50 (J), the weapon selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the weapon selection display, multiple weapons (an "X", a silver sword, a gold sword, and a rainbow sword) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and are rapidly and repeatedly enlarged and hidden in the order of "X", silver sword, gold sword, and rainbow sword. The display in Figure 50 (J), in which only the weapon is displayed as a silhouette inside the selected equipment display frame 1653, is an example of a second predetermined display.

When the weapon selection display begins, the valid operation period for the press operation unit 303 begins, and this valid operation period ends when the press operation unit 303 is operated, or when two seconds have passed since the start of the valid operation period (the same timing as when the weapon selection display ends). A weapon is selected when the valid operation period ends (i.e., when the press operation unit 303 is operated during the valid operation period, or when two seconds have passed since the start of the valid operation period without the press operation unit 303 being operated). However, the weapon selected is determined by the lottery described above, and does not depend on the timing of the operation of the press operation unit 303.

In the example of Figure 50 below, it is assumed that the lottery result is that one of the weapons is selected in the weapon selection display (i.e., something other than "X" is selected). In Figure 50 (K), the weapon decision display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the weapon decision display when one of the weapons is selected in the weapon selection display (i.e., something other than "X" is selected), the weapon selected in the weapon selection display is highlighted for approximately 0.2 seconds outside the equipment display frame 1653 (such as by flashing the selected weapon or displaying an effect), and then moves toward the silhouette of the weapon in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over the course of 0.3 seconds, and once this movement is complete, the silhouette changes to color (representing the selected weapon).

In Figure 50 (L), the result display when a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the result display displays the words "Equipment Decided!!", indicating that the character and equipment have been decided, overlapping the selected equipment display frame 1653 and extending beyond (the outline of) the selected equipment display frame 1653. By displaying these words in this way, the player can be sure that the equipment has been decided, i.e., that the weapon has also been selected, and can anticipate that the game will soon progress to the final battle reach. In Figure 50 (L), the display with no silhouette within the selected equipment display frame 1653 and the words "Equipment Decided!!" extending beyond the outline of the selected equipment display frame 1653 is an example of a third predetermined display.

For example, if no head gear that the player can customize has been selected (i.e., if the pressing operation unit 303 has not been operated during the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the head gear selection display), at the start of the result display, one head gear will be determined, for example, by equally dividing it from multiple head gear pieces (blue head gear, green head gear, red head gear, and yellow head gear), and the character will be equipped with that determined head gear in the result display. This is also the case if no character, body gear, or foot gear that the player can customize has been selected. The same is also true for the result display when no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display described below.

Figure 51 (M) shows the continuation of the result display when a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display. For example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of Figure 51 (L) began, the display transitions to Figure 51 (M). In Figure 51 (M), the selected equipment display frame 1653 is erased, and the selected character is displayed equipped with the selected head armor, body armor, foot armor, and weapon. Note that by displaying the area in which the character is displayed occupying a large proportion of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 (e.g., more than half of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600), it is possible to appeal to the player that the character will be fighting in the final battle reach.

Figure 51 (N) shows the state in which the final battle reach begins after the reach execution preview effect, in which a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display, has ended. When a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display, the reach execution preview effect ends three seconds after the result display begins (i.e., the result display is displayed for three seconds), and the game moves on to the final battle reach. Although not shown in the figure, as mentioned above, a final battle reach effect is executed with characters equipped with the armor and weapons determined in the reach execution preview effect. Note that, as mentioned above, the final battle reach effect may also be a jackpot confirmation effect.

Figure 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation when no weapon is selected in the reach execution notice presentation. Figure 52 (J) shows the same presentation as Figure 50 (J). Hereinafter, in the example of Figure 52, it will be assumed that the lottery result is that no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display (i.e., "X" is selected).

In Figure 52 (K2), the weapon selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display (i.e., "X" is selected), the weapon selection display shows "X" outside the selected equipment display frame 1653, and the silhouette of the weapon within the selected equipment display frame 1653 is displayed as is.

In FIG. 52 (K2), characters and pieces of armor whose silhouettes are hidden within the selected equipment display frame 1653 may be returned to their silhouettes. In this case, the hidden characters and pieces of armor may be returned to their silhouettes all at once, or the hidden characters and pieces may be returned to their silhouettes in stages (for example, head armor is removed to reveal a silhouette, and then body armor is removed to reveal a silhouette). When returning to their silhouettes in stages, the determined characters and pieces of armor may be returned to their silhouettes in a random order, in a determined order (character, head armor, body armor, foot armor), or in the order determined most recently (foot armor, body armor, head armor, character).

In Figure 52 (L2), the display of the results when no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In Figure 52 (L2), the selected equipment display frame 1653 is erased, and the selected character is shown disappointed, equipped with the selected head armor, body armor, and foot armor (but no weapon). In addition, the words "It's impossible without a weapon" are displayed on the effect display device 1600. These displays ensure that the player is aware that the game will not develop into a final battle reach, preventing the player from getting any unnecessary expectations.

In addition, the area in which the disappointed character is displayed may be displayed in a manner that occupies a large proportion of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, more than half of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600), thereby more reliably conveying to the player that the final battle reach will not occur.

Figure 52 (M2) shows the state in which the decorative symbols stop in a losing combination after the reach execution preview effect has ended, in which no weapon was selected in the weapon selection display. If no weapon was selected in the weapon selection display, the reach execution preview effect ends three seconds after the result display begins (i.e., the result display is displayed for three seconds), and the decorative symbols stop in a losing combination.

The display time for the result display when no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display may be shorter (for example, 2 seconds) than the 3 seconds that is the display time for the result display when any weapon is selected in the weapon selection display. This can reduce the player's disappointment when a result display is displayed when no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display, and can increase the player's sense of elation when a result display is displayed when a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display.

In the examples of Figures 49 to 52, the reach execution preview effect is executed while the decorative symbols are in a reach state, but the reach execution preview effect may also be executed when the decorative symbols are not in a reach state (for example, before a reach state is formed, or when a reach state is formed but the left and center decorative symbols that form the reach state are not visible).

If the reach execution notice effect is executed while the decorative symbols are in a reach state, the player can enjoy the reach execution notice effect with growing anticipation, and if the reach execution notice effect is executed while the decorative symbols are not in a reach state, the player can concentrate on the reach execution notice effect without being distracted by the reach state.

In addition, in the examples of Figures 49 to 52, the reach execution preview performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and a pending display corresponding to the pending change are displayed, but the reach execution preview performance may be executed while only one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change or the pending display corresponding to the pending change is displayed, or the reach execution preview performance may be executed while neither is displayed.

If a reach execution notice is executed while a pending display corresponding to an ongoing change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach execution notice while recognizing the degree of expectation of that change indicated by the pending display. If a reach execution notice is executed while a pending display corresponding to a pending change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach execution notice for the ongoing change while looking forward to the next or subsequent change.

Furthermore, if the reach execution notice is executed while at least one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is not displayed, the player can concentrate on the reach execution notice without being distracted by at least one of the pending displays.

The aforementioned display of shooting stars as an expected effect (an expected effect different from the reach execution preview effect) can also be executed while the reach execution preview effect is being executed. By displaying the shooting stars while the reach execution preview effect is being executed, the sense of anticipation during the reach execution preview effect can be increased. Furthermore, the reach execution preview effect may be executed while the display of shooting stars is being displayed.

The shooting star display may be able to be displayed in the reach selection preview performance but not in the reach promotion preview performance, or may be unable to be displayed in the reach selection preview performance but able to be displayed in the reach promotion preview performance, or may be unable to be displayed in either the reach selection preview performance or the reach promotion preview performance, or may be able to be displayed in either the reach selection preview performance or the reach promotion preview performance.

Furthermore, the shooting star display may be able to be displayed in the reach selection preview performance but not in the reach execution preview performance, or may be unable to be displayed in the reach selection preview performance but able to be displayed in the reach execution preview performance, or may be unable to be displayed in either the reach selection preview performance or the reach execution preview performance, or may be able to be displayed in either the reach selection preview performance or the reach execution preview performance.

Furthermore, the shooting star display may be able to be displayed in the reach promotion preview performance but not in the reach execution preview performance, or may be unable to be displayed in the reach promotion preview performance but able to be displayed in the reach execution preview performance, or may be unable to be displayed in either the reach promotion preview performance or the reach execution preview performance, or may be able to be displayed in either the reach promotion preview performance or the reach execution preview performance.

When the reach selection notice performance is being executed, a specific movable body among the multiple movable bodies provided on the pachinko machine 1 is operable, and when this specific movable body operates, the chances increase; however, it is desirable that this specific movable body is unable to operate when the reach execution notice performance is being executed. In the reach execution notice performance, the expectation level changes depending on the weapon selected, so there is no need to increase the chances by the movement of the movable body; however, in the reach selection notice performance, one of the reach effects with the same expectation level is selected, so the player's sense of expectation is enhanced if there is a chance increase effect based on the movement of the movable body.

It is possible to make it impossible to operate the specified movable body when the reach selection preview performance is being executed, but to make it possible to operate the specified movable body when the reach execution preview performance is being executed, or to make it possible or impossible to operate the specified movable body when both the reach selection preview performance and the reach execution preview performance are being executed.

In addition, if the movement of a specified movable body is enabled, the movement of the specified movable body may be initiated when the reach selection preview performance or reach execution preview performance is being executed, or the specified movable body may be operated before the reach selection preview performance or reach execution preview performance is executed, and the reach selection preview performance or reach execution preview performance may be initiated when the specified movable body is operating.

In addition, in the example above, it was desirable that the specified movable body be unable to move when the reach promotion preview effect is being executed, but it would also be possible for the specified movable body to be able to move when the reach promotion preview effect is being executed, and for the specified movable body to move, the chances of winning will increase. On the other hand, in the reach execution preview effect, as mentioned above, it is desirable that the specified movable body be unable to move when the reach execution preview effect is being executed. In reach execution preview effects, the player has many opportunities to select armor, so the player may not think about the chances of winning increased by the movement of the movable body, but in reach promotion preview effects, the player does not have an opportunity to make a selection, so the chances of winning increased by the movement of the movable body can be executed, which can provide the player with points that increase their interest.

Note that while it may be impossible to operate the specified movable body when a reach promotion preview performance is being executed, it may be possible to operate the specified movable body when a reach execution preview performance is being executed, or it may be possible or impossible to operate the specified movable body both when a reach promotion preview performance is being executed and when a reach execution preview performance is being executed. Note that if operation of the specified movable body is possible, the operation of the specified movable body may be started when a reach promotion preview performance or reach execution preview performance is being executed, or the specified movable body may be operated before the reach promotion preview performance or reach execution preview performance is executed, and the reach promotion preview performance or reach execution preview performance may be started when the specified movable body is operating.

As mentioned above, when the reach title displayed within reach title display frame 1651 changes during the reach selection preview performance (for example, when it changes from the title Shooting Reach to the title Shark Fishing Reach), it is desirable that no sound corresponding to the change is output; however, when the silhouette of the armor displayed within selected equipment display frame 1653 during the reach execution preview performance changes to the selected armor, it is desirable that a sound corresponding to the change is output. By outputting a sound corresponding to the change during the reach execution preview performance, the player can be made aware that weapon selection will begin in a little while, that is, that the time has come to announce the expected probability of a jackpot.

In addition, any of the following combinations may be applied: when the display inside the reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection preview performance changes from the title display of the shooting reach to the title display of the shark fishing reach, a sound corresponding to the change is/is not output; when the display changes from a state in which the weapon and foot armor are displayed as silhouettes to a state in which only the weapon is displayed as silhouette during the reach execution preview performance, a sound corresponding to the change is/is not output; and when the display changes from a state in which only the weapon is displayed as silhouette to a state in which there is no silhouette ("Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed beyond the outline of the selected equipment display frame 1653), a sound corresponding to the change is/is not output.

In the example described above, when the reach title displayed within reach title display frame 1652 changes during the reach promotion preview performance (for example, when it changes from the title Goldfish Scooping Reach to the title Dirt Reach), it is desirable for a sound corresponding to the change to be output, but it is also possible for the sound corresponding to the change not to be output. On the other hand, as described above, when the silhouette of the armor displayed within selected equipment display frame 1653 during the reach execution preview performance changes to the selected armor, it is desirable for a sound corresponding to the change to be output.

In addition, any of the following combinations may be applied: when the display inside the reach title display frame 1652 changes from the title display of Goldfish Scooping Reach to the title display of Dart Reach during a reach promotion preview performance, a sound corresponding to said change is/is not output; when the display changes from a state in which the weapon and foot armor are displayed as silhouettes to a state in which only the weapon is displayed as silhouette during a reach execution preview performance, a sound corresponding to said change is/is not output; and when the display changes from a state in which only the weapon is displayed as silhouette to a state in which there is no silhouette ("Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed beyond the outline of the selected equipment display frame 1653), a sound corresponding to said change is/is not output.

Figure 53 shows an example of the data structure of a character equipment allocation table used in the reach execution preview performance. The character equipment allocation table 530 is stored, for example, in a peripheral control ROM. The character equipment allocation table 530 shows the allocation of characters and each piece of equipment selected in the reach execution preview performance for each special lottery result. Note that, as the characters, head armor, body armor, and foot armor can be determined depending on the operation timing of the pressing operation unit 303 as described above, allocation is not defined in the character equipment allocation table 530.

If there is a loss even when the final battle reach performance develops (in other words, if the allocation in the variation pattern table 390 is predetermined so that variation pattern "SP Reach 3" can be selected when the special lottery result is a loss), the allocation "*1" in the character equipment allocation table 530 will be used.

In the allocation of "※1", the selection probability for a jackpot fluctuation is "×" < Rainbow Sword < Gold Sword < Silver Sword, and the selection probability for a miss fluctuation is "×" < Silver Sword < Gold Sword < Rainbow Sword. Also, the expected probability of a jackpot is "×" < Silver Sword < Gold Sword < Rainbow Sword, and if the Rainbow Sword is selected, a jackpot is confirmed.

If the "*1" allocation is used and "x" is selected in the jackpot variation, the result display will show the same as in Figure 52 (L2), and then the words "But I've got fists!" (special display) will be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a continuation of the result display, and once the result display has finished, a final battle reach will be executed with characters fighting with their fists.

Also, if the final battle reach effect is reached and a jackpot is confirmed (in other words, if the allocation in the variation pattern table 390 is predetermined so that the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" can only be selected when the special lottery result is a jackpot), the allocation "*2" in the character equipment allocation table 530 will be used.

In the allocation of "※2", the selection rate for jackpot variations that grant probability swings is "×" < Rainbow Sword < Gold Sword < Silver Sword, and the selection rate for jackpot variations that do not grant probability swings is "×" = Rainbow Sword < Gold Sword < Silver Sword. Also, the expected probability swing rate is Silver Sword < Gold Sword < Rainbow Sword = "×", and if Rainbow Sword or "×" is selected, probability swing is confirmed.

If the allocation of "*2" is used and "x" is selected in a jackpot variation that grants a probability change, the result display will show the same as that shown in Figure 52 (L2), and then the words "But I've got fists!" (special display) will be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a continuation of the result display, and once the result display has finished, a final battle reach will be executed with characters fighting with their fists.

The allocations in "*1" and "*2" both indicate allocations for results with different degrees of advantage obtained, but other allocations may also be specified for jackpot variations with and without time-saving effects, as well as allocations for the number of time-saving effects applied to jackpot variations with time-saving effects.

Another example of the reach execution preview performance will be described below. In this example, the effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 also begins when the various decision displays (character decision display, head armor decision display, body armor decision display, foot armor decision display, and weapon decision display) begin to be displayed. In other words, the effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 begins during each display period from the character selection display to the weapon decision display.

In this alternative example, for example, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the character selection display but is operated during the character determination display, the silhouette of the character displayed within the selected equipment display frame 1653 changes to one of multiple characters, for example, according to a predetermined allocation. Specifically, for example, characters are selected in an even distribution of male and female characters. Furthermore, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the character determination display, the silhouette may not be filled in. For example, a male character may be selected in 1/10 distribution, a female character may be selected in 2/10 distribution, and an unfilled silhouette may be selected in 7/10 distribution. In this case, the silhouette may be filled in (i.e., one of the characters may be selected) in most distributions (e.g., more than 1/2 distribution), or the silhouette may not be filled in in most distributions (e.g., more than 1/2 distribution). Similar effects can also be produced for player-customizable head armor, body armor, and foot armor. Additionally, among the decision displays, the silhouette may be filled in with many allocations in the character decision display, but not filled in with many allocations in the head armor decision display, and other appropriate combinations may be applied; alternatively, the silhouette may be filled in with many allocations in the first half of the decision display (for example, character and head armor), but not filled in with many allocations in the second half of the decision display (for example, body armor and foot armor).

In this alternative example, for example, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the character selection display, character decision display, and head gear selection display, but is operated during the head gear decision display, the silhouette of the character that was selectable before the head gear will be displayed as changing to one of multiple characters (e.g., selected equally from the multiple characters) (note that this changing display may occur with a 1/2 probability) (rather than both the character and head gear silhouettes displayed within the selected equipment display frame 1653 changing).

In this case, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the valid operation period does not end, and the silhouette of the headgear that is operated by pressing operation unit 303 again is displayed changing to one of multiple pieces of headgear (for example, selected equally from the multiple pieces of headgear) (note that this display change may occur with a 50/50 probability). In other words, if multiple customizations have not been performed, the character or part of the armor will remain as a silhouette unless the pressing operation unit 303 is operated multiple times in the confirmation display. The same applies if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated until the end of the body armor selection display or the end of the foot armor selection display.

Furthermore, for example, when the press operation unit 303 is operated in the head armor selection display when the character in the selected equipment display frame 1653 is in silhouette, or when the press operation unit 303 is operated in the body armor selection display when the character and head armor in the selected equipment display frame 1653 are in silhouette, if there are one or more characters and armor pieces whose silhouettes have not been filled in (not selected) among the characters and armor pieces whose decision display has been completed, and the press operation unit 303 is operated in the selection display of any of the subsequent armor pieces, the following effect will be performed. For example, when the pressing unit 303 is operated during the selection display of any of the subsequent pieces of armor, an effect is produced in which the silhouette of that piece of armor is filled in; if the operation valid period of the pressing unit 303 continues thereafter, and if the pressing unit 303 is further operated during the operation valid period, an effect is produced in which the silhouettes of the unfilled pieces are filled in according to a predetermined distribution (if there are multiple unfilled silhouettes, an effect is produced in which the silhouettes are filled in according to the predetermined distribution, randomly, in order from the earliest selection display, or in order from the latest selection display). Also, for example, when the pressing unit 303 is operated during the selection display of any of the subsequent pieces of armor, an effect is produced in which the silhouettes of the unfilled pieces are filled in according to a predetermined distribution, prior to that piece of armor (if there are multiple unfilled silhouettes, an effect is produced in which the silhouettes are filled in according to the predetermined distribution, randomly, in order from the earliest selection display, or in order from the latest selection display).

Furthermore, in this alternative example, if there is a silhouette portion within the selected equipment display frame 1653 at the start of the result display, the equipment or character corresponding to the silhouette portion may be determined by equal lottery (however, for weapons, it may be determined by lottery based on the allocation indicated by the character equipment allocation table 530), and the determined character wearing the determined equipment may be displayed in the result display, or the equipment or character corresponding to the silhouette portion may be displayed as a silhouette in the result display.

Also, if there is a silhouette portion within the selected equipment display frame 1653 at the start of the result display, if the variation is a jackpot, the equipment or character corresponding to the silhouette portion may be determined by equal lottery (however, for weapons, it may be determined by lottery based on the allocation shown in the character equipment allocation table 530), and the determined character wearing the determined equipment may be displayed in the result display, or if the variation is a loser, the equipment or character corresponding to the silhouette portion may be displayed as a silhouette in the result display.

If game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning) during a reach selection notice performance or reach promotion notice performance, the aforementioned winning performance, star change performance, and star rotation performance will be performed, but if game ball B enters the starting hole during a reach execution notice performance, the winning performance, star change performance, and star rotation performance will not be performed. Specifically, for example, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning) during a reach execution notice performance, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform the aforementioned winning performance, but even if the lottery determines that a winning performance will be performed, the winning performance will be canceled.

Furthermore, for example, even if game ball B enters the starting hole during a reach execution notice performance, no lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a star change performance or star rotation performance. After the reach execution notice performance ends, there is a possibility that the final battle reach, which has the highest chance of winning, will be executed. However, if a prize-winning performance, star change performance, or star rotation performance were executed in response to a win during the reach execution notice performance, the player might think that the chance of winning the corresponding win is lower than the chance of winning the current variation (in other words, that it will not develop into a final battle reach), which could reduce the player's sense of excitement. Therefore, prize-winning performances, star change performances, and star rotation performances are not executed during a reach execution notice performance.

In addition, to give the player a sense of anticipation for the changes that will occur when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach execution notice performance, it may be possible to execute a winning effect during the reach execution notice performance. In this case, the lottery to determine whether or not to execute a winning effect during the reach execution notice performance is the same as the lottery to determine whether or not to execute a winning effect during the reach selection notice performance or reach promotion notice performance, for example, and the content of the winning effect executed during the reach execution notice performance is the same as the content of the winning effect executed during the reach selection notice performance or reach promotion notice performance, for example.

[6-6. Couple Production]
The couple effect will be explained below. In the couple effect, which is an example of the second predetermined effect, a winning effect different from the winning effect described above is executed. When a game ball B enters the starting hole while a variation is being performed (excluding over-winning), a lottery is held to determine whether the different winning effect will be executed or not, depending on whether the variation is a jackpot variation or a loss variation.

This other winning effect can be executed at any time except when a reach effect (final battle reach) is being executed as a winning or losing effect for the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" and when a reach execution notice effect is being executed. In other words, this other winning effect can be executed when a reach effect is being executed as a winning or losing effect for the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2", and this other winning effect can also be executed when a reach selection notice effect or reach promotion notice effect is being executed.

When the Final Battle Reach or Reach Execution Notice effect is being executed, the likelihood of a jackpot is high, so executing the other winning effect could interfere with these effects and reduce the player's interest. On the other hand, when the Reach effect, Reach Selection Notice effect, or Reach Promotion Notice effect is being executed as a win/loss effect for the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2," the likelihood of a jackpot is not high, so executing the other winning effect can give the player a sense of anticipation.

It is also possible that the aforementioned winning effect and the other winning effect are executed simultaneously. Note that when a final battle reach is being executed, or when a reach execution notice effect is being executed, the lottery to determine whether or not the other winning effect will be executed may not be executed, or a lottery to determine whether or not the other winning effect will be executed may be executed, and if the lottery determines that the other winning effect will be executed, the other winning effect may be canceled.

For example, when game ball B enters the starting hole during a jackpot variation (excluding over-winning), the other winning effect is executed with a 64/256 allocation, and not executed with a 192/256 allocation. Also, for example, when game ball B enters the starting hole during a losing variation (excluding over-winning), the other winning effect is executed with a 255/256 allocation, and not executed with a 1/256 allocation. Therefore, when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the expected probability of a jackpot in that variation if the other winning effect is executed is 0.08%, and the expected probability of a jackpot in that variation if the other winning effect is not executed is 37.65%.

In other words, because the rate of miss fluctuations is extremely higher than the rate of jackpot fluctuations, according to the allocation described above, when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), there is an extremely high rate at which the other winning effect is executed. However, if the other winning effect is not executed when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the probability of a jackpot in the ongoing fluctuation is high, giving the player a sense of anticipation. Furthermore, even if the other winning effect is executed when game ball B enters the starting hole, the player's attention can be directed to the next fluctuation.

Figure 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a couple presentation. Figures 54 (A) to 54 (D) each show the display content of the entire presentation display device 1600, and also show an enlarged view of the display content within the couple display frame 1654 displayed within the display area of the presentation display device 1600.

Figure 54 (A) shows the state when not changing. The performance display device 1600 displays a festival background image such as lanterns, fireworks, and happi coats, decorative patterns that are stopped in a losing combination, and a couple display frame 1654. Within the couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54 (A), a scene is displayed of an innocent high school couple (a duo consisting of one person with "Taka" written on their torso and "Male" written on their head, and another person with "Taka" written on their torso and "Female" written on their head) who have come to the festival, sitting in chairs facing each other.

The display position and size of the couple display frame 1654 may be the same as the display position and size of the selected equipment display frame 1653 displayed in the reach execution notice effect (the couple display frame 1654 and the selected equipment display frame 1653 may be the same frame in the same position). Although the reach execution notice effect and the couple effect are not executed simultaneously, because the couple display frame 1654 and the selected equipment display frame 1653 are the same frame in the same position, the player only needs to focus on the same position for the reach execution notice effect and the couple effect, and does not have to move their eyes unnecessarily.

Figure 54(B) shows the state when one game ball B has entered the starting hole and a change based on that ball has begun. The performance display device 1600 displays a festival background image such as lanterns, fireworks, and happi coats, the decorative pattern that is changing, the couple display frame 1654, and a predetermined pending display corresponding to the change. The display within the couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54(B) is the same as the display within the couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54(A) (no change).

Figure 54 (C) shows a state in which another game ball B has entered the starting hole while the variation started in Figure 54 (B) is continuing. The effect display device 1600 displays a festival background image such as lanterns, fireworks, and happi coats, the decorative pattern being varied, a couple display frame 1654, a reserved display of a predetermined mode corresponding to the variation, and a reserved display of a predetermined mode corresponding to one of the pending variations.

The display in couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54(C) (i.e., when the first change is put on hold while a change is being made) may change from the display in couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54(B). This change in the display in couple display frame 1654 is an example of the other winning effect described above, and whether or not this change will be made is determined based on the above-mentioned allocation of whether or not the other winning effect will be made.

For example, within couple display frame 1654, a new university student couple (a duo consisting of one person with "big" written on their torso and "male" written on their head, and another person with "big" written on their torso and "female" written on their head) is displayed behind the high school couple, and the university student couple is displayed as if whispering to the high school couple, "You two make a good match," and the high school couple members appear to look embarrassed.

The newly displayed college student couple is displayed as a periodic dynamic display with a predetermined time as one cycle, and although the outline of the college student couple changes in this periodic dynamic display, the display position of the college student couple remains unchanged until the ongoing change is completed. The high school student couple is displayed as a periodic dynamic display (cyclic display) with a predetermined time as one cycle, and the outline of the high school student couple does not change in this periodic dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display is displayed in which the high school student couple's hands move slightly).

Figure 54 (D) shows a state in which the variation that began in Figure 54 (B) is continuing, and another game ball B has entered the starting hole after Figure 54 (C). The effect display device 1600 displays a festival background image such as lanterns, fireworks, and happi coats, the decorative pattern being varied, the couple display frame 1654, a reserved display of a predetermined mode corresponding to the variation, and reserved displays of predetermined modes corresponding to each of the two pending variations.

The display in couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54(D) (i.e., when a second change is put on hold while a change is being executed) may change from the display in couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54(C). Note that the display in couple display frame 1654 may also change if a third or fourth change is put on hold while a change is being executed. If a second, third, or fourth change is put on hold while a change is being executed, the display in couple display frame 1654 will change depending on the hold status of the first change.

For example, if a college student couple is not displayed in couple display frame 1654 at the time shown in FIG. 54(C) (i.e., when the first change is put on hold), then a college student couple will not be displayed in couple display frame 1654 at the time shown in FIG. 54(D) (i.e., even when the second or subsequent changes are put on hold). Also, for example, if a college student couple is displayed in couple display frame 1654 as shown in FIG. 54(C) (when the first change is put on hold), then second and subsequent college student couples will be additionally displayed in couple display frame 1654 as shown in FIG. 54(D) (even when the second or subsequent changes are put on hold).

If, for example, when the second or subsequent reserved couples are changed, whether or not to display the second through fourth university couples were decided by the same lottery as for displaying the first university couple, there is a high probability that a different winning effect will be executed in the event of a losing change. Therefore, if the first four university couples are displayed, it would be clear to the player that there is an extremely high possibility that the change is a losing one. Therefore, as described above, the second through fourth university couples are displayed if the first university couple is displayed, and are not displayed if the first university couple is not displayed.

The college student couple additionally displayed in the couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54(D) may be the same image as the college student couple displayed from Figure 54(C) because they are twins of the college student couple displayed from Figure 54(C), or they may be different images from the college student couple displayed from Figure 54(C) because they are different people from the college student couple displayed from Figure 54(C).

In addition, in Figure 54(D), the newly displayed college student couple is displayed as a periodic dynamic display with a predetermined time as one cycle, and although the outline of the college student couple changes in this periodic dynamic display, the display position of the college student couple remains unchanged until the ongoing change is completed (however, although they are displayed in a different position from the position in which the college student couple displayed in Figure 54(C) was displayed, it is preferable to display them at the same height to make it easier for the player to recognize that a new college student couple has been displayed). In addition, in Figure 54(D), the high school student couple displayed in couple display frame 1654 continues to be displayed in the same way as in Figure 54(C), for example.

The college student couple added in Figure 54 (C) or Figure 54 (D) may be displayed in a display mode selected from a plurality of display modes with different jackpot expectations. The plurality of display modes may, for example, be a display mode in which a dynamic display of the college student couple whispering "They make a great couple," loops (a cyclic display is performed), a display mode in which a dynamic display of the college student couple whispering "They make a great couple," followed by a "Go for it" gesture, loops (a cyclic display is performed), or a mode in which the cyclic display time is different, or the message "They make a great couple," may be displayed instead of the message "They make a great couple," with the cyclic display time being the same but the display mode being different.

The cyclical display of high school couples and university couples in the couple presentation is performed inside the couple display frame 1654, as described above. This allows the player to keep their gaze fixed on the couple display frame 1654. The cyclical display of high school couples and university couples in the couple presentation may be displayed both inside and outside the couple display frame 1654, or may be displayed outside the couple display frame 1654.

In addition, for example, a cyclical display of a high school couple or a university student couple in a couple presentation may be highlighted outside the couple display frame 1654, and then displayed back inside the couple display frame 1654. This type of highlighting presentation can appeal to players by highlighting the cyclical display of a high school couple or a university student couple.

The cycle of the cyclical display of the college student couple in the couple presentation is 2.5 seconds, which is the same as the time from when only the silhouettes of the foot armor and weapon begin to be displayed in the reach execution preview presentation until the state changes to when only the weapon is displayed in silhouette (i.e., the sum of the 2.0 seconds that the foot armor selection display takes and the 0.5 seconds that the foot armor silhouette is hidden in the foot armor selection display). Another winning presentation (the college student couple display presentation) is highly likely to be displayed when game ball B enters the starting hole (its probability of being displayed is higher than its probability of not being displayed). Therefore, by having the cycle of the cyclical display of the college student couple in the couple presentation be the same as the time from when only the silhouettes of the foot armor and weapon begin to be displayed in the reach execution preview presentation until the state changes to when only the weapon is displayed in silhouette, the player can predict in advance how long the relevant time in the reach execution preview presentation will be, thereby reducing the player's sense of tension when selecting foot armor when the reach execution preview presentation is executed.

Furthermore, the cycle of the cyclical display of the college student couple in the couple performance may be longer or shorter than, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is the time it takes from the start of the state in which only the leg armor and weapon are displayed in silhouette in the reach execution preview performance until the state changes to the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette.

If the cycle of the cyclical display of the university student couple in the couple performance is shorter than the time it takes for the reach execution preview performance to change from when the state in which only the foot armor and weapon are displayed in silhouette to when the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette to when the reach execution preview performance is executed, the player will know in advance that they will have a long time to select their preferred foot armor, and will be able to select their preferred foot armor at leisure. On the other hand, if the cycle of the cyclical display of the university student couple in the couple performance is longer than the time it takes for the state in which the state in which only the foot armor and weapon are displayed in silhouette to when the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette to when the reach execution preview performance is executed, the player will know in advance that they will need to select their preferred foot armor quickly, and will be able to select their preferred foot armor with a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the cycle of the cyclical display of the university student couple in the couple performance may be, for example, 3.0 seconds, the same as the duration of the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution preview performance (i.e., the sum of 0.5 seconds, which is the time from when the silhouette of the leg armor is hidden in the leg armor determination display until the leg armor determination display ends, plus 2.0 seconds, which is the display time of the weapon selection display, plus 0.5 seconds, which is the display time until the silhouette of the weapon is hidden in the weapon determination display), or it may be longer or shorter than 3.0 seconds.

Furthermore, the cycle of the university student couple's cyclical display in the couple performance may be, for example, 3.0 seconds, the same as the time it takes from the start of the reach execution preview performance when only the weapon is displayed in silhouette until it changes to the state where "Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed without a silhouette (i.e., the sum of the 3.0 seconds from the start of the weapon selection display to the start of the result display), or it may be longer or shorter than this 3.0 seconds.

Since another winning effect (a display effect of a university student couple) is highly likely to be displayed when game ball B enters the starting hole (it is more likely to be displayed than not), the cycle of the university student couple's cyclical display in the couple effect is the same as the duration of the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution preview effect, or the time from when the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette begins to when the state changes to when "Equipment Decided!!" is displayed without a silhouette, allowing the player to know in advance how long the time in the reach execution preview effect will be, reducing the player's sense of tension when selecting a weapon when the reach execution preview effect is executed.

Furthermore, if the cycle of the cyclical display of the university student couple in the couple performance is shorter than the duration of the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution notice performance, or the time from when the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette begins until the state changes to when "Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed without a silhouette, the player can take their time to operate the pressing operation unit 303 in the weapon selection display when the reach execution notice performance is executed.

If the cycle of the cyclical display of the university student couple in the couple performance is longer than the duration of the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution notice performance, or the time from when the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette begins until the state in which "Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed without a silhouette, the player will know in advance that they will need to quickly operate the pressing operation unit 303 to select a weapon when the reach execution notice performance is executed, and will be able to perform that operation with a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the cycle of the cyclical display of the college student couple in the couple performance may be, for example, 1.5 seconds, the same as the duration of the state in which "Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed without a silhouette in the reach execution preview performance, or it may be longer or shorter than this 1.5 seconds.

There is a high probability that another winning effect (a display effect of a university student couple) will be displayed when game ball B enters the starting hole (the probability of it being displayed is higher than the probability of it not being displayed), so by making the cycle of the university student couple's cyclical display in the couple effect the same as the duration of the reach execution preview effect, the player can know in advance how long the duration of the reach execution preview effect will be, easing the player's tension when reviewing the characters, armor, and weapons that were finally decided when the reach execution preview effect was executed.

Furthermore, if the cycle of the university student couple's cyclical display in the couple performance is shorter than the duration of the state in which "Equipment Decided!!" is displayed without a silhouette in the reach execution preview performance, the duration is long, allowing the player to calmly reconfirm the character, armor, and weapon that were finally decided when the reach execution preview performance was executed.

Furthermore, if the cycle of the university student couple's cyclical display in the couple performance is shorter than the duration of the state in which "Equipment Decided!!" is displayed without a silhouette in the reach execution preview performance, the player will know in advance that this duration is short, and will be able to recognize in advance that it would be better to quickly reconfirm the character, armor, and weapon that were finally decided when the reach execution preview performance was executed.

Note that while the reach execution preview effect may be executable when the university student couple is cyclically displayed in the couple effect, it is desirable to hide the university student couple (cyclically displayed) in the couple effect when the reach execution preview effect is executed while the university student couple is cyclically displayed in the couple effect, in order to allow the player to focus on the reach execution preview effect. Note that the university student couple that is hidden when the reach execution preview effect is executed while the university student couple is cyclically displayed in the couple effect should be able to re-display when or after the reach execution preview effect has ended (i.e., it may or may not be re-displayed).

Furthermore, if a university student couple is hidden due to the execution of a reach execution notice effect while the university student couple is being cycled in the couple effect, the university student couple may be able to re-display after the reach execution notice effect has ended (for example, after a miss pattern in which no weapon is selected, as shown in FIG. 52, is displayed) and if game ball B enters the starting hole before the pattern is determined in the ongoing variation, or may not be able to re-display even if the ball enters at that timing.

By having the hidden college student couple reappear when or after the reach execution preview performance has ended, players who were enjoying the cycle of the college student couple can enjoy the cycle again. By not having the hidden college student couple reappear when the reach execution preview performance has ended, players can focus on the final battle reach that has an extremely high chance of winning after the reach execution preview performance has ended.

In addition, if a university student couple is hidden due to a reach execution preview performance being executed while a university student couple is being cycled in the couple performance, and the university student couple re-displays when or after the reach execution preview performance ends, the re-displayed university student couple may be cycled (as they were before they were hidden), or may not be cycled.

By displaying the re-displayed college student couple in a cyclical manner, the player's attention can be drawn to the re-displayed college student couple, but by not displaying the re-displayed college student couple in a cyclical manner, the player's attention is not drawn to the college student couple as much, allowing the player to focus on the final battle reach, which has an extremely high chance of winning and can be executed after the reach execution notice performance has ended.

Furthermore, when the redisplayed college student couple is cycled, they may be cycled in the same display mode as before they were hidden, or they may be cycled in a different display mode than before they were hidden (for example, before they were hidden, they were displayed in a looping dynamic display of the college student couple whispering "They make a great couple," but after they are redisplayed, they may be cycled in a looping dynamic display of the college student whispering "They make a great couple" to the couple followed by a "Go for it" gesture).

As mentioned above, the Final Battle Battle Reach, which is executed as a reach effect for the winning/losing effect of the variation pattern "SP Reach 3," and the couple effect are never executed simultaneously. If a university student couple (cycle display) is displayed in the couple effect before the Final Battle Battle Reach starts, it is recommended that the university student couple (cycle display) in the couple effect be hidden when the Final Battle Battle Reach starts.

When the final battle reach effect ends, the university student couple (cycle display) in the couple effect will re-display. Note that even after the final battle reach effect ends, the university student couple (cycle display) in the couple effect may not re-display, but it is desirable that the rate at which they re-display is higher than the rate at which they do not re-display (it may also be lower than the rate at which they do not re-display).

[6-7. Chance-up effects during reach]
The following describes the reach chance up effect. In the middle of a reach effect as a win/loss effect in the fluctuation of the fluctuation patterns "SP reach 1,""SP reach 2," and "SP reach 3," a smart ball crune effect is executed as an effect suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot in that fluctuation (it may be executed with a predetermined probability, or it may be executed without fail). The smart ball crune effect can be executed in the middle of a reach effect as a win/loss effect in the fluctuation of the fluctuation patterns "SP reach 1,""SP reach 2," and "SP reach 3." In other words, the smart ball crune effect can be executed in a reach effect as a win/loss effect executed after passing through a reach selection notice effect, in a reach effect as a win/loss effect executed after passing through a reach promotion notice effect, and in a reach effect as a win/loss effect executed after passing through a reach execution notice effect.

Note that the reach effect as a win/loss effect during fluctuations in the "SP Reach 3" fluctuation pattern is an example of a first reach effect, and the reach effect as a win/loss effect during fluctuations in the "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2" fluctuation patterns is an example of a second reach effect. Also, the reach effects as a win/loss effect during fluctuations in the "SP Reach 1," "SP Reach 2," and "SP Reach 3" fluctuation patterns are all examples of special reach effects.

The Smart Ball Croon effect is not performed during fluctuation patterns where reach effects are not performed, such as "shortened fluctuation" and "normal fluctuation," or during fluctuation patterns where SP reach is not performed, such as "normal reach" and "normal long reach." The Smart Ball Croon effect is an example of a chance-up effect during a reach.

In the Smart Ball Crane effect, two or three (multiple) Cranes are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and each Crane has two holes. In addition, a numerical value such as "+XX%" is written on each hole of each Crane. In the Smart Ball Crane effect, a ball rolls on each Crane and is displayed as landing in one of the holes, and the sum of the numerical values written on the holes that the ball has landed in on each Crane indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the current fluctuations.

Figure 55 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of a pattern allocation table for determining the effect pattern of the Smart Ball Croon effect. The values of the pattern allocation table 550 are determined for each of the variation patterns "SP Reach 1," "SP Reach 2," and "SP Reach 3." The pattern allocation table 550 in Figure 55 corresponds to the variation pattern "SP Reach 3," and the pattern allocation tables 550 corresponding to the variation patterns "SP Reach 1" and "SP Reach 2" are not shown.

The pattern allocation table 550 is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The pattern allocation table 550 indicates, for example, a performance pattern number 5501, a lower left crane value 5502, a lower right crane value 5503, an upper middle crane value 5504, a total 5505, an allocation 5506, and an expectation level 5507.

The effect pattern number 5501 indicates a number that identifies the effect pattern executed in the smart ball crone effect. The bottom left crone number 5502, bottom right crone number 5503, and top middle crone number 5504 indicate the numbers written in the left and right holes of the bottom left crone, bottom right crone, and top middle crone displayed on the effect display device 1600, respectively. The bottom left crone, bottom right crone, and top middle crone are crones that are displayed in the bottom left, bottom right, and top middle, respectively, within the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the smart ball crone effect.

In addition, in each Smart Ball Croon effect pattern, the ball will enter the hole corresponding to the underlined numbers in the bottom left Croon number 5502, bottom right Croon number 5503, and top middle Croon number 5504. Note that the top middle Croon is not displayed in the effect patterns "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 25."

Total 5505 indicates the sum of the underlined numbers in the lower left crane number 5502, the lower right crane number 5503, and the upper center crane number 5504 (i.e., the numbers corresponding to the holes into which the ball falls in each crane). Allocation 5506 indicates the allocation of each effect pattern when the Smart Ball Crone effect is performed during a jackpot variation and when it is performed during a miss variation.

Expectation level 5507 indicates the probability of a jackpot when each presentation pattern is selected. As shown in FIG. 55, the numerical values of the holes into which the ball will fall in each crane and the allocation of each presentation pattern are determined so that, regardless of which presentation pattern is selected, the sum of the numerical values corresponding to the holes into which the ball will fall in each crane indicated by total 5505 and the jackpot expectation indicated by expectation level 5507 will be approximately the same. For example, in pattern 18, the jackpot expectation level is indicated as 70% in the smart ball crane presentation (the jackpot expectation level of 70% is indicated by the presentation in which the ball falls into 30% of the holes (left hole) of the lower left crane and 40% of the holes (right hole) of the lower right crane), and the expectation level for an actual jackpot is also 70.01%.

Figures 56 and 57 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the Smart Ball Croon effect. Figures 56 and 57 explain an example in which the Smart Ball Croon effect is executed when the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" varies.

Figure 56 (A) shows the state where the Final Battle Reach, which is a reach effect as a winning or losing effect for the variation pattern "SP Reach 3", has begun, and the title of the Final Battle Reach is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Figure 56 (B) shows the state where the Final Battle Reach continues. The effect display device 1600 displays a display showing the character determined in the reach execution preview effect, equipped with the various protective gear and weapons determined in the reach execution preview effect described above, facing off against an enemy character.

Figure 56 (C) shows the state when the smart ball crane effect has started. In Figure 56 (C), three smart ball display areas 1655 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, superimposed on the display of Figure 56 (B) (i.e., while the display of the final battle reach effect is being displayed). Each smart ball display area 1655 displays a lever that launches a ball and a ball, and an indication is given that the lever will launch the ball.

For example, the display priority of the smart ball display area 1655 is higher than the display priority of the character in the final battle reach performance (i.e., the smart ball display area 1655 is displayed closer to the player than the character), but is lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern or pending display (i.e., the decorative pattern or pending display is displayed closer to the player than the smart ball display area 1655).

In the smart ball crane effect, if an effect pattern in which the lower left crane, lower right crane, and upper center crane are displayed is selected from the pattern allocation table 550, three smart ball display areas 1655 are displayed as shown in FIG. 56(C), and if an effect pattern in which only the lower left crane and lower right crane are displayed is selected, two smart ball display areas 1655 are displayed as shown in FIG. 56(C). If an effect pattern in which only the lower left crane and lower right crane are displayed is selected, the central smart ball display area 1655 of the three smart ball display areas 1655 should be hidden, and the two smart ball display areas 1655 should be displayed symmetrically around the center line of the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When a ball is launched in Figure 56(C), the display transitions to Figure 56(D). In Figure 56(D), a crune is displayed, and the ball orbits (for example, clockwise) on each crune. Note that the position on each crune of the ball orbiting around it is the same for all crunes. In other words, the dynamic orbital display of the ball on each crune is synchronized. Note that the orbital display of the ball is a periodic cyclical display with a predetermined time period as one period (one cycle).

The length of the cycle in the orbiting display of the ball is, for example, 4.5 seconds, the same as one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cyclical display. By having the length of the cycle in the orbiting display of the ball be the same as one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cyclical display, the player can check the cycle of one cycle display and also know the cycle of the other, which makes the player feel good.

Furthermore, the length of the cycle in the orbiting display of the ball may be longer or shorter than, for example, 4.5 seconds, which is one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cyclical display. By making the length of the cycle in the orbiting display of the ball longer than one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cyclical display, the player can concentrate on selecting the reach performance in the reach selection preview performance. By making the length of the cycle in the orbiting display of the ball shorter than one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cyclical display, the player can more easily notice that the ball is orbiting on the croon in the smart ball croon performance. Regardless of whether the cycle in the orbiting display of the ball or one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cyclical display is longer, it is desirable that one cycle of the longer cycle be shorter than two cycles of the shorter cycle, but one cycle of the longer cycle may be longer than two cycles of the shorter cycle.

In addition, because the orbital display of the ball on each crown is synchronized, the period of the orbital display of the ball on each crown is the same. This allows players to follow the movement of the ball orbiting on one crown and understand the movement of the ball orbiting on other crowns, reducing player eye strain. The display of the ball orbiting on each crown is an example of a periodic display.

Note that if the orbital display of the ball on all the crunes is perfectly synchronized, some players may get bored of the same behavior. Therefore, the orbital direction (periodic display mode) of the ball on at least one of the multiple crunes displayed may be different. For example, when three crunes are displayed, the orbital direction of the ball on one crune may be forward, and the orbital direction of the ball on the remaining two crunes may be reverse (for example, clockwise is forward, and counterclockwise is reverse).

The display position of the bottom left crane remains the same whether the ball rotates forward or backward on the bottom left crane. The same is true for the bottom right crane and the top middle crane. This means that in order to see the crane, the player only needs to look at the same display position regardless of the direction the ball is rotating.

In addition, for example, in the Smart Ball Crane effect executed in the reach effect as a win/lose effect in the variation of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2," the rotation direction of all the balls on the crune may be reverse or forward. Reverse rotation of all the balls on the crune can make the player feel that their expectations for a jackpot may have increased. Furthermore, when the rotation direction of the balls on the crune is reverse, the expectations for a jackpot may actually increase. Specifically, for example, the holes and numbers that the balls will enter are determined so that when the rotation direction of the balls on the crune is reverse, they are more likely to enter holes with larger numbers (resulting in a higher expectation of a jackpot).

Furthermore, for example, in the smart ball crane effect executed in the reach effect (final battle reach) as a win/lose effect in the variation of the variation pattern "SP reach 3," the rotation direction of all balls on the crane may be either forward or reverse. The display of the ball orbiting on the crane in the smart ball crane effect executed in the reach effect as a win/lose effect in the variation of the variation pattern "SP reach 1" or "SP reach 2" and the display of the ball orbiting on the crane in the smart ball crane effect executed in the reach effect as a win/lose effect in the variation of the variation pattern "SP reach 3" are related displays that differ only in the rotation direction, or are the same display that rotates in the same direction.

In the smart ball crane effect executed in the reach effect (final battle reach) as a win/lose effect in the variation of the variation pattern "SP Reach 3," the display of the balls on the crane rotating is an example of a first periodic display. Furthermore, in the smart ball crane effect executed in the reach effect as a win/lose effect in the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2," the display of all the balls on the crane rotating in reverse is an example of a second periodic display. Furthermore, the cyclical display of a university student couple in the couple effect described above is an example of a third periodic display. Note that while it is possible to display the second periodic display before the first periodic display, it is desirable that it be impossible to display the second periodic display after the first periodic display.

When the cycle display of college student couples in the couple effect is displayed, a reach effect is executed as a winning/losing effect for the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2," and even if all of the balls on the crane are displayed in reverse rotation in the smart ball crane effect during the reach effect, it is desirable to continue displaying the cycle display of college student couples in the couple effect. When game ball B enters the starting hole while the cycle display of college student couples in the couple effect is being displayed continuously, it is desirable to display a cycle display of new college student couples in the couple effect (increasing the number of college student couples). By simultaneously displaying the balls on the crane in reverse rotation and the cycle display of college student couples, and by enabling the display of additional college student couples, the player's sense of anticipation can be synergistically increased.

In addition, when the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple effect is not displayed, a reach effect is executed as a winning/losing effect for the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2," and when the smart ball croon effect during the reach effect displays all the balls on the croon rotating in reverse, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), it is desirable to display the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple effect. By simultaneously displaying the balls on the croon rotating in reverse and the cycle display of the university student couple, the player's sense of anticipation can be synergistically increased.

On the other hand, when the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple effect is not displayed, the Final Battle Reach, which is a reach effect as a win/loss effect for "SP Reach 3," is executed, and in the smart ball effect during that reach effect, when all the balls on the crane are displayed rotating in a forward direction, even if game ball B enters the starting hole (whether it is an over-win or not), it is desirable that the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple effect not be displayed. This is because the Final Battle Battle Reach is originally a reach effect with a high expectation of a jackpot, and if the couple effect is displayed, the player's attention may be diverted to the couple effect, reducing interest.

If the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple effect is displayed before the start of the Final Battle Battle Reach, which is a reach effect that determines whether a win or loss occurs in "SP Reach 3," the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple effect is hidden when the Final Battle Battle Reach begins, in order to focus the player on the Final Battle Battle Reach, which has a high expectation of a jackpot. Then, when the Final Battle Battle Reach ends, the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple effect is redisplayed. Note that the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple effect may not be redisplayed even after the Final Battle Battle Reach ends, but in that case, the rate at which it is redisplayed may be higher (or lower) than the rate at which it is not redisplayed. If the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple effect is redisplayed when the Final Battle Battle Reach ends, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed even if a loss is announced in the Final Battle Battle Reach. If the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple effect is not redisplayed, it is possible to calm the player who is disappointed when a loss is announced in the Final Battle Battle Reach.

In addition, when the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple effect is displayed and the reach effect as a winning/losing effect of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2" ends, the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple effect may continue to be displayed or may be hidden. For example, the cycle display of the university student couple may be forcibly hidden when the reach effect ends, or whether the cycle display of the university student couple will continue to be displayed or hidden when the reach effect ends may be determined by lottery based on a predetermined percentage (the percentage for continuing to display the cycle display of the student couple may be higher, lower, or the same as the percentage for hiding it).

When the reach effect ends, the cycling display of the college student couple can either continue to be displayed or be hidden. If the display continues, the player's sense of anticipation can be prevented from decreasing even after the reach effect ends, and if the display is hidden, the player's feelings can be calmed as the reach effect ends.

Note that, as mentioned above, the display of the crone in which the ball rotates in the reverse direction may be displayed simultaneously with the cycle display of the college student couple, so in order to improve the visibility of both displays, the display positions (areas) of the crone in which the ball rotates in the reverse direction and the cycle display of the college student couple are different. Also, as mentioned above, it is desirable for the display position of the crone to be the same whether the ball is rotating forward or backward, so inevitably the display positions (areas) of the crone in which the ball rotates in the forward direction and the cycle display of the college student couple are also different.

The display of the crane with a ball rotating in the reverse direction may be displayed in a different position (a position where the display areas do not overlap) from the display of the crane with a ball rotating in the forward direction, and in a smaller display size than the display of the crane with a ball rotating in the forward direction. In particular, the display positions (areas) of the display of the crane with a ball rotating in the forward direction, the display of the crane with a ball rotating in the reverse direction, and the cycle display of the college student couple may be positioned so that they do not overlap. Furthermore, the display positions (areas) of the display of the crane with a ball rotating in the forward direction and the display of the crane with a ball rotating in the reverse direction may overlap with part of the display position (area) of the cycle display of the college student couple.

Furthermore, the length of the cycle of the orbital display of the ball on the croon (regardless of whether it is rotating forward or backward) may be 4.0 seconds, which is a different time from the 2.5 seconds that is the cycle of the display of the university student couple in the couple performance.

Furthermore, in the Smart Ball Crane effect executed in the reach effect (final battle reach) as a winning or losing effect in the variation of the variation pattern "SP Reach 3," the length of the cycle in which the balls on the crane rotate is called the first time, in the Smart Ball Crane effect executed in the reach effect as a winning or losing effect in the variation of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2," the length of the cycle in which all the balls on the crane rotate in reverse is called the second time, and the length of the cycle in which the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple effect described above is called the third time. As the relationship between the first time, second time, and third time, any of the following is adopted.

The first time, second time, and third time may all be the same length, such as first time = second time = third time. Alternatively, only one of the first time, second time, and third time may be different in length, such as first time = second time < third time, first time = second time > third time, first time = third time < second time, first time = third time > second time, second time = third time < first time, or second time = third time > first time. Alternatively, the first time, second time, and third time may all be different in length, such as first time < second time < third time, first time < third time < second time, second time < first time < third time, second time < third time < first time, third time < first time < second time, or third time < second time < first time. If the first, second, and third times have cycles of the same length, it will be easier for the player to remember those cycles of the same length. Furthermore, if the first, second, and third times have cycles of different lengths, the player can enjoy effects with long cycles.

The number of crunes displayed in Figure 56 (D) corresponds to the effect pattern selected from the pattern allocation table 550, and is the same as the number of balls shot out. Furthermore, the numerical values written in the holes of each crune on the effect display device 1600 correspond to the effect pattern selected from the pattern allocation table 550.

When two crunes are displayed, a lower left crune and a lower right crune are displayed, and when three crunes are displayed, a lower left crune, a lower right crune, and an upper middle crune are displayed; however, the display positions (display heights (positions in the y-axis direction on the performance display device 1600)) of the lower left crune and lower right crune when two crunes are displayed are the same as the display positions (display heights (positions in the y-axis direction on the performance display device 1600)) of the lower left crune and lower right crune when three crunes are displayed.

In other words, when two crunes are displayed and when three crunes are displayed, the player can understand that the bottom left crune and the bottom right crune are the same crune.When three crunes are displayed, in addition to the bottom left and bottom right crunes that are the same as when two crunes are displayed, an upper middle crune is also displayed, which gives the player a sense of anticipation when three crunes are displayed.

It is desirable that the area in which each crane is displayed be displayed in a position that is included in the area surrounded by the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance. This means that when the smart ball crane performance is performed in the reach performance that has passed through the reach selection preview performance, the player does not need to move their eyes.

In addition, the area in which each crane is displayed may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the area surrounded by the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance. Each crane displays a cyclical display in which the ball rotates, and in the reach selection preview performance, a cyclical display in which the reach title display is repeated in sequence within the reach title display frame 1651. Therefore, by positioning the area in which each crane is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the area surrounded by the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that although these displays are all cyclical displays, they are not related to each other.

In the examples of Figures 56 and 57, when the crane is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the final battle reach effect continues to be displayed behind the crane (the final battle reach effect is progressing), but when the crane is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the final battle reach effect display may be hidden.

In Figure 56(E), the display of the ball orbiting each crane continues. In Figure 56(F), the display of the ball orbiting each crane continues, and the position of the ball orbiting each crane has returned to the same position as in Figure 56(D) (the ball has completed one revolution around the crane). Note that in order to create a sense of tension for the player for a long period of time, the ball will not enter the hole in the crane before it has completed one revolution around the crane.

In Figure 57 (G), the display of the ball orbiting each crane has finished, and the ball on each crane is displayed as entering a hole. For example, when the display of the ball orbiting is on its third lap, an effect is shown in which the ball enters a hole in the crane.

Figure 57(H) shows the state in which a ball has entered the hole in each crane. In Figure 57(H), the ball has entered the "+30%" hole in all crane. Effects are displayed around each number corresponding to the hole into which the ball has entered, informing the player that the ball has entered the "+30%" hole in each crane. Note that in the example of Figure 57(H), the ball is displayed as entering the hole with the same number for all crane, but there may be a presentation pattern in which the ball enters a hole with a different number for just one crane, or there may be a presentation pattern in which the ball enters a hole with a different number for all crane. Note that in Figures 56(B) to 57(H), the same display of the final battle reach presentation is shown on the drawing, but the final battle reach presentation progresses each time.

When a predetermined amount of time has passed since the ball entered each crane hole, the Smart Ball Croon effect ends, and only the Final Battle Reach effect continues. Figure 57 (I) shows the state where the Smart Ball Croon effect has ended and the Final Battle Reach effect continues.

Figure 58 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a ball rotates on a crane in a smart ball crane presentation. In other words, Figure 58 is a diagram that shows only the display of a ball rotating on a crane in the smart ball crane presentation shown in Figures 56 and 57.

As shown in Figures 58(A) to 58(H), the ball is displayed circling the crane. After Figure 58(H), the display returns to Figure 58(A), causing the ball to circulate at least once around the crane.

Note that while the sphere shown in Figures 58(A) to 58(H) is rotating around the crown, the outline of the figure consisting of the crown and sphere may change. For example, in Figure 58(A), the outline of the figure consisting of the crown and sphere is shaped so that about the upper half of the sphere extends beyond the center of the top of the ellipse indicated by the crown, while in Figure 58(B), the outline of the figure consisting of the crown and sphere is shaped so that most of the top of the sphere extends beyond the upper right part of the ellipse indicated by the crown.

While the orbital display of the ball orbiting the crane is being performed, the outline of the figure consisting of the crane and the ball may continue to change, or there may be periods during which the outline of the figure consisting of the crane and the ball does not change, such as the periods shown in Figures 58(D) to 58(F) (during which periods the outline maintains the elliptical shape indicated by the crane (because the ball does not extend beyond the crane)).

In addition, in the rotation display where the ball rotates around the crane, the rotation speed of the ball may be either high or low (for example, the rotation speed of the ball may be selected based on a predetermined allocation such that a high rotation speed of the ball has a lower likelihood of winning than a low rotation speed). It is desirable that the outline of the figure consisting of the crane and the ball be different when the rotation speed of the ball is high or low.

Note that while Figure 58 shows an example of a ball rotating forward on a crane, if the ball rotates backward on a crane, the outline of the figure consisting of the crane and ball may continue to change while the orbital display of the ball orbiting on the crane is being displayed, or there may be a period during which the outline of the figure consisting of the crane and ball does not change, as in Figures 58(D) to 58(F), or the outline of the figure consisting of the crane and ball may not change at all.

In the examples of Figures 56 and 57, the display of the Smart Ball Crane effect begins during the execution of a Final Battle Reach, which is an example of an SP Reach, but the display of the Smart Ball Crane effect may also begin before the SP Reach is performed (for example, while the title of the SP Reach is being displayed or before that title is displayed). In this way, the Smart Ball Crane effect indicates to the player in advance the likelihood of a jackpot before the SP Reach effect begins, allowing the player to enjoy the SP Reach effect with an appropriate level of expectation (in other words, without excessive expectation or excessive disappointment).

There is also a pattern in which the Smart Ball Croon effect is executed when an SP Reach is being executed, without executing the Reach Selection Notice effect. For example, when the basic pattern is selected in the variation pattern "SP Reach 2"/"SP Reach 3", a pattern can be realized in which the Smart Ball Croon effect is executed when an SP Reach is being executed after the Reach Promotion Notice effect/Reach Execution Notice effect is executed, or without any notice effect being executed (in other words, the Reach Selection Notice effect is not executed).

Furthermore, for example, when the basic pattern is selected in a variation of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1," a pattern can be realized in which the advance notice effect is not performed (i.e., the reach selection advance notice effect is not executed), and the smart ball crune effect is executed when the SP reach is being executed. Furthermore, it is also possible to prevent the reach selection advance notice effect from being executed after the smart ball crune effect has ended when the SP reach is being executed, and before the variation in which the SP reach was executed has ended. In this way, by not executing the reach selection advance notice effect before or after the smart ball crune effect is executed, the player can concentrate on the smart ball crune effect without becoming tired from the selection operation in the reach selection advance notice effect.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the Smart Ball Croun effect not be displayed again after it has finished being displayed (in other words, the Smart Ball Croun effect can only be executed once per change), but it is also possible for the Smart Ball Croun effect to be displayed multiple times per change. If the Smart Ball Croun effect is not displayed again after it has finished being displayed, the player's attention can be focused on the Smart Ball Croun effect, and if the Smart Ball Croun effect can be displayed multiple times per change, the player's sense of expectation will not be significantly reduced even if the first Smart Ball Croun effect indicates low expectations.

As mentioned above, when a retry effect executed in a retry pattern is displayed, the SP reach effect (any of the special reach effects) that was displayed immediately before the retry effect was displayed may continue to be displayed in a corner display area of the effect display device 1600 even after the retry effect is displayed. In other words, if a retry effect is performed in the middle of an SP reach effect in which a crune effect is being performed in a smart ball crune effect (a periodic display in which the outer line changes within a predetermined time period (i.e., a circular display in which the ball orbits on the crune)), the SP reach effect in which the crune effect is being performed can be continued to be displayed, and the retry effect and the reach selection notice effect, reach promotion notice effect, or reach execution notice effect that follows the retry effect can be executed. Furthermore, if the retry effect can be executed multiple times with one change, the SP reach effect in which the crane effect is being executed remains displayed, and preview effects including a reach selection preview effect, a reach promotion preview effect, or a reach execution preview effect can be executed multiple times (the same preview effect may be executed multiple times, or different preview effects may be executed). This allows the player to enjoy the SP reach effect in which the crane effect is being executed while watching the preview effect after the retry effect. However, as mentioned above, the reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, and reach execution preview effect will not be executed after the display of the smart ball crane effect has ended.

When the basic pattern or rare pattern described above is selected, at least one of the reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, and reach execution preview effect will not be executed. Therefore, even if a variation pattern in which a special reach effect is executed is selected, the special reach effect will be executed without going through the reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, or reach execution preview (for example, without going through the reach selection preview effect), and the crone effect in the smart ball crone effect may be executed in the special reach effect.

In addition, during the crane performance in the smart ball crane performance (when a periodic display in which the outer line changes within one cycle, with a predetermined time period being one cycle (i.e., a circular display in which the ball orbits on the crane) is being performed), an effective operation period for the press operation unit 303 occurs, an imitation image of the press operation unit 303 is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the following first or second operation performance may be executed (there may be cases in which the first or second operation performance is executed, or cases in which neither the first or second operation performance is executed).

First, the first operation effect will be described. In the first operation effect, an effective operation period for the press operation unit 303 occurs while the ball is orbiting the crane, and an imitation image of the press operation unit 303 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the press operation unit 303 is operated during the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303, an effect may be produced in which a numerical value written in at least one hole on at least one crane increases. Note that even if the press operation unit 303 is operated during the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303, the orbit display in which the ball orbits the crane continues. By producing an effect in which the numerical value written in the hole increases in the first operation effect, a sense of exhilaration can be imparted to the player. Note that the effect of the numerical value increasing (e.g., effect display) does not affect the orbit display (e.g., resetting the cycle), but the effect of the numerical value increasing (e.g., effect display) may be displayed so that it overlaps with or does not overlap the orbit display.

An example of the process for realizing the first operation effect is as follows. First, after selecting an effect pattern from the pattern allocation table 550, it is decided whether or not to execute the first operation effect, for example, according to a predetermined allocation. However, if "Pattern 1" is selected as the effect pattern, the first operation effect will not be executed. If it is decided not to execute the first operation effect, the crane indicated by the selected effect pattern and the numerical values of the holes in each crane are displayed.

If it is decided to execute the first operation effect, a presentation pattern with a lower expectation level 5507 than the selected presentation pattern (for example, if a jackpot expectation level of 60% has been determined for pattern 17, pattern 9 will be displayed with a lower expectation level) is selected (for example, randomly) as the initial display presentation pattern, and the crane and the numerical values of the holes in each crane indicated by the initial display presentation pattern are displayed. If the pressing operation unit 303 is operated (for example, by a so-called single press or a so-called long press) during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the first operation presentation, the numerical values of the holes in each crane that are higher in the selected presentation pattern than in the initial display presentation pattern are displayed to increase to the numerical value in the selected presentation pattern. Note that the difference obtained by subtracting the numerical value of the hole in the initial display presentation pattern from the numerical value of the hole in the selected presentation pattern may be displayed in conjunction with the increase.

When determining the initial display pattern, the ball continues to move around the crane (the movement of the ball around the crane is the same in both the initial display pattern and the determined pattern), so the hole into which the ball enters remains the same in the determined pattern. Therefore, for example, if the determined pattern is pattern 17, the ball enters the left hole in the lower-left crane and the left hole in the lower-right crane. Therefore, the patterns that can be determined as the initial display pattern are determined from among those with a lower expected win probability (displayed numerical value) than the determined pattern and in which the ball enters the left hole in the lower-left crane and the left hole in the lower-right crane. Therefore, for example, if the determined pattern is pattern 17, pattern 10 or pattern 12 will not be selected (because both pattern 10 and pattern 12 have at least one hole into which the ball enters differently from pattern 17). Alternatively, if the determined pattern is pattern 17, pattern 17 may be displayed as the initial display pattern, and the numerical value may not increase even when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. Furthermore, the number of crane will not differ between the determined effect pattern and the initially displayed effect pattern, and if the number of crane displayed in the determined effect pattern is three, the number of crane displayed in the initially displayed effect pattern will also be three.

The display of the ball orbiting around the crane may end during the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (transitioning to a presentation showing which hole it will land in), or the display of the ball orbiting around the crane may end after the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 has ended (transitioning to a presentation showing which hole it will land in).

Next, the second operation presentation will be explained. In the second operation presentation, an effective operation period for the press operation unit 303 occurs while the ball is orbiting the crane, and an imitation image of the press operation unit 303 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600. When the press operation unit 303 is operated during the effective operation period for the press operation unit 303, the display of the ball orbiting on the crane is hidden, and if the current variation is a jackpot variation, either the message "Congratulations!" or the message "Sorry?" (selected, for example, by a predetermined allocation) is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and if the current variation is a loss variation, the message "Sorry?" is displayed on the presentation display device 1600. If the message "Congratulations!" is displayed in the second operation presentation, it can give the player an extremely strong sense of elation, and even if the message "Sorry?" is displayed, it is not confirmed to be a loss and the SP reach presentation continues, so the player will not be disappointed.

In the second operation presentation, if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303, the current variation is a jackpot variation, and the message "Congratulations!" is displayed, the orbiting display of the ball on the crane may be hidden; if the current variation is a jackpot variation and the message "Sorry?" is displayed, or if the current variation is a loss variation (if it is a loss variation, the message "Sorry?" is displayed), the orbiting display of the ball on the crane may not be hidden. In this way, the hiding of the orbiting display of the ball on the crane functions as a confirmation presentation, and if this confirmation presentation appears, it can give the player an extremely strong sense of elation; and if this confirmation presentation does not appear, it is not confirmed as a loss, and the crane presentation and SP reach presentation continue, so the player will not be disappointed.

Furthermore, in the second operation presentation when a jackpot variation is being executed, the display of the orbiting ball on the crane may be made invisible by operating the pressing operation unit 303 during the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303, and then the display of the orbiting ball on the crane may be re-displayed. By executing the display of the orbiting ball on the crane multiple times in this way, the player can gain a sense of superiority.

Note that if an effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the crone effect in the smart ball crone effect and the first or second operation effect is executed, it is desirable that the orbiting display of the ball in the crone effect (a periodic display in which the outline changes within one cycle) does not end (is not made invisible) during the effective operation period. If the orbiting display of the ball in the crone effect were to end during the effective operation period, the hole in the crone effect through which the ball fell would indicate the degree of expectation in the middle of the first or second operation effect, preventing the player from enjoying the operation in the first or second operation effect and the effects that appear as a result of that operation.

The above is one form of the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, but it is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to slot machines, gaming machines that combine pachinko machine 1 and slot machines, pachinko machines in which gaming balls B circulate within the machine without the player having to touch them, medal-less slot machines, etc.

The present invention has been described in detail above with reference to the accompanying drawings, but the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations and includes various modifications and equivalent configurations within the spirit and scope of the appended claims.

1 Pachinko machine 303 Press operation unit 354 Speaker 381 Press detection sensor 1310 Main control board 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Performance display device

Claims (1)

acquisition means for acquiring start information when a start condition is satisfied;
a determination means for determining whether to grant a benefit based on start information for which a start condition is satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
a pattern changing means for changing a pattern when the determination means makes a determination;
a storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of start information in which the start condition is not satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
a pre-determination means for determining whether the determination means will determine to grant a benefit based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied, before the determination by the determination means is made;
a performance control means capable of controlling the performance based on the start information;
A performance display device on which the performance is displayed;
An operation means operable by a player,
The effects include a first special effect,
In the first special effect, the display inside the special area, which is a part of the display area of the effect display device, is displayed in a first special display mode, and the display mode of the display inside the special area is changed from the first special display mode to a second special display mode, but even if the display mode changes from the first special display mode to the second special display mode, the expectation of the awarding of the special benefit does not change,
In the first special performance, the first special display mode is changed to the second special display mode, and after changing to the second special display mode, the first special display mode is changed to the first special display mode;
In the first special effect, the operation of the operation means is valid,
In a situation where the first special effect is being performed, a second special effect different from the first special effect can be performed, and the second special effect can be performed based on the establishment of the start condition when the predetermined number of start information items are not stored in the storage means,
In a situation where the first special effect is being performed, even if the start condition is established when the predetermined number of start information items are not stored in the storage means, the probability that the second special effect based on the establishment of the start condition will not be performed is higher in the case of a pattern variation that awards the benefit than in the case of a pattern variation that does not award the benefit,
The second special effect is a cyclic display in which the outline line of the special display body changes within a predetermined time period on the effect display device, and can be displayed even when the decorative pattern does not form a reach state,
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, an immediate effect different from the second special effect can be executed,
Furthermore, when the start condition is established in a pattern variation in which the first special effect is executed but the benefit is not granted, the second special effect and the immediate effect can be started simultaneously based on the establishment of the start condition,
Furthermore, when the first special effect is executed and the start condition is established in the pattern variation in which the benefit is granted, the second special effect can be started based on the establishment of the start condition, but the immediate effect is not performed,
Furthermore, in the case where the pattern change occurring at the timing when the start condition is established is a pattern change that grants the benefit, the instantaneous performance is not started based on the establishment of the start condition .